initial commit of ebook 16698HEADmain

1 files changed, 10038 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/16698-8.txt b/16698-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f960b90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16698-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10038 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The King's Arrow, by H. A. Cody
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The King's Arrow
+       A Tale of the United Empire Loyalists
+
+
+Author: H. A. Cody
+
+
+
+Release Date: September 15, 2005  [eBook #16698]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE KING'S ARROW***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Al Haines
+
+
+
+Transcriber's note:  In the original book, the 's' in "Wu-las-tukw" is
+                     actually "s-acute", or Unicode U+015B, and the first
+                     'u' in "Pu-kut" is actually "u-breve", or Unicode
+                     U+016D.  In this e-text, both characters have been
+                     rendered as their standard ASCII equivalents.
+
+
+
+
+
+THE KING'S ARROW
+
+A Tale of the United Empire Loyalists
+
+by
+
+H. A. CODY
+
+Author of "The Frontiersman," "The Long Patrol," "Glen of the High North,"
+"Jess of the Rebel Trail," etc.
+
+McClelland and Stewart
+Publishers     Toronto
+George H. Doran Company
+
+1922,
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+To
+
+MY ANCESTORS OF THE UNITED EMPIRE LOYALISTS
+
+
+Who Came to the St. John River, May, 1783,
+
+This Book is Gratefully Dedicated
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+CHAPTER
+
+      I  WHEN THE CANNON ROARED
+     II  "COME AND TAKE IT"
+    III  CUPID'S ARROW
+     IV  THE WARNING
+      V  "TRY IT"
+     VI  WHEN THE BOW-STRING TWANGED
+    VII  OUT OF THE STORM
+   VIII  BENEATH THE SPREADING MAPLE
+     IX  LOVE'S CHARM
+      X  WHILE THE WATER FLOWS
+     XI  THE SUMMONS
+    XII  PLOTTERS IN COUNCIL
+   XIII  THE KING'S RANGERS
+    XIV  WHERE THE RANGERS LED
+     XV  THE LINE IN THE SAND
+    XVI  UNDER COVER OF NIGHT
+   XVII  THE UNKNOWN QUANTITY
+  XVIII  LOYAL FRIENDS
+    XIX  THE SMOKE SIGNAL
+     XX  TEMPERED PUNISHMENT
+    XXI  THROUGH THE WILDERNESS
+   XXII  IN DESPERATE STRAITS
+  XXIII  SIX CANDLES AND ONE
+   XXIV  TIMON OF THE WILDERNESS
+    XXV  UNMASKED
+   XXVI  BEHIND THE BOLTED DOOR
+  XXVII  THROUGH THE NIGHT AND THE STORM
+ XXVIII  WITHIN THE LONE CABIN
+   XXIX  SHELTERING ARMS
+    XXX  THE ROUND-UP
+   XXXI  PEACE AT EVENING TIME
+  XXXII  AFTER MANY DAYS
+ XXXIII  SEEDS OF EMPIRE
+
+
+
+
+  THE LOYALISTS
+
+  (1783)
+
+  "Broad lands, ancestral homes, the gathered wealth
+  Of patient toil and self-denying years
+  Were confiscate and lost. . . .
+  Not drooping like poor fugitives they came
+  In exodus to our Canadian wilds,
+  But full of heart and hope, with heads erect,
+  And fearless eyes, victorious in defeat."
+
+  WILLIAM KIRBY
+
+
+
+"No one will know, because none has told, all that those brave pioneers
+underwent for their devotion and fidelity.  You will see to-day on the
+outskirts of the older settlements little mounds, moss-covered
+tombstones which record the last resting-places of the forefathers of
+the hamlet.  They do not tell you of the brave hearts laid low by
+hunger and exposure, of the girlish forms washed away, of the babes and
+little children who perished for want of proper food and raiment.  They
+have nothing to tell of the courageous, high-minded mothers, wives and
+daughters, who bore themselves as bravely as men, complaining never,
+toiling with men in the fields, banishing all regrets for the life they
+might have led had they sacrificed their loyalty. . . .  No great
+monument is raised to their memory; none is needed; it is enshrined
+forever in the hearts of every Canadian and of every one who admires
+fidelity to principle, devotion and self-sacrifice."
+
+"_Romance of Canada_," BECKLES H. WILLSON
+
+
+
+
+
+THE KING'S ARROW
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+WHEN THE CANNON ROARED
+
+A keen wind whipping in from the west swayed the tops of innumerable
+pines, firs, spruces, and maples.  They were goodly trees, unharmed as
+yet by scathing fire or biting axe.  Proudly they lifted their crests
+to the wind and the sun, while down below, their great boles were
+wrapped in perpetual shade and calm.  Life, mysterious life, lurked
+within those brooding depths, and well did the friendly trees keep the
+many secrets of the denizens of the wild.
+
+Through that trackless maze two wayfarers warily threaded their course
+on a chill May day in the year seventeen hundred and eighty-three.
+They were men, and their speed denoted the urgency of the business upon
+which they were bent.  They were clad in buckskin jackets, and homespun
+trousers, which showed signs of hard usage.  Moccasins encased their
+feet, and squirrel-skin caps sat lightly upon their heads.  Each
+carried a heavy flint-lock musket in his hand, while at his side swung
+the inevitable powder-horn, hung low enough so as not to interfere with
+the small pack strapped across the shoulders.
+
+Both travellers were peering intently forward, and when at length the
+glint of shimmering water glimmered through the trees their faces
+brightened with satisfaction.  But just then the leader stopped dead in
+his tracks, and glanced anxiously to the left.  He was an Indian of
+magnificent physique, and princely bearing, as straight as the trees
+around him.  His companion, too, was standing in a listening attitude a
+few feet away.  His keen ears had also caught a sound, and he knew its
+meaning.  He was a white man, much younger than the Indian, although
+from his deeply-bronzed face he might have been mistaken for a native.
+He measured up nobly to the other in size and bearing, as well as in
+strength, woodland skill, and endurance on the trail.
+
+"Slashers, Pete, eh?" he questioned in a low voice.
+
+"A-ha-ha," was the reply.  "No meet 'em, Dane.  Too many.  We go round."
+
+Without another word he swung sharply to the right, and led the way to
+the water in a wide circle.  Cautiously they approached the shore, and
+then keeping within the edge of the forest they moved slowly along,
+most of the time upon their hands and knees.  Occasionally they paused
+to listen, but the only sounds they heard were the ones which had first
+arrested their attention, although much nearer now.
+
+Presently they stopped and from a thicket of bushes drew forth a birch
+canoe, which had been cunningly hidden.  It took them but a few minutes
+to carry it to the water, step lightly aboard, and push away from the
+shore.  Each seized a paddle, and soon the canoe was headed for the
+open, with Dane squatting forward, and the Indian seated astern.
+
+Less hardy souls would have hesitated ere venturing out upon that angry
+stretch of water in such a frail craft.  The crooked Kennebacasis was
+showing its temper in no uncertain manner.  Exposed to the full rake of
+the strong westerly wind, the waves were running high, and breaking
+into white-caps, threatened to engulf the reeling canoe.  But the
+Indian was master of the situation, and steered so skilfully that only
+an occasional wisp of spray was flung on board.
+
+They had gone about two hundred yards when a shot rang out from the
+shore, and a bullet whistled past their heads.  Glancing quickly
+around, they saw several men in the distance with muskets in their
+hands.  They were shouting words of defiance to which the canoeists
+made no reply.  Intuitively Dane reached for his musket, but a sharp
+warning from the Indian caused him to desist.
+
+"No shoot," he ordered.  "Paddle.  Quick."
+
+And in truth there was urgent need, for the canoe had swung somewhat to
+the left and was in danger of being swamped by the big waves as they
+rolled and tossed their white foamy manes.  Another bullet sang by as
+Dane drove his paddle into the water and forced the canoe into the eye
+of the wind just as a larger wave than usual was about to break.  To
+attempt to shoot he realised would be useless, although he longed to
+have a try at the insulting slashers.  But to reach the opposite shore
+in safety would require every ounce of strength and utmost skill, so he
+bent steadily to his task and paid no further heed to the men upon the
+shore.
+
+Ahead lay two islands, separated by a narrow strip of water, and toward
+this opening they directed their course.  It was a hard fight, and only
+men of great strength and thoroughly-developed muscles could have
+accomplished the task.  Reeling, dipping, lifting, and sliding, the
+canoe pressed on, a fragile thing in the grip of an angry monster.  But
+bear up it did and rode proudly at last into the smooth water between
+the two islands.  Here the men rested and mopped their moist foreheads.
+
+"Bad blow," the Indian casually remarked.
+
+"Pretty heavy," Dane replied.  "I wish the slashers had come after us."
+
+"Slashers, ugh!  Cowards!  No come.  Bimeby me ketch 'em.  Me fix 'em,
+all sam' skunk."
+
+Dane smiled as he again dipped his paddle into the water.
+
+"Come, Pete, let's get on.  There's a nasty run ahead, and it'll take
+us over two hours after we land to reach the Fort."
+
+"Plenty rum to-night, eh?" the Indian queried, as he guided the canoe
+out into the open.
+
+"Not plenty, remember, Pete.  You've got to be careful this time and
+not take too much.  If there are slashers hanging around the trading
+post they'll be only too anxious to get you drunk, and put you out of
+business.  There's too much at stake to run any risk."
+
+"Umph! me no get drunk," the Indian retorted.  "Me no fool.  Me no
+crazee white man."
+
+It took them almost a half hour to cross to the mainland.  Here they
+landed, concealed the canoe, and ate a frugal meal of bread and dried
+meat.  This detained them but a short time, and they then started forth
+upon the trail which led along the river not far from the shore.  They
+swung rapidly on their way, up hill and down, leaping small brooks, and
+crossing swamps overgrown with a tangle of alders, rank grass, and
+succulent weeds.  Small game was plentiful.  Rabbits scurried across
+the trail, and partridges rose and whirred among the trees.  But the
+travellers never paused in their onward march.  Although they had been
+on the way since early morning, they showed no sign of fatigue.  Their
+strong athletic bodies, bent somewhat forward, swayed in rythmic
+motion, and their feet beat a silent tatoo upon the well-worn trail.
+
+For over an hour they kept up this swinging gait, and only slowed down
+when at length the trail led them out of the thick forest into a great
+open portion of the country.  This was marshland, and it spread out
+before them miles in extent.  To the right were rugged wooded hills,
+while far away to the left the cold steel glitter of the Bay of Fundy
+could be distinctly seen.
+
+For a few minutes they stopped to rest on this commanding elevation,
+Dane's whole soul athrill at the wonderful panorama thus suddenly
+presented to view.  His eyes glowed, and he eagerly inhaled great
+draughts of the invigorating tang wafted in from the far distant sea.
+
+"My, that's fine!" he ejaculated, giving a deep sigh of satisfaction.
+"That puts new life into one, eh, Pete?"
+
+The Indian's mind, however, was not upon the marvellous things of
+nature.  He was gazing intently down toward the marshland where
+something had attracted his attention.
+
+"Plenty duck down dere," he replied.  "Me get 'em bimeby."
+
+Dane smiled, picked up his musket, and looked quizzically at his
+companion.
+
+"Can't you see anything but ducks, Pete?  What do you think of all
+that?" and he waved his hand to the left.  "Isn't it great!"
+
+"Umph!" the Indian grunted, "me see only duck; stummick say only
+'duck.'"
+
+"Come on, then, Pete," the young man ordered.  "The sooner we get
+through with our business, the sooner you can come back for your ducks.
+One of those fat fellows would go well for supper."
+
+Turning somewhat to the right, they followed the trail over the rugged
+hills, where through breaks in the trees they could catch occasional
+glimpses of the marsh and the water beyond.  The way here was rough,
+and their progress somewhat slow.  But steadily they plodded on,
+knowing that their destination was now not far off.
+
+After crossing an exceptionally bad piece of ground, they came out upon
+a pleasant little lake lying like a gem among the hills.  At its outlet
+was a small saw-mill, but now idle, and with no one in sight.  Here
+they paused for a few minutes, and when they were about to proceed a
+great roar startled them.  It was quickly followed by three more in
+rapid succession, and then all was still.
+
+"It's the Fort cannon!" Dane exclaimed, much excited.  "Something's
+happening over there.  Maybe that old pirate, Crabtree, has come up the
+harbour again.  He won't find Fort Howe as easy to take as Fort
+Frederick, let me tell you that.  Come on, Pete, let's see the fun."
+
+Hurrying on their way, ere long they reached the summit of a hill above
+the lake, from which position they were able to obtain the first view
+of the Fort away in the distance.  The guns were silent now, and no
+sign of life could they see.
+
+Below stretched a deep wooded valley through which the trail ran.  It
+did not take the excited men long to speed down the hill and up the
+opposite side.  The roar of the cannon had roused these hardy sons of
+the wild, and the fire of a new adventure thrilled their souls.  The
+great guns had roared, and what else did it mean but a fight with a
+desperate foe in the narrow harbour?  And if they could see the
+struggle, what a tale they would have to tell their comrades around the
+camp fires in the heart of the great forest.
+
+As they gained the summit of the hill, the trail led them through
+clearings where the trees had been cut for fuel.  Piles of brush were
+on all sides, and in places cords of wood lined the way which here
+widened into a rough road.  They were coming into the limits of
+civilisation now, and the view of the Fort was much more distinct.  The
+great guns gave no further voice, but as they neared the crest of the
+hill which slopes down to the harbour, a new and peculiar sound fell
+upon their ears.  They paused and listened intently, but could not
+understand its meaning.
+
+Cautiously they advanced, alert, and ready to flee to the shelter of
+the forest should occasion require.  For a time nothing unusual could
+they see, although the strange sound was becoming more audible.
+Reaching at length the brow of the hill, they stopped dead in their
+tracks at a wonderful sight.  Below lay the harbour, where vessels
+large and small were riding calmly at anchor.  Where had they come
+from? and what were they doing there?  Such were the questions which
+leaped to Dane's mind.  Small boats were coming from the ships, loaded
+with people, while on the shore and some distance from the water
+throngs of men, women, and children were either huddled in groups, or
+hurrying to and fro in the most excited manner.  Tents and rude brush
+shacks dotted the hillside, before which people were standing, while
+bundles and household effects were scattered about on every side.
+
+Never had Dane been so greatly puzzled.  Why had the Fort guns roared?
+What were those ships doing there in the harbour?  That they did not
+belong to the pirates he felt certain, for they bore the English flag,
+and he could see red-coated soldiers mingling with the people on the
+shore.  In his intense interest he forgot for the moment his important
+mission, and he was upon the point of hastening down the hill to find
+out for himself the meaning of the strange scene when Pete touched his
+arm.
+
+"What all dat beeg fuss, eh?" he asked.
+
+The Indian's question startled him, and brought him to himself.
+
+"Blamed if I know, Pete," he replied.  "It's beyond me, for I never saw
+anything like it before.  Anyway, I'm going to find out.  You take my
+pack and gun and go back to the lake.  Get a duck for supper, a good
+big fat fellow.  I'll be there as soon as I can, and tell you what I
+can learn at the Fort.  We've run across something to-day, Pete, more
+than we expected."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+"COME AND TAKE IT"
+
+Fort Howe occupied an important position at the mouth of the St. John
+River when the present Province of New Brunswick was a part of Nova
+Scotia.  It was well situated, and from the summit of a high hill
+commanded the harbour, a large stretch of the river, and the entire
+surrounding country for miles in extent.  It looked down upon the ruins
+of Fort Frederick, which it replaced, and across to the site of another
+old Fort where the brave and noble Lady LaTour and her little band of
+men made their gallant resistance to a treacherous foe.
+
+Fort Howe proved a great comfort to the trading post at Portland Point,
+and to the thirty or more families settled in the vicinity.  Scarcely
+had it been erected, and its guns mounted, when the rapacious pirate
+from Machias, A. Greene Crabtree by name, appeared upon the scene, as
+he had done before with disastrous results.  But this time he received
+the surprise of his life.  He viewed with astonishment the new Fort
+upon the hill, and the flag of England floating from the ramparts.  So
+great was his astonishment that he beat a hasty retreat, and troubled
+no more the little settlement at Portland Point.
+
+Fort Howe was not a large place, containing in all two blockhouses
+and barracks, with twelve rooms for the officers, and accommodation
+for one hundred men.  The armament consisted of two five and a half
+inch brass mortars, and eight iron guns, the latter including two
+eighteen-pounders, four six-pounders, and two four-pounders.
+
+
+Although Fort Howe was small, yet it meant a great deal to the people
+scattered along the St. John River and its various tributaries.  It was
+the seat of authority where all knew that true British justice would be
+meted out by the brave, sturdy commander in charge, Major Gilfred
+Studholme.  It had a restraining influence upon restless, warlike
+Indians, and rebels dwelling along the river.  At the same time it
+filled the hearts of all loyal, peaceful people with a feeling of
+security.  To them it was a symbol of England's power, and they often
+discussed it around their camp fires, and in their lonely forest homes.
+
+As Dane Norwood paused for a minute upon the brow of the opposite hill,
+after he had left the Indian, a feeling of pride and awe welled up in
+his heart as he looked across at the Fort.  He had heard much about it,
+but never until this day had he set eyes upon the place.  He saw the
+big flag fluttering in the breeze, and the black muzzels of the cannon
+frowning seaward.  He longed to hear them roar again, and he wondered
+how far they would shoot, much farther, he had been told, than the
+largest flint-lock ever made.
+
+Leaving the brow of the hill, he moved swiftly down a narrow trail
+which led to a large pond of water below.  At its outlet was a tidal
+grist mill, back of which a strong dam had been built.  Along this
+latter was a foot path which he followed, and soon reached the opposite
+bank.  From here a well-constructed road, lined with trees, wound up
+the hill to the Fort.  Dane walked somewhat slower now, and his heart
+beat fast.  He was at the end of his long journey, and soon he would be
+in the presence of the man of whom he had heard so much.  He slipped
+his hand beneath his buckskin jacket and felt, as he had done so often
+during the last three days, a small package hidden in an inside pocket.
+In a few minutes more it would be delivered into the hands of the
+owner, and his responsibility would be ended.
+
+When part way up the hill he came to a strong barricade, where he was
+suddenly confronted and challenged by a sentry, who demanded where he
+was going and what he wanted.
+
+"I have a message for the commander of the Fort," Dane told him.  "I
+must see him at once."
+
+"The Major is out at present," the soldier replied.  "But let me have
+your message and I shall give it to him as soon as he comes back."
+
+"I have orders to give it to the Major himself and to no one else," the
+courier explained.  "It is very important."
+
+"It certainly must be," and the soldier smiled.  "But the Major is very
+busy to-day, so may not have time to see you.  He is down at the
+trading post just now looking after the wants of those people who have
+come in the ships.  They have upset things in general, and are making
+matters pretty lively around here, let me tell you that.  The Major is
+almost at his wits' end."
+
+"Who are they?" Dane eagerly asked, "and where did they come from?"
+
+"Why, don't you know?" the soldier asked in surprise.
+
+"No, I have not the least idea.  When I heard the Fort guns roar, I
+thought maybe old Crabtree had come back again."
+
+The soldier laughed and looked curiously at the young man.
+
+"Say, where do you hail from, anyway, that you haven't heard about the
+coming of the Loyalists?  Why, we've been expecting them for some time."
+
+"I never heard of them," Dane confessed, "and have no idea who they
+are."
+
+"They are the ones who stood by King George during the Revolutionary
+War, of course.  When England gave up the fight, and peace was decided
+upon, the Loyalists were in a bad way.  Their property was confiscated,
+and they themselves treated very badly.  They would not live under the
+new flag of their enemies, so they got out, and here they are."
+
+Dane glanced out toward the ships with the light of intense interest in
+his eyes.  What a story he would have to tell his comrades in the
+wilderness.  They all knew about the war, but no word had reached them
+of the coming of the Loyalists.
+
+"Didn't you want them to come here?" he asked turning to the sentry.
+
+"Want them?  Why, we had nothing to say about the matter."
+
+"But didn't you fire upon them?  I heard the roar of the guns when out
+in the hills."
+
+The soldier threw back his head and gave a hearty laugh.  He was
+enjoying this conversation, as it broke the monotony of his duty.
+
+"We weren't firing upon them," he explained.  "That was only a salute
+of welcome."
+
+"What are all those people going to do?" Dane asked.  "How are they to
+make a living?"
+
+"Oh, I suppose many will settle here, while others will take up land
+and farm.  It will be some time, though, before everything is
+straightened out.  Just look at that crowd down there," and he motioned
+to the trading post.  "I guess we'll have our hands full keeping order.
+I don't envy the Major his job."
+
+"And there are others he must handle as well," Dane replied.  "I must
+see him at once.  Which is the best road to take?"
+
+"You better follow that one along the side of the hill," the soldier
+advised, pointing to the right.  "There is a short cut down over the
+bank some distance ahead.  You can't miss it.  There is another along
+the waterfront leading to the mill-pond.  That's the best one to take
+coming back."
+
+Thanking the friendly sentry, Dane hurried away, and in about fifteen
+minutes came near the trading post.  He walked slower now, greatly
+interested in everything he beheld, from the quaint store to the people
+gathered ground the building.
+
+For years this post at Portland Point had been the Mecca for the entire
+country.  The owners, Simonds and White, carried on an extensive trade
+with both Indians and whites.  Enduring and overcoming great
+difficulties, they laid the foundation of what to-day is the City of
+St.  John.  The most important event, however, in all their career at
+Portland Point was the arrival of the thousands of exiles in their
+midst.  They gave them a hearty welcome, and did all in their power to
+aid them in the land of their adoption.
+
+As Dane approached the crowd, he looked keenly about for Major
+Studholme.  Although he had never seen him, he imagined that he would
+know him at once.  He surely would be a large man, of princely bearing,
+who would be busy issuing orders to his men.  But although he saw a
+number of soldiers, there was no one who measured Up to his ideal of
+the commander of the Fort.
+
+At length he observed a man, who from his uniform seemed to be an
+officer, seated at a small rough table near the store door.  He was
+busy writing, and passing pieces of paper to men standing before him.
+Surely he must be the Major, Dane thought, so stepping forward, he
+stood for a few minutes close to the table.  He soon learned that the
+officer was issuing orders to the Loyalists for boards, shingles,
+clapboards, and bricks for the building of their houses.  For a while
+he had no chance to speak to the man, but waiting his opportunity, he
+at last stood before him.
+
+"Are you Major Studholme?" he asked.
+
+"No," the officer replied, laying down his pen with a sigh of
+weariness.  "I am merely acting in the Major's place."
+
+Then he looked at Dane more closely, and his interest became aroused.
+He knew at once that this young man was not one of the newly-arrived
+exiles, but a courier from the wilderness.  He noted his buckskin garb,
+finely-built body, erect manner, and the bright open countenance.  He
+had seen special couriers before, and they had all been men worthy of
+more than a passing glance.  But this young man surpassed them all, and
+he looked upon him with admiration.
+
+"Is there anything I can do for you?" he at length asked.
+
+"I have a message for the Major," Dane explained, "and I must deliver
+it to him."
+
+"Give it to me," and the officer reached out his hand.  "I am
+Lieutenant Street, and I shall see that the Major gets it."
+
+"That I cannot do," Dane replied as he drew back a step.  "I have
+strict orders to give it to Major Studholme, and to no one else."
+
+"It must be very important, then," and the officer smiled.
+
+"It is, and the Major must get it at once.  Where is he?"
+
+"Over there," and the Lieutenant motioned across the water to the right
+where the small boats were still busy landing people from the ships.
+"He's got his hands full straightening things out.  But he can do it if
+any one can."
+
+The officer now turned his attention to several impatient men who were
+standing near, so further conversation was out of the question.  Dane
+had taken no notice of those around him.  Neither did he see three men
+watching his every movement.  They had evidently overheard his
+conversation with the officer, and seemed greatly pleased.  As Dane
+left the place and walked toward the road leading to the mill-pond, the
+three followed.  They kept some distance behind until they came to a
+grove of rough tangled trees, when they started forward at a run.
+Dane, hearing them coming, stopped and looked back.  Instinctively the
+caution of the wild possessed him, causing him to stand on the
+defensive, and his eyes to gleam with the light of danger.
+
+"What do you want?" he demanded, as the three suddenly stopped before
+him.  "You seem to be in a hurry."
+
+"We are," one of the men replied.  "We want that message you have for
+the Major."
+
+"What do you want it for?"
+
+"Never mind about that.  Hand it over, and be damn quick about it, too."
+
+Dane's body now quivered with excitement, and the thrill of battle
+swept upon him.  His eyes narrowed until they became mere slits, and
+his hands clenched hard as he drew himself to his full height.
+
+"If you want the message I carry, come and take it," he challenged.
+"That is the only way you can get it."
+
+"Don't be a fool," another of the men warned.  "You might as well hand
+over that message first as last.  It will save you a lot of trouble.
+We're going to get it, so make up your mind to that."
+
+"How?" Dane asked.
+
+"Oh, you'll soon know.  Out with it.  We're in a hurry."
+
+"So am I," Dane replied.
+
+Then he slightly crouched, and with a sudden tiger-like spring he was
+upon them.  A sledge-hammer drive to the jaw of one sent him reeling
+backwards among the trees, while a mighty swinging blow to the right
+crumpled up another in the middle of the road.  So astonished was the
+third at this unexpected attack, and the complete knock-out of his
+companions, that he did not raise a hand in their defence.  A sudden
+terror possessed him, so leaping aside just in time to escape the
+whirlwind of a man charging upon him, he ran as he had never run in his
+life before.
+
+Dane stood looking after him, and a smile overspread his face.
+
+"Hi, there, you've forgotten the message," he called.  "Come back and
+get it."
+
+But the man paid no heed.  He kept steadily on, and only slowed down to
+a walk as he neared the store.  Dane next turned his attention to the
+other two men.  They had both recovered, and were sitting upon the
+ground, rubbing their injured faces in the most doleful manner.
+
+"Why, what's the matter?" he bantered.  "Did something hit you?"
+
+"Did it?" one of them growled.  "Did lightning ever hit a tree?  Who in
+h---- are you, anyway?"
+
+"Oh, I'm the man with the message.  I've got it yet; don't you want it?
+I thought you were in a hurry."
+
+As the crestfallen men made no reply, Dane stepped toward them.
+
+"I'll tell you who I am," he began.  "I am the King's Arrow.  I go
+where I am sent, and I hit the bull's eye every time, and hit it hard,
+too.  Do you doubt it?"
+
+"Good Lord, no!" was the gasping confession from each.
+
+"And let me tell you further," Dane continued, "that as I have dealt
+with you now, so others will deal with you in the future if you try any
+more of your mean tricks.  Perhaps you will not get off so easily then
+as you have this time.  I know who you are.  You are employed by the
+slashers to spy upon the King's men, engaged in the lawful business of
+cutting masts for his Majesty's navy.  They are well named, for they
+are slashing everywhere, and ruining the forests.  But they have about
+reached the end of their tether, and you can tell them so from me, Dane
+Norwood, the King's Arrow."
+
+Without another word he turned, and walked rapidly along the road
+leading to the mill-pond.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+CUPID'S ARROW
+
+Before a rude shack, somewhat back from the water, a middle aged
+colored woman was seated upon a block of wood.  In her hands she held a
+waffle-iron, the farther end of which was thrust into a small fire
+between several stones.  She was a bunty little body, clad in a plain
+grey dress, with a cap, somewhat in the form of a white turban,
+adorning her head.  Her naturally good-natured face bore an anxious
+expression, and a worried look appeared in her eyes as she turned them
+occasionally to the people moving about farther down the hill.
+
+Presently she drew the iron from the fire, unclamped it, and with
+remarkable deftness turned out a nicely-browned waffle into a dish by
+her side.  She then greased both halves of the pan, filled them with
+batter, reclamped the iron and thrust it again into the fire.  This she
+did several times until the dish was almost filled with
+delicious-smelling waffles.
+
+"Guess dey'll suit de Cun'l," she said to herself.  "He's mighty fond
+of waffles, he shur' is.  An' Missie Jean is, too, fo' dat matter.  I
+wonder what's keepin' dem.  Dey's generally on time fo' supper.  But,
+den, t'ings are so upset dese days dat only de Lo'd knows what's goin'
+to happen next."
+
+Then she began to sing in a subdued voice the Twenty-third psalm, the
+only piece she knew.
+
+"I hab no doubt about de Lo'd bein' my Shepa'd," she commented, "an' I
+guess He'll not let me want.  But He hasn't led me into green past'rs
+dis time.  I wonder if de Good Lo'd made dis place, anyway," and she
+gazed ruefully around.  "It looks to me as if de deb'l had a mighty big
+hand in it, fo' sich a mixed up contraption of a hole I nebber set my
+two eyes on befo'.  An' to t'ink dat de Cun'l had to leab his nice home
+in Ol' Connec., an' come to a jumpin'-off place like dis.  I hope de
+ever-lastin' fire will be seben times hot when it gits dem skunks dat
+stirred up ructions 'ginst good King George, I sa'tinly do."
+
+A slight noise startled her, and turning her head, she smiled as she
+saw a girl standing near her side.
+
+"Land sakes!  Missie Jean, how yo' did scare me!" she exclaimed.  "I
+thought mebbe it was a bear or a tager comin' out ob de woods, fo' one
+nebber knows what to 'spect next in dis place."
+
+"I am sorry I frightened you, Mammy," the girl smilingly replied, "And
+it was too bad that I interrupted you in your interesting talk about
+'everlasting fire,' 'ructions,' and 'King George.'  You seem to be in a
+fighting mood."
+
+"I is, Missie Jean, I is in a turrible fightin' mood.  I'd like jes at
+dis very minute to hab my two hands on dem rascals dat turned on good
+King George, an' den druve us all out ob our homes.  I'd show dem a
+t'ing or two, I sa'tinly would."
+
+"I don't doubt it," the girl replied, as she stooped and helped herself
+to a waffle.  "If you could fight as well as you can cook you would be
+a wonder."
+
+"I could cook on our stove in Ol' Connec., Missie Jean, but it's mighty
+hard work on dat," and she looked contemptuously at the rude
+fire-place.  "To t'ink that we should ebber come to dis!"
+
+"Why, I think it's great, Mammy."
+
+"What' not better'n Ol' Connec.?"
+
+"Oh, not at all.  But this might be worse.  I miss our dear old home in
+Connecticut, and yet I have often longed for a life such as this.  I am
+sure you will like it, too, Mammy, when you get used to it."
+
+"I kin nebber git used to it, chile.  I'se been torn up by de roots
+from de ol' home where I was born an' bred, an' I kin nebber take root
+agin, 'specially in sich a rocky hole as dis."
+
+"But we're not going to stay here, Mammy.  We are going up the river,
+and make a new home in a beautiful place among the trees."
+
+"Ah, chile, dat's what makes me tremble.  It's bad 'nuf here, de Lo'd
+knows, but up dere!  Why, dere's bears, an' tagers dat'll eat ye up in
+a jiffy.  An' dere's Injuns, too, dat'll skin ye alive, an' scalp ye,
+an' roast ye fo' dinner.  No, I kin nebber take root in a place like
+dat."
+
+"But we'll be pioneers, Mammy," the girl reminded.  "Just think what an
+honour it will be to take part in holding this land for King George.
+People will be proud of what we are doing in years to come."
+
+"I don't want to be no pioneers, Missie Jean, an' I'm not hankerin'
+after no honour.  It suits dis ol' woman better to hab her skin an'
+scalp now, even if dey are black, den to hab folks ye don't know
+nuffin' 'bout blubberin' over ye a hundred years from now.  Dem's my
+solemn sent'ments."
+
+"But daddy thinks there is a great purpose in our coming here, Mammy.
+He says he believes that the Lord is overruling our defeat, and that
+the driving us out from our homes and scattering us abroad will be the
+means of extending King George's sway, and raising up a great nation in
+this land."
+
+"Missie Jean," and Mammy raised a warning finger, "I doan want to
+predjis you 'ginst yer daddy's jeg'ment, remember.  But I can't see de
+Lo'd's hand in dis racket.  It doan seems nat'ral to me fo' de Lo'd to
+let King George lose a good an' beau'ful country, an' den gib him sich
+a jumpin'-off place as dis instead.  An', chile, I doan believe dat de
+Lo'd ever meant yo' to come here."
+
+"Why, Mammy?  Do I look any the worse for it?"
+
+"Yo' couldn't look worse, Missie Jean, not if yo' tried ebber so hard."
+
+"Come, come, Mammy, I am surprised at you," and the girl's eyes
+sparkled with merriment.  "What do you mean by saying I couldn't look
+worse?  I didn't know I was as hideous as all that."
+
+"I didn't say yo' was hidjus, Missie Jean.  I jes said yo' couldn't
+look worse, an' ye can't.  Yo' kin only look beau'ful.  Why, chile, it
+makes my ol' heart ache when I t'ink of sich a lubly creature as yo'
+bein' buried alive 'way off in de woods."
+
+"But I don't intend to be buried alive, Mammy.  I hope to live a good
+many years yet, and only buried when I am dead."
+
+"Ah, chile, dere is more ways den one of bein' buried alive.  I am
+t'inkin' of de lonely life in de woods, wif no nice young men to look
+at yer pretty face, lubly eyes, an' beau'ful hair.  An' ye'll hab no
+chance to wear fine clothes an' be admired."
+
+"Mammy."  There was a note in the girl's voice which caused the colored
+woman to glance quickly up.
+
+"What is it, chile?"
+
+"I want to tell you something, Mammy.  This is not the time to talk
+about such things, nor to wail and lament about our lot.  I have just
+been down helping some of those women with their children.  They are
+almost heart-broken, and I did what I could to cheer them up.  I have
+made up my mind that no matter how badly I feel, no one is to know
+anything about it.  I am going to forget my own troubles in helping
+others.  And, Mammy, I want you to do the same.  If you talk to others
+as you have been talking to me, it will make them more depressed than
+ever.  They need smiles, words of cheer, and a helping hand.  And you
+can do that, remember.  Never mind about me, or admiring young men.
+There are more serious things to think about just now."
+
+"Land sakes, chile!" the colored woman exclaimed, holding up both
+hands.  "I nebber heard yo' talk dat way befo'.  But I guess yo're
+right, an' I'se ready to do what I kin.  But here comes de Cun'l!  An',
+oh, Missie Jean, de Major's wif him!  Dere won't be 'nuf waffles to go
+'round, an' de fire's 'most out.  What in de world is I to do?"
+
+"Never mind, Mammy," the girl comforted, "they have hardly time to
+think about eating.  Just give them what you have."
+
+"But dese waffles are col', chile, an' I know how fond men are of
+eatin'.  Nuffin' kin make dem fergit dere stummicks."
+
+Smiling at the colored woman's worries, Jean at once set to work to
+renew the fire.  There were a few hot coals, so by the time the men
+arrived, she had the fire burning brightly, and Mammy was preparing to
+cook an extra supply of waffles.
+
+Colonel Sterling was a fine looking man.  His white hair, flowing
+beard, and commanding presence would have distinguished him in any
+company.  His face was genial, and his grey eyes shone with pleasure
+and pride as they rested upon his daughter who now turned to meet him.
+
+"Is supper ready, dear?" he enquired, "I am hungry, and I know the
+Major is, too."
+
+"There is the supper," and Jean pointed to the dish of waffles.  "But
+I'm afraid it's not much for two hungry men.  The Major, I am sure,
+will find it pretty poor fare."
+
+"Not at all, Miss Jean," the officer smilingly assured her.  "I recall
+so well the choice waffles I had at your old home in Stamford the last
+time I visited there.  And I am confident, too, that your excellent
+cook has lost none of her skill since then."
+
+He looked toward Mammy as he spoke, causing the faithful servant almost
+to drop the iron she was holding, so great was her confusion at such a
+compliment from so great a person.
+
+Major Gilfred Studholme was the right man in the right place at this
+critical time in the history of Portland Point.  He had served with
+distinction on behalf of his King in numerous engagements, and his
+heart went out in sympathy to the thousands of refugees so suddenly
+thrust upon him for protection.  This soldier had held his post secure
+in the face of hostile savages and lawless marauders, and he was
+equally faithful now in the discharge of his duties to the newcomers.
+
+Leaving Mammy to recover from her embarrassment and to continue her
+cooking, Jean went into the little shack, the only home she now knew,
+and brought forth a small table.  This she placed near the door,
+covered it with a white cloth, and again went inside for dishes.  Her
+supply of the latter was most meagre, as the rest had not been
+unpacked.  Her eyes grew a little misty as she recalled what the Major
+had said about the last time he had been with them in their old home in
+Stamford.  She had a clear remembrance of that day, of the
+neatly-arranged table, with fresh flowers in the centre, and the light
+of pleasure and contentment upon her dear mother's face.  What changes
+had taken place since then!  Her mother had been laid to rest, the old
+home was gone, and they were exiles in a strange cruel land.
+
+Hastily wiping her eyes with a delicately-embroidered handkerchief, she
+collected a few dishes, and had just reached the door when she suddenly
+stopped.  Standing before the Major she saw a young man, clad in the
+most peculiar manner she had ever seen.  But his face and bearing were
+what chiefly attracted her, while a pleasurable sensation, such as she
+had never before experienced, swept through her being.
+
+"I am Dane Norwood," the young man was saying, "and I bring a message
+from William Davidson, the King's purveyor.  Here it is," and he handed
+forth a letter he had taken from the inside pocket of his jacket.
+
+"Are you in the King's service?" the Major asked as he took the missive.
+
+"I am," was the reply.  "I am a special courier, known as the 'King's
+Arrow,' and I always go where I am sent.  That is why I am here."
+
+"Where are your manners, then?" the Major demanded with a twinkle in
+his eyes.
+
+"Manners!  What manners?"
+
+"When you approach a superior officer, of course."
+
+"Oh, you mean the salute.  I have heard of it, but never saw it given."
+
+"What! you never saluted any one; not even the King's purveyor?"
+
+"No.  Where I live we are all equal when it comes to that.  We never
+bother about such things.  The only salute I know is the kind I handed
+out to those slashers a short time ago when they tried to take that
+message from me."
+
+"Where was that?" the Major questioned.
+
+"Just over there along that road," and Dane motioned to the right.
+
+"Where are they now?"
+
+"I think two are busy nursing their faces, while the third is hiding
+somewhere around the trading post.  He was running that way the last
+time I saw him."
+
+"And you defeated the three of them single-handed?"
+
+"Why, that was nothing.  I would be a mighty poor courier if I couldn't
+take care of myself, especially when slashers are around."
+
+A bright smile illumined the Major's face as he held out his right hand.
+
+"Young man, I am proud of you," he said, "and I shall mention you to
+the General Officers in my next report.  We need such men as you
+to-day."
+
+"I don't care for any honour," Dane replied.  "I only want an answer to
+that letter, so I can get away early in the morning.  Davidson is
+pretty anxious up river."
+
+"Why, sure enough," the Major agreed.  "I must not keep you longer than
+is necessary."
+
+Opening the envelope, which was marked with a big broad arrow, he drew
+forth the paper within, unfolded it, and glanced rapidly over the
+contents.  As he did so, a serious expression overspread his face, and
+he remained a minute or two lost in deep thought.
+
+All this Jean had heard and seen from the door where she was standing
+with the dishes in her hands.  When, however, the Major began to read
+the letter, she stepped outside, and placed the cups, saucers, and
+plates upon the table.  It was then that Dane first saw her, and his
+eyes opened wide with surprise and admiration.  Presently Jean turned,
+and seeing the courier's ardent gaze, her eyes dropped, and a deep
+flush of embarrassment suffused her face.  This all happened in a few
+seconds, but in that brief space of time that quaint little archer,
+Cupid, had been busy, and two youthful hearts had been pierced by his
+subtle arrows.
+
+Never before had Dane beheld such a vision of loveliness and maidenly
+charm.  The girl fascinated him, and moved by a sudden impulse, he was
+upon the point of going to her side, fearful lest she should vanish,
+when the Major's voice restrained him.
+
+"Come to the Fort early in the morning," he heard the officer say.  "I
+wish to have a talk with you there."
+
+"I shall be on hand, and early at that," Dane replied.
+
+With another fleeting glance toward the girl, he turned and moved
+swiftly away toward the lake back in the hills.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE WARNING
+
+Dane walked as in a dream along the trail to the lake.  Something had
+come into his life during the last half hour which had wrought a subtle
+mystic change.  He did not try to analyse it, as he had never
+experienced such a feeling before.  He only knew that back there where
+the land slopes to the harbour he had beheld a vision which had
+thrilled his entire being.  The face and form of the girl with the
+large questioning eyes were all that he saw as he hurried on his way.
+Everything else was blotted from his mind, even the urgency of his
+important mission.  The spirit of the wild was upon him, and an
+overmastering impulse was surging through his heart.  He must see her
+again; he must look upon her face; he must hear her speak.  His passion
+was intense.  It was a living fire, the ardour of a great first love.
+
+The Indian noted the change which had come over his master, and
+wondered.  He made no comment, however, as he squatted upon the ground,
+slowly turning a wooden spit on which a fat duck was roasting over a
+small fire.  Dane sat down upon a log, with his eyes upon Pete,
+although in fact he was hardly aware what he was doing, for his
+thoughts were elsewhere.
+
+When the duck was at last cooked, the Indian divided it, and gave half
+to Dane.
+
+"Fine bird, dat," he remarked.  "Me shoot him on wing.  Taste good, eh?"
+
+"Does it?" Dane asked, rousing for a minute from his reverie.  He then
+relapsed into silence.
+
+"What de matter?" Pete presently asked.  "See sometin', eh?"
+
+"Why, what makes you think there is anything the matter?" the young man
+queried.
+
+"Dane so still.  Dane no talk, no smile, no eat.  Dane seek, mebbe.
+Bad medicine, eh?"
+
+Dane laughed and looked at his companion.
+
+"I am all right, Pete," he assured.  "But I've seen and heard great
+things to-day.  I also knocked out two slashers, while the third ran
+away."
+
+"A-ha-ha, good," the Indian grunted.  "Dem all slashers in beeg canoe,
+eh?" and he motioned toward the harbour.
+
+"No, no; they are King George's people.  They were driven out of their
+own homes, and have come here.  There are thousands of them, so I
+learned."
+
+"All stay here?"
+
+"Some will, but many will go up river, and settle on the land."
+
+"Ugh! too many white men dere now.  Chase Injun, kill moose, ketch
+feesh.  Injun all starve."
+
+"Don't you worry about that," Dane replied.  "These are all King
+George's people, so they will treat the Indians right."
+
+"Mebbe so," and Pete shook his head in a somewhat doubtful manner.  "Me
+see bimeby."
+
+At length Dane rose to his feet, and looked over toward the harbour.
+The sun had disappeared beyond the far distant hills, and dusk was
+stealing up over the land.  A stiff breeze was drifting in from the
+Bay, chilly and damp.  Dane thought of the Loyalists in their wretched
+shacks, and of the ones who had no shelter at all.  He longed to know
+how they were making out, and especially her who was so much in his
+mind.
+
+"You stay here, Pete, and keep guard," he ordered.  "I'm going to see
+how King George's people are making out."
+
+"Come back soon, eh?" the Indian asked.
+
+"I shall not be long, Pete.  You get camp fixed up for the night, and
+keep the fire going."
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Me feex t'ings, a'right."
+
+Leaving the Indian, Dane hurried away from the lake, descended into the
+valley, and climbed the hill on the opposite side.  By the time he
+reached the height above the waterfront, the dusk had deepened into a
+weird darkness.  Here he paused and looked down upon the strange scene
+below.  Hundreds of camp-fires, large and small, emitted their fitful
+ruddy glow, while beyond, the lights of a score of anchored ships were
+reflected in the wind-ruffled water.  A murmur of many voices drifted
+up to the silent watcher on the brow of the hill, mingled with shrill
+cries of children, and the sound of beating hammers, as weary men
+worked late at their rude dwellings.
+
+Down into this Babel of confusion Dane slowly made his way.  He passed
+the spot where he had met the Major, and he looked eagerly for the girl
+who had won his heart.  But she was nowhere to be seen, although a
+small fire was burning near the shack, before which the colored woman
+was keeping watch, swaying her body, and humming her favourite psalm.
+
+Farther down the hill the people had settled closer together, and as
+Dane moved through this strange medley of shacks, brush houses, tents,
+sails fastened to sticks driven into the ground, and other rude
+contrivances, he realised for the first time the sadly-pathetic
+condition of these outcast people.  Although many of them were hidden
+from view, he could see numbers huddled about their fires, and children
+wrapped in blankets asleep upon the ground, while here and there tired
+mothers were nursing and soothing their fretful babes.
+
+Little attention was paid to the young courier as he moved from place
+to place, except an occasional glance at his curious costume.  In fact,
+most of these exiles were strangers to one another, as they had come on
+different ships, and had only met for the first time on the day of
+their landing.  The ones who had sailed on the same vessels, and had
+thus become acquainted, naturally kept together as much as possible.
+But they were all comrades in distress, sufferers in a common cause,
+united by the golden bond of sympathy.
+
+Down by the water men were sorting out and piling up their household
+effects, which had been carelessly dumped upon the shore.  But others
+not so engaged were gathered in little groups around camp-fires, either
+discussing their present prospects, or relating their experiences on
+the vessels, and their hardships during and after the war.  To some of
+these tales Dane listened with wide-eyed wonder, and a burning
+indignation in his heart.  What stories he would have to tell when he
+went back to his woodland home.
+
+All that he heard, however, was not of a sad or gloomy nature.  These
+sturdy men enjoyed humorous yarns, and as Dane listened to several, he
+joined in the laughter that ensued.  One, especially, appealed to him.
+It was told by a big strapping fellow, who hitherto had taken little
+part in the talk.
+
+"Your yarns can't equal that of the shoemaker of Richmond, Virginia" he
+began.  "When the rebels were passing through the town he stood in the
+door of his house and cried out 'Hurrah for King George.'  He followed
+the soldiers to a wood, where they had halted, and began again to
+hurrah for King George.  When the commanding officer and his aides had
+mounted and were moving on, the shoemaker followed, still hurrahing for
+King George.  The officer, therefore, ordered that he should be taken
+to the river and ducked.  This was done, and he was plunged several
+times under the water.  But whenever his head appeared above the
+surface he would shout for King George.  He was then taken to his own
+house, where his wife and four daughters were crying and beseeching him
+to hold his tongue.  The top of a barrel of tar was knocked off, and
+the man was plunged in headlong.  He was then pulled out by the heels,
+and rolled in a mass of feathers, from a bed which had been taken from
+his own house, until he presented a strange, horrible sight.  But
+through it all, whenever he could get his mouth open, he would hurrah
+for King George.  He was then driven out of the town, and the officer
+warned him that he would be shot if he troubled them again.  That is
+the story as it was told me, and I think it a mighty good one."
+
+Dane longed to hear more tales of that wonderful land, and of the great
+fights which had taken place.  But just then a strange sound startled
+him.  It was the roll of a drum, followed almost immediately by the
+shrill notes of several fifes.  He could not see the musicians, as they
+were some distance away to the left.  But he knew what they were
+playing, for he was quite familiar with the tune and words of the old
+fireside song.  A sudden silence fell upon the little band around the
+fire.  Bronzed faces became grave, and more than one man's eyes grew
+misty with honest tears.
+
+Barely had the notes of this tune died away when the men were roused to
+action by the stirring strains of the National Anthem.  They sprang to
+their feet as one, and stood at attention.  Somewhere a strong voice
+took up the words, and in an instant all over that hillside hundreds of
+men and women were singing as they had never sung before.
+
+  God save our gracious King,
+  Long live our noble King,
+    God save the King.
+
+Though driven from their homes; exiles in a strange land; surrounded by
+unknown dangers, and with a most uncertain future, nothing could dampen
+their spirit of loyalty to their King across the sea.
+
+To Dane this was all wonderful.  He longed to see the musicians, and to
+watch them as they played.  He walked over in the direction from which
+the music had come, and had almost reached what he supposed was the
+spot, when he suddenly stopped.  There before him he beheld the real
+object of his visit.  She was seated on the ground before a fire, with
+several children gathered about her.  They were all listening with rapt
+attention to some story she was telling them.  Dane was held spellbound
+at the pretty scene before him.  He could look upon the girl to his
+heart's content without being seen, for he was sheltered by a cluster
+of rough, tangled trees.  In all his life he had never beheld such a
+beautiful face.  He longed to know her name, and to hear her speak.  He
+recalled the glance she had given him with her expressive eyes ere they
+had dropped before his ardent gaze.  But he knew that he was nothing to
+her, and no doubt she had never thought of him again.  How could he
+leave without finding out who she was, and where she was going?  But
+she was a complete stranger to him, and he had no right to approach any
+nearer.  It would be much better to worship at a distance and await a
+favourable opportunity.
+
+Presently he was aroused by a slight noise near at hand.  Glancing
+quickly around to his right, his keen eyes detected the form of a man
+slinking along among the bushes.  Dane could not see his face, but from
+his attitude it was quite evident that the girl near the fire was the
+object of his special attention.  At length he stopped, and, crouching
+behind a small pile of brush kept his eyes fixed upon the unsuspecting
+girl.
+
+Dane was now thoroughly aroused, and he was about to spring forward and
+demand an explanation for the man's suspicious actions, when the
+crouching figure rose suddenly to a standing position, and then stepped
+quickly forward.  The reason was at once apparent, for glancing toward
+the fire, Dane saw that the girl had just left the children to their
+parents' care with the evident intention of returning home.  In order
+to do so, it was necessary for her to cross an upper portion of the
+hillside, considered too rough and rocky for any one to pitch his
+abode.  There was not the slightest semblance of a trail, but the girl
+had traversed the place several times that day, so was quite sure of
+her way.  Nevertheless, she glanced somewhat anxiously around as she
+hurried  onward, especially so where the bushes and scrubby trees stood
+the thickest.
+
+Dane followed the man who was slinking along after the girl, and for a
+while he was able to keep him in view.  Then he disappeared among the
+trees, and as Dane stepped quickly forward so as not to miss him
+altogether, a sudden cry of fear fell upon his ears.  That it came from
+the girl he was well aware; telling plainly that she was in need of
+help.  He leaped at once to her assistance, and in another minute he
+saw her struggling in the arms of her assailant, and trying to free
+herself from his grasp.  The next instant Dane was by her side, while a
+blow from the clenched fist of his right hand sent the cowardly villain
+reeling back among the trees.  Then like a tiger Dane was upon him, his
+fingers clutching his throat as he pinned him to the ground.  The
+fallen man fought and struggled desperately to tear away that fearful
+vise-like grip, but all in vain.  At length his striving ceased, and
+his body relaxed.  Then Dane unloosened his hold, and looked at the
+girl.
+
+"Shall I kill him?" he asked.
+
+"No, no!" was the startled reply.  "That would be terrible!"
+
+"But he tried to harm you.  If I kill him, he won't have a chance to
+try again."
+
+"Let him go," the girl pleaded.  "Perhaps this will teach him a lesson."
+
+Dane, however, hesitated.  A passionate impulse urged him to make an
+end of such a cowardly creature.  The spirit of the wild was strong
+upon him, and his nature craved complete satisfaction.  How could it be
+otherwise?  Steeped for years in the ways of the wilderness, he had
+become a part of all that he had seen and heard.  He knew how the
+beasts of the forest and the monarchs of the air dealt with their prey.
+He had at times watched two great bull moose locked in deadly combat,
+until one had gone down to defeat and death.  And around campfires at
+night he had listened to rough men as they related tales of terrible
+fights, grewsome murders, and sudden deaths.  Everywhere he turned it
+was the same savage struggle, with only one outcome, the survival of
+the strongest, and death to the vanquished.
+
+While he thus sat upon the fallen man's body, reasoning with himself
+what to do, the girl touched him lightly upon the arm.
+
+"Let him go," she urged.  "You wouldn't kill a man when he is down,
+would you?  That would be cowardly."
+
+This appeal had an immediate effect, and slowly, though somewhat
+reluctantly, Dane rose to his feet.
+
+"He deserves to be killed," he growled.  Then he touched the man with
+the toe of his right foot.  "Get up, you brute," he ordered.
+
+This command was at once obeyed.  The defeated assailant scrambled to
+his feet, and started to move away.  But Dane caught him roughly by the
+arm, and faced him sharply around.
+
+"Just a word," he began.  "You get clear this time, you devil, whoever
+you are.  But if you lay hands on this young woman again I'll break
+every bone in your body.  You won't escape, for I am Dane Norwood, the
+King's Arrow, and what I say I mean.  Get out of this now as fast as
+you can."
+
+The next instant the man was gone, swallowed up by the darkness.
+
+"Oh, how can I ever thank you enough?" the girl impulsively asked.
+"You have saved me from that creature.  I didn't know that he was here."
+
+"Who is he?" Dane asked.  "And where did he come from?"
+
+"He is Seth Lupin, a man I hate and fear.  He must have come on one of
+the other vessels, most likely as a stowaway.  He is not a Loyalist,
+for he was a coward during the war, and has no right to be numbered
+among us.  I am sure that daddy does not know he is here, and I am
+almost afraid to tell him for fear he might do something desperate to
+the villain.  But, then, we shall soon be away from this place, so it
+is hardly likely that Seth will follow us."
+
+They were walking slowly now, picking their way with difficulty across
+the rough hillside.  Dane's soul was athrill in the presence of this
+girl who had affected him in such a wonderful manner.  It was almost
+too good to be true that he had rescued her, and was now so close to
+her.
+
+"Where are you going?" he asked.
+
+"Up river, I believe.  But just where I do not know.  Daddy hasn't
+drawn his lot of land yet."
+
+"What is your name?"
+
+"Jean."
+
+"I like it.  But Jean what?"
+
+"Sterling."
+
+"Did you ever live in the woods?"
+
+"No.  This is my first experience."
+
+"Do you think you will like it?  Won't you be afraid?"
+
+"I am going to do my best to like it.  And why should I be afraid?"
+
+"Because of men, especially the slashers; that's why."
+
+"Who are the slashers?"
+
+"Rebels who oppose the King's men in cutting masts.  They wander
+everywhere, slashing as they go, and ruining the forests."
+
+"But why should I be afraid of them?  They have never heard of me."
+
+"But they will soon hear of you, though."  Dane stopped abruptly, and
+laid his hand upon her arm.  "Say, do you know how beautiful you are?"
+
+Jean was somewhat startled by this strange question.
+
+"What makes you ask that?"
+
+"Because if you don't know, then you are not aware of your danger.
+That villain, Lupin, knows of your beauty, so he followed you here.
+The slashers and others will soon know, too, and I might not always be
+on hand.  This is just a friendly warning."
+
+Jean's heart was beating rapidly, while the darkness hid her flushed
+face.
+
+"T-thank you," she stammered.  "I think I understand your meaning,
+although I am not used to such plain words, especially from a stranger.
+But I feel I can trust you."
+
+"In a country such as this we use plain language, Miss Sterling.  I
+have warned you of your danger because I am deeply interested in your
+welfare.  You can trust me, for, thank God, I have had a noble mother's
+training, and was taught to respect women.  But, we are almost at your
+home, so I must leave you."
+
+"Forgive me," Jean begged, as Dane was about to hurry away.  "I
+appreciate what you have told me and done for me to-night, I shall
+always remember your kindness, and I hope to see you again."
+
+"I hope so, too, and soon at that," was the fervent reply.
+
+Dane hardly knew how he reached the lake.  He felt that he had made a
+fool of himself.  Never before had he spoken to a girl in such a
+straightforward manner.  What must she think of him?
+
+"I could not help it," he told himself.  "She needed to be warned.  She
+doesn't realise her danger.  She can't surely know how beautiful she
+is."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+"TRY IT"
+
+The early morning sun, slanting in through a small window, found Major
+Studholme seated at his table lost in deep thought.  The letter Dane
+had brought was lying open before him.  Occasionally he glanced toward
+it, and each time his brow knitted in perplexity.  At length he rose
+and paced rapidly up and down the room.  With the exception of the
+table and a few stools this office was destitute of any furniture.  It
+was as bleak as the hill upon which Fort Howe was situated.  Here the
+men of the garrison received their orders, and it was here that the
+Major interviewed visitors from Portland Point, and couriers from all
+sections of the country.  This commanding officer was the same to all
+men, so the humblest workman in the trading company's employ, or the
+uncouth native from the heart of the wilderness received just as much
+attention as men of high rank.  Stern and unbending in the line of
+duty, Major Studholme realised the importance of his position, and that
+as a superior officer in the service of his King he must render
+even-handed justice, irrespective of color or rank.  A sharp
+rat-tat-tat upon the door startled him.
+
+"Come in," he called.
+
+At once the door swung open, and a stalwart, sturdy man entered,
+carrying a stout stick in his hand which he used as a cane.
+
+"Ah, good morning, Mr. Simonds," the Major accosted, his face
+brightening with pleasure and relief as he held out his hand.  "I
+didn't expect you so early."
+
+"Umph! this is not early," the visitor replied.  "It seems late to me.
+Why, I've been up all night.  Not a wink of sleep have I had.  But,
+say, I've something here that'll refresh us both."
+
+Drawing a flask from an inner pocket, he stepped forward and placed it
+upon the table.
+
+"Have a noggin, Major.  The _Polly_ arrived last night, straight from
+the West Indies, and Leavitt brought me some special Old Jamaica.  I
+thought maybe you'd like to test it."
+
+In a twinkling two mugs were produced, and filled to the brim.
+
+"To the King, God bless him," Simonds toasted.
+
+"To the King," the Major responded, as he raised his mug and clinked it
+against the visitor's.
+
+When this toast had been drunk, the Major again filled the mugs.
+
+"Now, another," he cried.  "To the Loyalists, especially to Colonel
+Sterling's daughter, the fairest of them all."
+
+"To the Loyalists and the Colonel's daughter," Simonds repeated.
+
+Again the mugs clinked, and two honest men drank their second toast.
+This done, they took their seats at the table, and settled down to
+business of a most important nature.
+
+James Simonds was really the business pioneer of Portland Point.  He
+was a man of outstanding ability and remarkable energy.  For years he
+had been the moving spirit and leader in numerous enterprises.  Of him
+and his partner, James White, it was said that "At one time the fishery
+claimed their attention, at another the Indian trade; at one time the
+building of houses for themselves and their tenants, at another the
+dyking of the marsh; at one time they were engaged in the erection of a
+mill, at another the building of a schooner; at one time they were
+making a wharf, at another laying out roads or clearing land; at one
+time they were furnishing supplies and cordwood to the garrison, at
+another in burning and shipping lime."  In addition to this they owned
+and employed a score of vessels, both schooners and sloops, which plied
+not only on the river, but beyond the Bay to distant ports.
+
+It was only natural that the commanding officer of Fort Howe should
+call upon the senior partner of the company for advice and assistance
+in time of need.  And two serious problems had now been thrust upon
+him.  One was the care and disposal of the three thousand Loyalists;
+the other, the arrival of Dane Norwood with news of threatening trouble
+up river.
+
+"How many vessels have you on hand?" the Major asked.
+
+"Only a few," Simonds replied.  "But I expect several more in a few
+days.  The _Peggy & Molly_ is already spoken for by the people on the
+_Union_.  They haven't disembarked, as they plan to go up river at
+once."
+
+"And you say the _Polly_ arrived last night?"
+
+"Yes, and she is unloading now."
+
+"Well, I want you to keep her for Colonel Sterling, and a number of
+other people."
+
+"So the Colonel is going to leave, is he?  I was hoping that he would
+stay here.  Where does he expect to settle?"
+
+"It is not decided yet.  However, we shall know in a few days when the
+lots are drawn."
+
+"There will be a big load, I suppose.  They'll want to take their
+boards, shingles, and household effects, no doubt."
+
+"Yes, if you can manage it; otherwise Leavitt will have to make two
+trips.  And there is something else I want to send."
+
+The Major leaned forward, and touched the letter lying upon the table.
+
+"I received this yesterday from Davidson," he explained, "and he
+requests immediate help."
+
+"He does?  What's wrong?"
+
+"The slashers are giving him no end of trouble.  There is danger of a
+serious outbreak, and he has not enough men to cope with the situation."
+
+"So he wants you to send soldiers?"
+
+"He does, and at once.  But I cannot spare any men now, as I have
+barely enough to guard this place.  There are rebels in our midst, and
+it is hard to tell what mischief they are planning."
+
+"How do you know that?" the trader asked in surprise.  "I thought they
+were all up river."
+
+"And so did I until last night.  But the young man who brought this
+letter from Davidson was attacked by three slashers as he was searching
+for me.  They met him as he was coming from your store along the
+waterfront.  Fortunately he was able to put the three to route."
+
+"How did he know they were slashers?"
+
+"Because they demanded the letter he was carrying.  It proves that they
+were spies, and knew from whence the courier had come."
+
+"It does seem reasonable," the trader agreed.  "But I did not know they
+were hanging around our store.  There has been such a crowd there,
+though, the last two days that I could not tell the slashers from the
+Loyalists.  However, I shall keep a sharp watch after this, and if I
+catch them I shall let you know at once.  But what about Davidson?  He
+must be hard pressed, or he would not have sent you that urgent appeal."
+
+"I can't send him any men, Mr. Simonds, that's certain," and the Major
+thrummed upon the table as he spoke.  "Why, it would take a regiment to
+do any good, and I have barely fifty men in all.  But I am going to
+send him a supply of guns and ammunition.  They must go on the _Polly_,
+and you are to give Leavitt strict instructions to see that they are
+delivered to Davidson as speedily as possible.  That is the best I can
+do."
+
+A sharp rap sounded upon the door, and at once a soldier entered.  He
+advanced to the centre of the room, stopped, clicked his heels
+together, saluted, and stood at attention.
+
+"Well, Parker, what is it?" the Major asked..
+
+"A man to see you, sir."
+
+"A courier?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Send him in at once."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+Again the soldier saluted, wheeled, and left the room.  In another
+minute Dane entered, and at once walked over to where the two men were
+sitting.  His free and easy manner was in striking contrast to the
+soldier's, and this the Major noted.  He admired the courier's frank
+open countenance, and clear, fearless eyes.  He was a man after his own
+heart.
+
+"I am glad to see you on time," he accosted.
+
+"I generally try to be," Dane replied.  "Have you the message for
+Davidson?"
+
+"It's not ready yet, but I shall write it at once."
+
+The Major turned to the table, drew a sheet of paper toward him, and
+picked up a quill pen, which he examined critically before dipping it
+into the ink.  Again he turned to the courier.
+
+"The situation is serious up river, is it not?" he asked.
+
+"It certainly is.  Davidson must have help."
+
+"Where is the greatest danger?"
+
+"That is hard to tell.  The slashers are scattered over a wide extent
+of country, and are to be found in most unexpected places.  Why, you
+have them in and around here.  My Indian and I were fired upon
+yesterday while crossing the Kennebacasis, and I was attacked by three
+while leaving the trading post."
+
+"And you were fired upon yesterday, you say?" the Major asked in
+surprise.  "How far out?"
+
+"About ten miles.  We had just crossed the portage from the main river
+to the Kennebacasis when we heard the slashers at work.  We launched
+our canoe, and were heading for this side when they blazed at us
+several times."
+
+"Dear me!  Dear me!" the Major groaned.  "I didn't know they were as
+bold as all that."
+
+"And they will be bolder yet," Dane warned.
+
+"In what way?"
+
+"They will stir up the Indians, if I am not much mistaken."
+
+"But the Indians are friendly to us.  Why, we made a treaty with them
+right here nearly five years ago."
+
+"I know that.  But the Indians have become quite restless of late.
+When the war was on they received special attention from the English
+and the Americans.  Both sides were anxious to win their good will and
+support, and gave them many presents.  But now that the war is over the
+Indians are neglected, so they are becoming surly, and ready for
+mischief.  Mark my word, the arrival of these Loyalists will make
+matters worse."
+
+"In what way?"
+
+"The slashers will do their utmost to stir up the Indians.  They will
+tell them that these newcomers will settle on their hunting-grounds,
+and kill all their game, while they will be driven out and left to
+starve."
+
+"Surely they will not do that."
+
+"They have been doing it already, although they know nothing as yet
+about the coming of the Loyalists.  They have been filling the minds of
+the Indians with all kinds of false stories.  So far their words have
+had little definite effect, but when the natives see so many white
+people settling along the river, I am afraid they will remember what
+the slashers have told them, and trouble will follow.  Some of the
+Indians, I am sure, will stand by the treaty, but I have my doubts
+about many others."
+
+During this conversation Mr. Simonds had been a silent and interested
+listener.  When, however, Dane had ended, he brought his stick down
+upon the floor with a bang.
+
+"I believe you are right, young man," he began.  "White and I have had
+our suspicions of this for some time, and your words confirm what we
+have by chance heard.  Where do you live, and how is it I have never
+seen you before?"
+
+"I live in no special place," Dane replied.  "My business as the King's
+Arrow takes me everywhere, although this is the first time I have been
+sent here."
+
+"How did you come to get that name?"
+
+"Davidson gave it to me.  You know, every white pine that is considered
+suitable for the King's navy is marked with a broad arrow, I guess that
+suggested the idea to Davidson, as I am always darting here and there
+like an arrow.  Anyway, the name has stuck to me ever since."
+
+"And well that it should," the trader agreed, nodding his head in
+approval.  "Don't you think so, Major?"
+
+The latter, however, was busily writing, so did not hear the question.
+Presently he paused and turned to the courier.
+
+"So you think the Loyalists will be in danger along the river?" he
+asked.
+
+"They will, unless the slashers and others who are against the King can
+be stopped."
+
+"Who is the ringleader in this rebellion?"
+
+For the first time since entering the room Dane failed to reply.  His
+bronzed face flushed, and his eyes dropped.  This both the Major and
+the trader noted, and their curiosity became aroused.  They felt that
+this courier knew more than he was willing to divulge.
+
+"Are you afraid to tell?" the Major questioned.
+
+Dane suddenly lifted his head, and an angry expression glowed in his
+eyes.
+
+"Do you think I am afraid?" he demanded.  "Do I look it?"
+
+"Well, no," and the Major slightly smiled.  "But why will you not tell
+me the name of the ringleader?"
+
+"Because I have a special reason."
+
+"Suppose I make you?"
+
+"Try it."
+
+Although this reply was low and calm, yet the Major had sufficient
+knowledge of human nature to know that those two small words meant a
+great deal.  He truly realised that nothing, not even death, could
+force this sturdy courier to divulge the secret against his will.  He
+wisely dropped the subject, and turned again to the table.  Nothing now
+was heard in the room but the scratching of the quill across the paper
+as the Major fashioned the bold comely letters of his answer to William
+Davidson, the King's purveyor.  When he had signed his name, he picked
+up a small sand-box, and lightly sprinkled the paper.  This done, he
+rose to his feet, crossed the room, and opened the door.
+
+"Parker, bring me a fire," he ordered.
+
+The soldier thus addressed evidently knew what was needed, for in a few
+minutes he entered, bearing in his hands a small iron receptacle
+containing a few hot coals.  He stood perfectly rigid before the table
+while the Major held a stick of sealing-wax to the hot iron, and
+allowed a few drops to fall upon the back of the folded letter.  When
+the Major had pressed his signet ring upon the wax, the task was
+finished, the soldier saluted and left the room.  After the Major had
+addressed the letter, and sprinkled it until the ink was dry, he handed
+it to the courier.
+
+"Take this to Davidson," he ordered.  "I am glad that I have met you,
+young man, and I hope to hear from you again."
+
+Dane took the letter, placed it carefully in an inside pocket of his
+jacket, bade the two men good morning, and at once left the room.
+
+"What do you think of him?" the Major asked turning toward the trader.
+
+"A remarkable young man," was the emphatic reply.  "But I am surprised
+that I have not heard of him before."
+
+"It is strange.  But look here, Mr. Simonds," and the Major brought his
+fist down heavily upon the table, "if I had a regiment of men like that
+courier to send to Davidson, we would have no more trouble with the
+slashers and other rebels."
+
+"You're about right, Major.  But I'm wondering why he refused to tell
+us the name of that ringleader.  I must get White to work at this.  He
+may be able to find out, for he can do more with the Indians than
+anybody else."
+
+"I wish you would look carefully into this matter," the Major replied.
+"If we can round up that ringleader, it may put a sudden stop to the
+whole trouble.  I shall send half of my men to capture him if he can be
+found."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+WHEN THE BOW-STRING TWANGED
+
+The little schooner _Polly_, of twenty tons burden, had come on the
+flood tide up through the Reversible Falls.  She had then slipped out
+of the Narrows where the grey, weather-beaten limestone rocks frown
+high on both sides, and was clipping merrily across the big basin of
+Grand Bay straight for Beaubear's River.  She was well loaded, for over
+a dozen families were on board, with their household effects, together
+with a large supply of boards and shingles.  In addition, there were
+the guns which Major Studholme was sending up river to William
+Davidson, the King's purveyor.
+
+It was a beautiful early June day, and as Jean Sterling stood close at
+the bow she thought that she had never beheld a more perfect sight.
+Everywhere she looked great sweeping forests were to be seen crowding
+to the very water's edge.  She breathed a deep sigh of relief, for she
+was glad to be speeding at last toward her new home in the wilderness.
+Surely there she would find refuge from the man who had been dogging
+her steps ever since she landed at Portland Point.  He had not spoken
+to her after his defeat by Dane Norwood, but she knew that he had ever
+been near, following and watching her wherever she went.  She thought,
+too, of him who had rescued her that night, and her eyes brightened.
+He had seldom been out of her mind since then, and she recalled again
+his pleasing presence and the words he had spoken.  She wondered if she
+should ever see him again, or whether he had forgotten her altogether.
+
+She was aroused by her father's voice, and glancing quickly around she
+saw him coming toward her, and with him the captain of the schooner,
+Jonathan Leavitt.
+
+"Been indulging in day-dreams?" her father asked.
+
+"I believe I have," she smilingly replied, while a conscious blush
+stole into her cheeks.  "And why shouldn't I?" she hastily added.  "Who
+could help having daydreams in such a wonderful place as this?"
+
+"I am glad to see you so bright and happy, dear.  Poor Old Mammy is
+indulging in night-dreams, and moaning about our terrible lot."
+
+"Night-mares, I should say," the captain laughingly corrected.  "To
+hear her wail and lament one would think that we are all going to be
+scalped alive before morning."
+
+"And there are others who have the same idea," the Colonel replied.
+"They can see nothing but misery and death right ahead."
+
+"But is there any real danger, captain?" Jean asked.
+
+"There is always more or less danger in a country such as this," was
+the quiet reply.  "This river has witnessed stirring scenes.  Look at
+those little clearings over yonder, for instance," and he pointed to
+the western shore.  "A few settlers had their homes there, but the
+Indians drove them out, and burned their houses.  It has been the same
+in other places, and it may happen again.  But I have made many trips
+on this river, and the natives have never troubled me yet.  It may be
+because I sail on the _Polly_," he added with a twinkle in his eyes.
+
+"What has the _Polly_ to do with it, captain?"
+
+"Oh, she leads a charmed life.  She has got into no end of difficult
+places, but has always come out on top.  I have driven her through
+storms between here and the West Indies that would have swamped a much
+larger vessel.  At one time she was forced by a wild gale on the top of
+the wharf at Newburyport.  But she was pulled off all right.  Several
+times she was captured by pirates, though generally she was able to
+show her heels in a lively manner to the fastest pursuer.  She has
+carried all kinds of loads, from fish taken at Annapolis and
+Passamaquoddy to barrels of rum from Jamaica.  But this is the most
+important cargo she ever carried, and she seems proud of it.  She's
+English to the core, the _Polly_ is.  Now, look how she swings away
+from that point.  She doesn't like the place."
+
+"Why?" the colonel asked.  "It is a most beautiful spot."
+
+"Indeed it is, but the _Polly_ always shies off when she comes here.
+No doubt it's due to the current from that little stream, the Beaubear,
+but I like to think that this schooner knows that the old French Fort,
+Boishebert, was situated on that point.  You can see the ruins of the
+place from here.  No, the _Polly_ doesn't like the French; guess she's
+had too much to do with them, the same as her captain."
+
+They were out of Grand Bay now and bearing up through a fine stretch of
+water known as the "Long Reach."  The land on both sides of the river
+was rugged, while far ahead the outlines of several islands could be
+discerned.
+
+"And there's another," the captain exclaimed in disgust.
+
+"Another what?" Jean asked.
+
+"Oh, a place where the French once held out.  It's that first island
+you see away up there.  The Indian name is 'Ah-men-henik,' but the
+French called it 'Isle au Garce,' for what reason I don't know.
+Anyway, there were lively times on that island when the French had a
+trading post there.  It now belongs to Captain Isaac Caton.  There's a
+small rocky island a little above, which the French called 'Isle de
+trent,' while just above is the 'Isle of Vines.'  It is in behind that
+where you are to land, just below Oak Point."
+
+"Is it a pretty place?" Jean asked, now much excited.  "Have you ever
+been there?"
+
+"Not often, Miss.  I generally keep out in the main channel, as I
+haven't the time to run into any of the out-of-the-way places.  But I
+guess you'll like it all right."
+
+"I am going to like it," the girl declared with enthusiasm.  "And what
+is more, I am going to do my best to make others like it, too.  It will
+be our home only for a while until daddy and the other men can look
+around and choose places where they are to settle permanently.  Mammy,
+I believe, will be the hardest one to manage.  She means well, and
+makes all kinds of promises, though she is very forgetful.  I must now
+go and cheer her up."
+
+An hour and a half later the _Polly_ left the channel and glided in
+through a narrow opening between the first island and the mainland.
+Captain Leavitt was at the wheel, for navigation here was difficult.
+Jean was standing by his side, her eyes and face aglow with animation.
+
+"What a wonderful and beautiful place this is!" she exclaimed.  "Those
+islands lying over there, and that long point running out into the
+river make this a perfect harbour.  Where do we land, captain?"
+
+"Straight ahead, Miss, where those big pines stand the thickest," the
+captain replied as he gave the wheel a rapid turn to the left.  "Say, I
+nearly struck that bar," he added.  "I didn't know it ran out so far
+from the island."
+
+In less than a half hour the _Polly_ was brought up head to the wind,
+and the anchor dropped.  The small boat, which had been towed astern,
+was brought into service, and the passengers taken ashore.  It was a
+snug cove where these exiles had determined for a time to make their
+wilderness home.  The land lifted gradually back to the high hills, all
+covered with a dense forest.  Eastward, toward the point, the trees
+were thinner, and in some spots the land had been cleared, evidently by
+early French settlers.  To the northwest the water extended inland in
+the form of a marshy creek, with a fair-sized brook beyond, flanked on
+both sides by high hills.
+
+It wanted but two hours to sunset when the passengers were landed, and
+their household effects brought ashore.  It was a busy time, for
+camping sites had to be chosen, underbrush cleared away, and tents
+pitched.  But men and women alike worked with a hearty good will.
+There was something thrilling and invigorating in this new and strange
+life.  It was most restful after the tumult and distractions of war,
+the unpleasant ocean voyage, and the landing at desolate Portland
+Point.  The warmth and brightness of the day, the fragrance of the
+forest, and the happy laughter of children racing along the sandy shore
+charmed and inspired the parents' hearts.  Even Old Mammy forgot for a
+time her gloomy forbodings, and was quite cheerful as she helped Jean
+to unpack some of their household belongings.
+
+The Colonel had pitched his tent in a snug retreat several rods back
+from the water.  When the last peg had been driven securely into the
+ground, he stepped back to view the effect.
+
+"How does that suit you, dear?" he asked, turning to Jean who was
+standing near by.
+
+"I think it is great, daddy," was the enthusiastic reply.  "This is the
+happiest and most peaceful time I have known for years.  It is like a
+perfect calm after a terrible storm."
+
+"I am very thankful, Jean, that our wanderings are at last ended.  Here
+we shall stay for a time until we can choose a suitable place for our
+future home.  When we get our house built we should be quite
+comfortable.  We are on English soil, at any rate, and that is a great
+satisfaction.  We are not likely to be molested here."
+
+"Not if the Indians and rebels leave us alone, daddy."
+
+"You must not worry about them, dear.  We have had no quarrel with
+them, so why should they molest us?  I feel that we are perfectly safe."
+
+Night at length shut down slowly over the land, and a deep silence
+reigned on all sides.  The weary children were asleep in the tents, and
+men and women were gathered upon the shore.  A fire of drift-wood had
+been built, and around the bright cheerful blaze all were gathered.
+The small crew of the schooner had come ashore, and were taking part in
+the general conversation.  For some time they sat there, talking of
+bygone days and plans for the future.
+
+Colonel Sterling took little part in the talk.  He sat upon a block of
+wood, with Jean seated on the ground by his side, her right arm resting
+upon his knee as she gazed dreamily into the fire.  He was much
+interested in studying the flame-illumined faces of that little circle
+of men and women.  He knew the history of their lives, what they had
+suffered during the war, and how much they had sacrificed for
+conscience's sake.  A few were bowed with age, and their late trials
+had deepened the furrows upon their faces, and increased the whiteness
+of their hoary heads.  Upon them the removal from their old homes had
+been the hardest.  There were others, middle-aged men and women, whose
+eyes glowed with the light of a high resolve.  Their features expressed
+determination which nothing could daunt.  These said but little,
+leaving the younger ones to do most of the talking.  There were youths
+and maidens, more free from care than their elders, who chatted and
+laughed in the most animated manner.
+
+As the evening wore on and the conversation gradually died down, Simon
+Winters brought forth his fife and began to play an old familiar tune.
+At once all talking ceased, and hearts thrilled with memories of other
+days.  Several tunes did Simon play, and when he had ended, the Colonel
+brought forth a small, well-worn book from an inside coat pocket.  This
+he opened and then glanced around upon the little band.
+
+"Friends," he began, "the hour is late, and we are all weary.  But ere
+we separate, I ask you to join with me in a brief service of prayer and
+praise.  But first of all, we need a message from the Great Book."
+
+Then in a clear strong voice he read the ninety-first psalm, and as the
+words of promise sounded forth an intense silence reigned.  The psalm
+ended, the Colonel closed the book, and dropping upon his knees began
+to repeat the Lord's Prayer.  All immediately followed his example,
+including the captain and the crew of the schooner.  As they rose to
+their feet, one man started to sing.  The words and tune were familiar,
+and in another minute old and young were lifting up their voices in
+Isaac Watts' grand hymn of comfort and hope.
+
+  O God, our help in ages past,
+  Our hope for years to come,
+  Our shelter from the stormy blast,
+  And our eternal home.
+
+Never before had the silent, brooding forest witnessed a like
+gathering, nor its dark mysterious depths re-echoed with such
+unfamiliar sounds.  But that camp-fire scene was merely a prelude to
+the tide of progress already setting, when unnamed rivers, hidden
+lakes, crouching valleys, lofty hills, and secret woodland depths would
+know those sounds, and rejoice in the knowledge.
+
+An hour later silence reigned over the camp in the wilderness, broken
+only by the occasional hoot of an owl, or the light steps of some
+little forest creature.
+
+About midnight the moon rose beyond the eastern hills, and rode high
+above the Isle of Vines.  It cast its bright beams across the now
+placid water, and stole on furtive foot into the camping ground of the
+weary sleepers.  As the river and shore thus became illuminated, a tall
+Indian stepped out from the darkness of the forest, and stood for a few
+minutes gazing upon the ghost-like tents.  In one hand he carried a
+heavy flint-lock, and in the other a string of fine trout, while across
+his right shoulder hung a long bow and several arrows.  He was not at
+all surprised at the sight before him, as he had been lurking near all
+the evening, watching with intense interest the group about the
+camp-fire.  His attention now, however, was fixed upon the tent where
+Jean and Old Mammy were sleeping, and the Colonel's form wrapped in his
+blankets just outside.
+
+At length he placed his gun and fish upon the ground, unslung the bow
+from his back, and fitted an arrow to its place.  Then the bow-string
+twanged, and the arrow hurtled through the air, and sank deep into a
+great pine tree a few feet from where the Colonel was lying.  For
+several minutes the Indian stood as motionless as the trees around him.
+Then picking up the fish, he glided silently forward, and reaching the
+pine, he fastened them to the embedded arrow.  This done, he cast a
+quick glance toward the still form near at hand, turned and moved
+swiftly away.  In another minute he had recovered his weapons, and
+disappeared in the depths of the great gloomy forest.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+OUT OF THE STORM
+
+Early the next morning Old Mammy drew back the flap of the tent,
+stepped outside, and waddled over to where she had prepared supper the
+previous evening.  She had always prided herself upon being the first
+to rise, and she was determined that she would continue the custom here
+in the wilderness.
+
+The sun had just risen above the far off eastern horizon, and was
+struggling to disentangle itself from the drifting tresses of fog
+hanging in massy banks over the river.  Slowly but surely it slipped
+away from each misty, tremulous embrace, and then like a giant
+refreshed by the encounter assumed the offensive.  Before the mighty
+champion's silent fiery darts the surging foggy battalions wavered,
+loosened their hold on river and land, and broke in utter confusion.
+Wildly they scattered and fled, but escape they could not, and ere long
+not the slightest vestige remained of their once proud ranks.
+
+Of all this Old Mammy saw nothing, as she was too busy digging among
+the ashes of the fire-place for a few live coals.  It was only Jean who
+witnessed the magnificent sight.  She had slipped out of the tent
+shortly after her old servant, and had hurried down to the shore for
+her morning wash.  Here Mother Nature had provided her with basin and
+mirror combined in the calm water at her feet.  Straight and lithe she
+stood, her dark, unbound hair flowing in ripples to her waist.  Her
+face, turned eastward, was aglow with health and animation, and her
+eyes shone with the light of a joyous surprise.
+
+"Isn't it wonderful!" she breathed.  "I never saw anything like it.
+Why, it's a real fairy-land."
+
+She was startled by a cry from Mammy, and turning quickly around, she
+saw the woman pointing excitedly to the big pine tree.  The Colonel,
+aroused from slumber, had leaped to his feet, and was staring straight
+before him as Jean hurried up from the shore.
+
+"What is the matter?" the girl asked.
+
+"Look, look!" Mammy cried, pointing to the tree.  "De debbil has been
+here."
+
+Jean's eyes were now resting upon the object of the woman's excitement,
+and she, too, was filled with astonishment.  She stared at the trout
+and the arrow, and then looked wonderingly at her father.
+
+"How do you suppose they got there, daddy?" she questioned.
+
+"It was de debbil, I tell ye," Mammy insisted before the Colonel could
+speak.  "He's been in dis place, an' dat's his mark."
+
+"He must be very friendly, then," the Colonel replied.  "I don't mind
+how often he comes if he leaves fish, and they are trout at that."
+
+By this time the entire camp had been aroused, and men, women and
+children were gathered near, gazing with wide-eyed astonishment upon
+the big pine.  There were numerous conjectures as to the meaning of the
+arrow and the fish.  Most, however, were of the opinion that it was the
+work of Indians, and that no doubt they were lurking near.  Fearful
+glances were cast along the silent forest aisles, and vivid imagination
+pictured dusky warriors ready to swoop down with terrible war-whoops.
+But Old Mammy scoffed at this idea.
+
+"It's de debbil, I tell ye, an' no Injun," she declared.  "Dat's his
+mark, an' he's plannin' some mischief.  It's a warnin' to us all.  We
+nebber should hab come to sich a place as dis."
+
+The Colonel listened with considerable amusement to what was being
+said.  At length, however, he stepped forward and laid his right hand
+upon the fish.  With a cry of fear Mammy sprang to his side.
+
+"Doan touch 'em!  Doan touch 'em!" she shrieked.  "It ain't safe!  It
+ain't safe!"
+
+"Why, Mammy, what do you mean?" the Colonel asked.
+
+"Go 'way, go 'way," the excited woman pleaded.  "Dey belong to de
+debbil, an' he'll bewitch ye.  Doan touch 'em."
+
+"Look here, Mammy," and there was a note of sternness in the Colonel's
+voice, "I want you to be quiet.  I thought you had more sense.  The
+devil had nothing to do with this.  It's the Lord's arrow, it seems to
+me.  He sent the ravens of old to feed his faithful servant in the
+wilderness, so perhaps he has sent the Indians to do the same to us
+now.  Anyway, we are going to have a taste of fish for breakfast.  It
+would be a shame to throw away such excellent trout."
+
+Jean had been a silent and interested spectator of all that had taken
+place.  Like her father she was somewhat amused at the various
+expressions of fear.  She was not afraid of the Indians, neither was
+she superstitious enough to believe that the devil had anything to do
+with the arrow and the fish.  But when the Colonel spoke about the
+"Lord's Arrow," she gave a sudden start, while the light of
+understanding dawned in her eyes.  The "King's Arrow" at once came into
+her mind, and she thought of him who had come to her rescue at Portland
+Point.  Could it be possible that he had anything to do with it? she
+asked herself.  Was that arrow a token that he was near?  And were the
+fish a sign of his care?  She glanced around as if expecting to see him
+emerge from the forest to explain the whole matter.  Her heart beat
+fast, and the rich blood tingled to her cheeks.  She withdrew a few
+steps lest her confusion should be observed.  The King's Arrow.  The
+King's Arrow.  It kept surging through her mind.  It could be no one
+else, she reasoned.  She longed to speak, to tell of the discovery she
+had made.  But how could she explain?  Would she not betray her
+feelings, and thus increase her embarrassment?  Would it not be better
+to remain silent than to lay bare to others the thoughts which were
+agitating her heart and mind?
+
+She was aroused by her father bidding her to help prepare one of the
+fish for breakfast, as Mammy would have nothing to do with it.  She
+obeyed with alacrity, pleased to have something to do.  As she looked
+upon the speckled beauty she thought how like an arrow it appeared; its
+long, lithe body resembling the smooth shaft; the head and gills the
+barbed point; and the spreading tail the feathered end.  She wondered
+if there was a meaning in all this, or was it merely her own foolish
+imagination?
+
+She thought much about this during the days that followed, although she
+mentioned it to no one, not even to Old Mammy.  For several nights a
+number of the younger men had kept watch, with their special attention
+directed to the big pine.  This, however, soon proved very irksome, and
+as nothing further happened, the watch was discontinued.  The men
+worked hard by day erecting their rude log cabins, so they could ill
+afford to sit up all night.  A feeling of security gradually pervaded
+the camp, and all became cheerful and hopeful.
+
+At a meeting held one night they decided upon the name "Loyal" for
+their little community.
+
+"I feel we could not choose a better one," the Colonel said.  "Every
+one here is an outcast for loyalty to the King, and when we get our
+flag-staff erected, the Union Jack floating above the trees will be a
+reminder to friend and foe alike of our unswerving devotion."
+
+No one had interfered with the arrow embedded in the pine, and that
+lordly tree had been left standing while most of its nearby companions
+had fallen beneath the axe.  Not a day passed that Jean did not glance
+toward the arrow, and each time she thought of him who had become so
+real to her.  But for two weeks no further sign was vouchsafed, until
+one morning as she came forth from her tent she saw a brace of fine
+partridges hanging from the arrow.  Once more excitement spread
+throughout the camp, and again various conjectures were heard as to the
+presence of the partridges.  The birds were carefully examined, and
+several small pieces of lead were found in their bodies.  Jean showed
+these to Mammy in her effort to convince the superstitious servant that
+the devil had nothing to do with it.
+
+"Why, these birds were shot, Mammy," she explained.  "Some one with a
+gun did it, and brought them to us."
+
+"Ah, Missie Jean," and the old woman raised a warning finger, "de
+debbil knows eberyt'ing.  He kin use a gun when he wants to, an' he kin
+make men do his nasty work.  Didn't he put it into de heart of ol'
+Judas Scariot to betray de good Lo'd?  An' mark my word, dat's jes what
+he's doin' now.  He's up to some trick."
+
+"But why would he be so friendly, Mammy?  He's helping us instead of
+trying to do us harm."
+
+"Doan ye know yo' Bible, chile?  Doesn't it say in de Good Book dat de
+debbil comes to folks as an angel of light, an' makes 'em b'lieve dat
+he's friendly an' good?  No, ye kin nebber trust de debbil.  He's got
+somet'ing up his sleeve, an' doan yo' fo'git it."
+
+Jean merely smiled at the woman's fears, knowing how useless it was to
+reason any further.  She was satisfied in her own mind where the birds
+had come from, and the thought brought a thrill to her heart.  This was
+intensified several days later when two wild ducks were found one
+morning suspended from the arrow.
+
+"This is getting to be almost uncanny," the Colonel remarked as he
+examined the birds.  "Whoever is responsible for these presents is a
+strange friend.  I wish he would make himself known that we might thank
+him."
+
+Jean was of the same opinion, although she did not say so.  She had
+often wondered why Dane Norwood had remained hidden.  That it was the
+courier she had not the slightest doubt.  But why did he not come by
+day that she might see him?
+
+Two weeks passed and nothing more happened.  Most of the houses were
+almost completed.  The Colonel had his finished first, and it was a
+proud day when he gave the order to move their few belongings from the
+tent.  This was soon done, and Jean and Mammy spent the whole of the
+afternoon fitting up their new abode.  The day was unusually hot, and
+at times they were forced to seek shelter beneath the shade of some
+friendly trees.  Night brought but little respite, and even Old Mammy
+complained of the heat.
+
+"Dis is de first time I'se been wa'm since comin' to dis place," she
+announced.  "It reminds me of my ol' home in de Souf, it sa'tinly does."
+
+At length a vivid flash of lightning streaked the air, followed
+immediately by a roll of thunder off to the west.
+
+"It's just what I've been expecting" the Colonel remarked, as he walked
+over to the door and looked out.  "Such heat as we've had to-day is
+generally followed by a thunder storm.  It is coming this way fast.
+Listen to that."
+
+The storm was rolling up rapidly over the hills, while the play of the
+lightning was grand and terrible.  And mingled with the roar of thunder
+was the sound of the hurrying feet of the rain driven before the
+onrushing wind.  Suddenly a blinding flash illumined water and land,
+followed instantly by a crash that shook the cabin.  Old Mammy gave a
+shriek of fear, and caught Jean in her arms.
+
+"Oh, oh, oh!" she moaned.  "Dis is turrible!  We'll all be killed!
+We'll all be killed!"
+
+"Hush, hush, Mammy," Jean ordered.  "Don't get so excited.  This storm
+will soon be over, will it not, daddy?"
+
+"Most likely," the Colonel replied.  "But come here, dear, I want you
+to see this wonderful electric display upon the water."
+
+Freeing herself from the colored woman's embrace, the girl rose,
+crossed the room, and stood by her father's side.  As she turned her
+eyes upon the river, she gave a gasp of astonishment.  Between the
+shore and the Isle of Vines the lightning was holding high carnival.
+For an instant there was intense darkness, followed by a succession of
+brilliant, flickering illuminations, bewildering to the senses.
+Several times she was forced to turn away her head, but only for a
+second, as she was compelled by some strange fascination to look upon
+the wonderful spectacle.  Flash upon flash, racing gleam upon gleam,
+Stygian darkness and crashing thunder intermingled in an appalling
+confusion.  Jean felt that she could endure the sight no longer.  Her
+body trembled, and her eyes ached.  She was about to go back to Mammy,
+when her father laid his hand upon her shoulder.
+
+"What is that out there?" he asked.  "Ah, it's gone now.  It seemed to
+me like a boat.  There it is again."
+
+Jean looked and for a few seconds was enabled to catch a glimpse of a
+craft of some kind coming to them straight from the island.
+
+"It is a canoe, daddy, and I can see some one paddling.  Who can it be
+on the river in such a storm as this?"
+
+And just then the rain swept down, forcing them to retreat a few steps
+within the cabin.  But still they peered forth, and with fast-beating
+hearts watched the approaching voyager.  Whenever a glimmering flash
+revealed the canoe, it resembled a mystic bark riding through the
+storm, encircled with a living fire.  So weird and mysterious did it
+seem that Jean caught her father impulsively by the arm, while a slight
+cry of awe escaped her lips.
+
+"It isn't natural, daddy," she whispered.  "It's uncanny.  Do you
+suppose it's a spirit?"
+
+"No, no, dear.  It's an Indian, no doubt.  Look, he has stopped
+paddling now, and is about to land."
+
+Darkness again intervened, and the next flash revealed a tall form
+stepping upon the shore as blackness once more enshrouded him.  The
+next glimpse showed him coming toward the cabin, carrying a bundle in
+his arms.  In another minute he was at the door, an Indian of
+magnificent physique, clad in buckskins, with a squirrel-skin cap upon
+his head.  He smiled as he looked upon the astonished ones before him.
+Then he held out the bundle toward the girl.
+
+"White woman tak' babby, eh?" he asked,
+
+But Jean hesitated, and drew back a little.  This seemed to surprise
+the Indian.
+
+"Babby no hurt white woman," he explained.  "Babby velly leetle.  Babby
+no home, no mamma."
+
+No longer could Jean resist such an appeal, so stepping forward, she
+took the bundle in her arms.  Awkwardly she held it, uncertain what to
+do.  Then Old Mammy came to her aid, and relieved her of her burden.
+
+"Why, chile, yo' doan know how to hol' a baby," she reproached.  "Yo'
+hol' it upside-down.  Yo' nebber had 'sperience wif babies.  Dis o'
+woman'll show yo' how."
+
+Seating herself upon a bench, she removed the blanket with which the
+child was enwrapped.  Jean dropped upon her knees by her side, and when
+a little dusky face was exposed to view, she gave a cry of delight.
+
+"Isn't it pretty!" she exclaimed.  "And it's asleep, too."
+
+The Indian's eyes shone with pleasure as he watched the girl's interest
+in the little child.
+
+"White woman tak' care babby, eh?"
+
+"You want us to keep it?" Jean asked.
+
+"Ah-ha-ha.  Wan moon, two moon, mebbe.  Injun come bimeby."
+
+Jean turned to her father, who had been standing silently near the door.
+
+"May we keep it, daddy?"
+
+"Ask Mammy," the Colonel replied.  "If she is willing, I have no
+objections.  She is the only one in this house who knows how to look
+after a baby."
+
+"I'se willin', Cun'l," the old woman agreed.  "It makes me t'ink of de
+lil'l chile I los' long time ago in ol' Connec.  Yes, I'se willin'."
+
+The Indian understood, and smiled.  He turned to go, but paused and
+looked at Jean.
+
+"White woman keep canoe, eh?" he queried.
+
+"Oh, may I?" the girl eagerly asked.  She had often longed for a canoe
+to paddle along the shore and explore the various creeks.
+
+"Ah-ha-ha.  White woman paddle all sam' Injun bimeby.  Me go now."
+
+The Colonel pressed the Indian to stay until the storm was over, but
+the native shook his head, and with another glance at the sleeping
+child, he passed out into the night.
+
+For about an hour the storm continued to rage.  But the gleaming
+lightning and the crashing thunder worried Old Mammy no longer.  She
+was completely engrossed in the little charge which had been so
+unexpectedly committed to her care.
+
+"I mus' take special care ob dis chile," she' said.  "Mebbe it's one of
+de Lo'd's angels, fo' wif Him it doan make no diff'rance what is de
+colah of de skin.  Dey's all His chillun, an' He lubs dem all alike.
+Doan yo' nebber fo'git dat, Missie Jean.  Dis may be one of de Lo'd's
+angels undewares."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+BENEATH THE SPREADING MAPLE
+
+The little community of Loyal had most things in common, as is
+generally the custom in pioneer settlements.  All took to their hearts
+the little Indian child, and felt somewhat responsible for its welfare.
+It seemed to them an omen of good will, and they believed that so long
+as it was with them they would not be disturbed by the Indians.  Old
+Mammy was very strong on this point, and was the one who first
+suggested the idea.
+
+"If a cat comes to yo' it's a sign of good luck," she declared.  "Now,
+we didn't send fo' dis chile; it jes came to us, so why shouldn't it
+bring us better luck den a cat?"
+
+The colored woman considered the baby her special property, and only on
+rare occasions would she allow anyone else to look after it.  Jean was
+delighted to have it in the house, and both she and her father became
+very fond of the little one.  They called it "Babby," not knowing its
+Indian name, and were greatly pleased at its cunning ways.
+
+The days and weeks sped rapidly by, and August was close edging into
+September before Jean realised that summer was almost gone.  It had
+been a busy time at the settlement, and the bright beautiful days
+glided uneventfully by.  Once again the _Polly_ had come up river with
+a load of provisions, and all had listened eagerly to the latest scraps
+of news brought by Captain Leavitt.  They learned from him that another
+fleet with a band of Loyalists was coming in the fall.  He expected to
+take many of the newcomers on his boat up river, and promised to call
+on his way back.  This important piece of information, as well as other
+bits of news, was discussed for days at Loyal.  They longed for some
+word from their old homes, and the friends they had left behind.  If
+they could but see the Loyalists when they arrived in the fall they
+might hear much.  Anyway, Captain Leavitt had promised to call, and no
+doubt he would have a fund of information.
+
+Every fine Sunday was a great day for Jean.  During the morning the
+Colonel gathered the people of the settlement about him, and read the
+service from the Prayer Book.  The responses and the singing of a few
+old familiar hymns were very hearty, and the Doxology and the National
+Anthem were invariably sung at the close.  It was but natural that the
+eyes of the older ones should become misty during this service, for it
+brought back memories of other days before the war.
+
+After dinner the Colonel and Jean always went for a walk, either
+through the woods or along the shore to the large point which ran far
+out into the river.  Here at this latter place they would sit under the
+great oak trees and talk to their hearts' content.
+
+Their chief resort, however, was the brook which babbled down among the
+hills, and flowed into the river between the settlement and the point.
+About a mile back the brook was broken by a mass of huge rocks over
+which the water poured in torrents during the spring and after every
+heavy rain.  But in the summer the rocks were bare, and only one great
+wreath of water slipped through a narrow crevice, and fell with a roar
+and a splash to the level below.  Nearby father and daughter liked to
+sit in the shade of the trees and listen to the music of the falling
+water.
+
+Jean always remembered the last time they were thus together.  It was
+the final Sunday in August, and a most perfect afternoon.  The Colonel
+had worked hard during the week and was very tired.  He was strangely
+silent and depressed as he sat leaning against a rock, gazing off into
+space.  It was so unlike his usual buoyant, cheery manner that Jean was
+quite anxious.
+
+"Is anything the matter, daddy?" she at length asked.  "Are you feeling
+sick?"
+
+The Colonel started, and a slight forced laugh escaped his lips.
+
+"No, no, not at all," he replied.  "Do I look sick?"
+
+"Then you must be worrying about something, daddy," and the girl's
+right hand stole sympathetically into his as she spoke.
+
+"Not worrying, dear; only somewhat lost in thought.  I have strange
+fancies this afternoon, suggested by those rocks which break the
+brook's steady course.  There have been three such breaks in my life,
+and of them I have been thinking."
+
+"I believe I know of two, daddy," Jean replied, as her father paused.
+"One was dear mother's death, and another the terrible war.  But I do
+not remember the third."
+
+"I told you once, dear, though you have forgotten, which is only
+natural.  It was the loss of a very dear friend, Thomas Norman."
+
+"Oh, yes, I remember now, daddy.  He was the man who suddenly
+disappeared, and has never been heard from since."
+
+"The very same, Jean.  Next to your mother he was the best friend I had
+on earth.  We had been boys together, and were inseparable.  He was
+well educated, and held an important position in the King's service.
+When he lost it, as he believed through intrigue and treachery, his
+whole life was embittered.  He became a changed man, and he brooded
+over it so much that I really believe it affected his mind.  Anyway, he
+suddenly left with his wife and family, and I have never heard from him
+since.  That was a long time ago when you were a mere child.  But I can
+never forget him, and the happy years we spent together.  What a joy it
+would be to have him here with me now as in the days of old.  But that
+cannot be.  As that brook flows on, notwithstanding the break in its
+course, so must my life.  However, I have much to be thankful for.  I
+have you, dear, and you are a great comfort.  If anything should happen
+to you, I do not believe I could endure life any longer."
+
+"Don't you worry about losing me, daddy," the girl assured.  "I am
+going to stick right close to you, no matter what happens.  But I think
+you had better leave this place which gives you such gloomy thoughts.
+This is too nice a day to feel unhappy."
+
+"You are right, dear, and I suppose we had better go home.  But I like
+to watch those great trees over yonder.  How strong and self-reliant
+they are.  How proudly they lift their heads.  What storms have swept
+over them, and yet they stand as erect as ever.  They do not complain,
+but accept everything, whether sunshine or darkness, winter or summer,
+as a matter of course.  They are friendly, too, and their big branches
+seem to reach out like welcoming hands.  There is always something
+inspiring to me about a great forest."
+
+Often during the following days Jean's mind reverted to what her father
+had said to her at the falls.  Although his old cheerful spirit
+returned, yet she observed him at times during the evenings, which were
+now lengthening, wrapped in thought, unheeding what was taking place
+around him.  This worried her a great deal, and a new sense of
+responsibility began to shape itself in her mind.  She believed that he
+missed his old home in Connecticut more than he would acknowledge, and
+that he was wearying of the monotonous life in the wilderness.  Perhaps
+he needed a change, and she wondered how this could be brought about.
+
+She was thinking seriously of this at the close of a bright day as she
+pointed the bark canoe up the creek lying to the northwest of the
+settlement.  She had become quite expert in handling the frail craft,
+although, at her father's bidding, she always paddled in shallow water.
+It was a beautiful afternoon, and the mighty forest crowning the
+undulating hills was radiant with the beams of the streaming sun.
+Slowly she moved up a narrow winding channel, the trees of the
+shoreward side spreading out their great branches in a leafy canopy,
+while on the other, acres of rushes and lily-pads lined the way.  It
+was a fairy-like scene through which she moved, and but for the serious
+thoughts which were agitating her mind, her soul would have been
+thrilled at the magnificent vista spreading out before her.
+
+Reaching at length the mouth of the brook, where the shallowness of the
+water made further progress impossible, she ran the bow of the canoe
+gently upon the shore under the shade of a big maple tree.  Here she
+rested and viewed with interest the antics of two red squirrels as they
+frisked about and scolded most furiously at the intrusion of the
+stranger in their domain.  So funny did they appear that Jean was
+compelled to laugh outright.  She always enjoyed watching the tiny
+creatures of the wild, especially the squirrels.  She could get closer
+to these saucy and daring rascals of the nimble feet than their shyer
+comrades of the forest.
+
+Presently in the midst of their antics the squirrels suddenly started,
+ceased their scolding, and scurried rapidly away.  That something had
+frightened them Jean was certain, and she grew nervous.  She was about
+to back the canoe from the shore and leave the place, when the tall
+form of a man unexpectedly emerged from the forest and stood before
+her.  So great was her own fright that for a few seconds she was
+completely unnerved, although she uttered no sound.  Her face became
+very white, and her heart beat wildly.  Then recognising the intruder
+as Dane Norwood, she gave a slight hysterical laugh, and her tense body
+relaxed.
+
+"Oh, my, how you frightened me!" she gasped.  "I didn't know you at
+first."
+
+"Forgive me," the young man apologised, as he stepped to the side of
+the canoe.  "I came upon you sooner than I expected."
+
+"Did you know I was here?" Jean asked.
+
+"Yes.  I happened to see you as I crossed the brook farther up."
+
+"Where were you going?"
+
+"To see you, of course.  It has taken me three months to get here, and
+when I do arrive I frighten you almost out of your senses."
+
+Jean smiled as she picked up the paddle.  She had to be doing
+something, for she felt the hot glow stealing into her cheeks beneath
+Dane's ardent gaze.  She was greatly struck by the remarkable change in
+his appearance.  The travel-stained buckskin suit he had worn when
+first she met him had been replaced by a new one, neat and clean.  It
+fitted him perfectly, making him appear taller and nobler than ever.
+
+"Have you been really travelling three months to get here?" Jean asked.
+"You do not look like it."  She glanced at his clothes, and this Dane
+noted.
+
+"I have not been travelling all that time to get here," he explained.
+"I did not mean that.  But Davidson has kept me so busy the last three
+months that I could not get away, although I tried several times."
+
+"And you were not here before?" Jean asked in surprise.  "Why, I
+thought it was you who gave us those presents, and stuck that arrow
+into the tree."
+
+"Oh, Pete did that.  He was keeping an eye over you."
+
+"Who is Pete?"
+
+"My Indian; the one who generally travels with me.  You surely must
+have met him."
+
+"No, I never did."
+
+"But this is his canoe!  How did you get it, then?  It must be a sign
+of special favour, for I never knew him to let any one have his
+favourite canoe before."
+
+"A big Indian left it with me the night of the great storm when he
+brought his little child to our place.  It is there now."
+
+"That must have been Pete!" Dane exclaimed in astonishment.  "I have
+not seen him for several weeks, and did not know what had happened to
+him.  It is very seldom that he leaves me for such a length of time.  I
+am puzzled, though, about the child."
+
+"He said that its mother is dead, and he wanted us to look after it for
+one moon, and maybe two.  I hope he will leave it with us a long time,
+for we are very fond of it."
+
+"Ah, now I understand," and Dane's eyes wandered thoughtfully out upon
+the river.  "Poor Pete, he must be making up for lost time.  It is just
+like him.  He is a great Indian."
+
+Noticing the expression of interest and curiosity in the girl's eyes,
+Dane smiled.
+
+"Yes," he continued, "Pete always makes up for lost time.  Five years
+ago his first wife died, and he was away for over two months.  It was
+during the war when efforts were being made to keep the Indians true to
+King George.  It was a hard struggle, and James White, the deputy agent
+of Indian affairs, was often at his wits' end.  But at last a treaty
+was signed at Fort Howe, when the Indians and the English all became
+'one brother,' as the natives say.  I found out afterwards that Pete
+had a great deal to do with the signing of that treaty.  He travelled
+from camp to camp, meeting the Indians, and urging them to be loyal to
+King George.  He made up for lost time then, and I believe he is doing
+so now.  No doubt we shall hear from him soon."
+
+"Do you think the Indians are becoming troublesome again?" Jean
+somewhat anxiously asked.
+
+"Not altogether this time.  Our danger now is from the slashers, as
+they will do their best to stir up the Indians.  But Pete will be on
+the lookout.  He nipped a little game of theirs in the bud over a year
+ago."
+
+"How?"  Jean was becoming keenly interested.
+
+"Oh, he brought us news of a raid the slashers were about to make upon
+the King's mast-cutters, so we were able to check them.  Twenty of us
+marched all day and night through the woods and fell upon the rebels
+before they were awake.  There was a lively tussle, but we cleaned them
+out, although they were double our number.  Pete had been absent for
+two weeks before that, but his timely news put him back again in
+Davidson's good books."
+
+"I hope there will be no more trouble," and Jean gave a deep sigh.
+"Everything has been so quiet this summer that I can hardly imagine
+that there are mischief-makers around.  Perhaps those guns which Major
+Studholme sent up river have been a warning to the slashers.  But my,
+how late it is getting!  Daddy will be anxious about me.  You will come
+and have tea with us, will you not?"
+
+The young courier needed no second bidding, so in a few minutes the
+canoe was speeding riverward, with Dane paddling and Jean facing him.
+Peace surrounded them as they moved onward, but a deeper peace than
+that which brooded over river and land dwelt in their happy young
+hearts.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+LOVE'S-CHARM
+
+Through the great network of branches of maples, birches, and other
+trees the light of a new day sifted down upon a little lake about a
+mile back from the settlement.  Dane Norwood woke from a sound sleep
+and looked out over the water.  He was in no hurry to rise, as he felt
+very comfortable lying there on his bed of fir boughs wrapped in his
+warm blanket.  About half way up the lake several wild ducks were
+feeding among the weeds and rushes, unconscious of any danger.  To
+these Dane paid little attention.  He was waiting for larger game, and
+his eyes and ears were keenly alert to the one sound and sight which
+would electrify him into immediate action.
+
+His mind naturally turned to the previous evening when he had sat with
+the Colonel and his daughter before the big fire-place.  The vision of
+the girl's face, lighted by the dancing flames, stood out before him
+clear and distinct.  How her eyes had shone as, urged by the Colonel,
+he related story after story of adventures in the heart of the untamed
+forest among Indians, slashers, and wild beasts.  The time had passed
+all too quickly, and when he at length rose to leave, the Colonel
+offered him the use of his tent near the cabin.  But Dane had
+reluctantly declined.  He had his own camping-outfit on the shore of
+the lake, where he had left gun, blanket, and a small supply of food
+that afternoon.  He did not mind the walk through the forest, dark
+though it was.  He was more at home in the woodland ways than on city
+streets.  His was the instinct of the wild, and he travelled more by
+intuition than by sight.
+
+There was another reason why he wished to camp by the lake.  He
+correctly surmised that the food supply at the settlement was getting
+low.  The men were not hunters, and although supplied with guns, they
+had made little use of them in obtaining game from the surrounding
+hills, considering them chiefly as weapons of defence in case of
+attack.  With Dane, however, it was different.  To him the forests and
+streams were Nature's great larder, filled with all manner of good
+things.
+
+As he lay there thinking of the girl at the settlement, the morning
+light strengthened, and the trees along the eastern shore threw out
+long uneven shadows upon the water.  Not a ripple ruffled the
+mirror-like surface, except those caused by the feeding ducks.  Dane's
+special attention was directed to a spot on the western shore which he
+had carefully examined the day before.  From the newly-made foot-prints
+he knew that this was a favourite resort of moose, deer, and caribou
+where they came to drink and to wallow in the mud.  And in this he was
+not mistaken, for as he patiently waited, the great antlered-head of a
+bull moose suddenly emerged from the forest.  The lordly animal paused
+for a few seconds and looked around.  Dane was fully alert now.  With
+his gun resting across a fallen log, he trained his eye along the
+smooth dark barrel.  Then as the moose stepped forward and its right
+side was presented to view, he pulled the trigger.  The loud report
+resounded through the silent forest reaches, and sent the ducks
+scurrying wildly out of the water.  With a snort of pain and surprise
+the moose threw back its great head, lifted its fore feet from the
+ground, reeled for an instant, and crashed over on its side, a huge
+bulk of quivering, lifeless flesh.
+
+Half an hour later Dane was speeding toward the settlement, carrying a
+choice piece of meat suspended from a stout stick across his right
+shoulder.  He surprised Mammy in the act of preparing the fire for
+breakfast as he approached with noiseless steps, and held the meat
+before her.
+
+"Oh, Lo'd, how yo' did scare me!" she exclaimed, straightening herself
+up, and looking at the young man.  "I'se as weak as a chicken, an' my
+bref's almos' gone.  I was sure yo' was an Injun or a tager jumpin' at
+me."
+
+Dane smiled as he laid the meat upon a log, and drew forth his sharp
+sheath knife.
+
+"I am sorry I frightened you," he apologised.  "But a piece of this
+will give you new strength.  You get the frying-pan ready while I carve
+a few slices.  I am going to help you get breakfast this morning.  We
+will give the Colonel and Miss Sterling a great surprise."
+
+And surprised father and daughter certainly were when at length they
+came out of the house and saw the nicely-browned slices of steak lying
+in the frying-pan.
+
+"So this is what you have been up to, young man," the Colonel smilingly
+remarked.  "I understand now why you refused to remain here last night.
+Is this moose or deer steak?"
+
+"Moose, and there is plenty more where this came from.  I am astounded
+that you have not been feasting upon game before this, as the forest is
+full of birds and animals."
+
+"I am afraid that we are poor hunters," the Colonel replied.  "I, at
+any rate, know very little about woodland ways."
+
+"Then I shall teach you," Dane declared.  "But first of all, I want you
+to try this steak.  Then we must get the men to go with me to bring in
+that moose.  It will not do to leave it long out there.  If we do, the
+bears and other animals will soon finish it."
+
+Jean said very little during breakfast, leaving her father and Dane to
+do most of the talking.  But her heart was happy and light.  To her
+this visitor was more than an ordinary man.  She was of an
+impressionable nature, and naturally surrounded Dane Norwood with the
+glamour of romance.  His buoyant, free-from-care manner, and the roving
+life he led thrilled and enthralled her very soul.  To her he was the
+living embodiment of valiant knights and princes who figured in tales
+she had heard and read, especially those of the Arthurian Legends.
+Malory's "Morte d'Arthur," notwithstanding its quaint language and
+quainter pictures, had so enkindled her mind that she herself at times
+had seemed the heroine in many a stirring scene.  It was largely due to
+these impressions that she relished the life in the wilderness, and
+looked upon the King's courier as a hero of more than ordinary mettle.
+
+Breakfast over, the Colonel summoned the men of the settlement, and,
+guided by Dane, they went at once to the lake after the moose.  Jean
+obtained her father's permission to accompany them, and she thoroughly
+enjoyed the trip.  The men were like a crowd of boys just out of
+school, and the forest resounded with laughter and animated talk.  The
+prospect of an abundance of game during the fall and winter elevated
+their spirits, and made them forget the days and weeks when food had
+been scarce.  To them Dane was a Godsend, and they took him to their
+hearts and made him as one of themselves.  That he and the Colonel's
+daughter were in love with each other they were not slow in learning.
+But there was no rude chaffing as the two walked a little apart from
+the rest.  They were men noble enough to respect the sacredness of a
+first great love.
+
+There was much rejoicing among the women and children when the men
+returned to the settlement with the moose.  It had been skinned and
+carefully divided.  Some carried their portions, while others bore
+theirs suspended on poles from shoulder to shoulder.  Thus for the
+first time since leaving their old homes did the exiles have a
+sufficient supply of meat.
+
+A new life now pervaded the settlement.  During the following days and
+weeks the men roamed the forest-clad hills and valleys in search of
+game.  Directed by Dane, they soon became quite skilful hunters,
+especially the Colonel, who was never happier than when out in the
+woods.  Then around the big camp-fire at night, the men would relate
+their thrilling and humorous experiences during the day.
+
+This was a pleasant time for Dane.  He had shifted his camping-place
+from the lake to the shore of the creek, and here he had built for
+himself a small abode, covering the roof and sides with wide strips of
+birch bark to keep out the rain.  He was very skilful at such work, and
+a happy afternoon it was for him when he first showed Jean his finished
+cabin.  They had come by water, and the bow of the canoe was resting
+upon the shore.  It was here that they had met three weeks before, and
+under the big maple Dane had erected his little building.  The tree had
+put on its scarlet bunting, and touched by the bright September sun,
+glowed its welcome to the young lovers.
+
+Jean examined the cabin most carefully, and her admiration was
+unbounded.
+
+"I think it is splendid!" she enthusiastically exclaimed.  "You never
+told me anything about it."
+
+"I wanted to surprise you," Dane explained.  "I have been so busy with
+other things that I have had little time to work here, so only finished
+it a few days ago."
+
+"And will you live here all the time?" Jean eagerly asked.
+
+The young man smiled as he looked fondly upon the girl's animated face
+and sparkling eyes.  Then he shook his head.
+
+"I wish I could live here, Jean.  But I have a dozen such cabins in
+various places, and I must spend some time in them during the coming
+winter.  They are my stopping-places, you see, when I am carrying
+messages for Davidson.  No doubt he is very angry now at my long
+absence, so I shall have to go away in a day or two."
+
+"But you will come back soon, will you not?"
+
+"Do you really want me to come back soon?" Dane asked.
+
+"W-why certainly," the girl stammered, while her face suddenly flushed.
+"I hope you will use this cabin often."
+
+"I will make it larger and stay here all the time, if you want me to."
+
+"Oh, will you?  How nice that would be."
+
+"But only if you will stay with me."
+
+"Oh!"  It was all that Jean could say, for his meaning was now quite
+clear.  Her eyes dropped, and her body slightly trembled.
+
+Impulsively Dane reached out and took both of her hands in his.
+
+"You know what I mean, Jean," he said.  "Surely you know how I love
+you."
+
+Receiving no reply, he drew her quickly to him, and kissed her upon the
+lips.  Startled and embarrassed, she made a faint effort to free
+herself, but strong arms held her firm.
+
+"Don't!  Don't!" she gasped, while the rich blood crimsoned her face.
+"You have no right to do this."
+
+"I have the right of love," Dane contended, as he again kissed her.  "I
+love you, and I know that you love me."
+
+Jean made no further protest.  Notwithstanding her confusion, she was
+supremely happy.  Although often wooed, she had never before submitted
+to a lover's kiss, nor allowed his arms to encircle her.  But now it
+was different.  She loved this man as she once thought it impossible to
+love any one, and she knew that he loved her.  His strength and
+masterfulness appealed to her, and made her a willing victim.  She
+could not deny it, neither did she wish to do so.  She was content to
+give herself up wholly and unreservedly to her conquering hero.
+
+And as the two stood silently there, the lordly maple seemed to reach
+out its great branches over their young united heads and beam its happy
+benediction.  The ubiquitous squirrels appeared to know that something
+unusual was taking place.  They cocked their shrewd little heads in a
+listening attitude, stared impudently, and then sent the news abroad to
+their feathered and furry comrades of the forest.  Of all this,
+however, the lovers were unconscious, so lost were they in their
+new-found joy.
+
+"I never realised that you cared so much for me," Jean at length
+whispered.  "When did you begin to love me?"
+
+"From the first time I saw you by that shack at Portland Point," Dane
+replied.  "I was so absent-minded when I went back to the lake that
+Pete did not know what to make of me.  I returned later and saw you at
+one of the camps telling stories to several children.  You know what
+happened after that."
+
+"Indeed I do," the girl declared.  "I can never forget that night, nor
+how you saved me from Seth Lupin."
+
+"Have you heard from the villain since?"
+
+"Not since coming here.  But so long as he is in this country I cannot
+feel safe.  I sometimes imagine he is prowling around here and will
+appear at any minute."
+
+"Umph, it won't be well for him if he does when I am here," and Dane's
+hands clenched hard.  "He won't get off as easily as he did that last
+time.  I thought he might follow you when you first arrived at this
+place, so ordered Pete to be on the lookout.  I hoped that you would
+understand the meaning of that arrow in the big pine."
+
+"I was certain that you had much to do with that," Jean replied.  "For
+a while I thought that you were near, and wondered why you did not come
+to see me.  But now I know that you were thinking of my welfare, and
+longing to come."
+
+"I was always thinking about you, Jean, and I have something here to
+show how much you were in my mind."
+
+Thrusting his right hand into the breast-pocket of his jacket, he
+brought forth a little piece of wood.  Removing a plug from one end, he
+drew out a silver arrow-pin.
+
+"This is a proof how much I was thinking of you.  You little know how
+eagerly I looked forward to the time when I would have the right to
+present it to you."
+
+"And did you really make this?" Jean asked, taking the arrow in her
+hand and examining it most carefully.  "I think it is wonderful."
+
+"Yes, I made it myself," Dane replied, delighted at the girl's interest
+and pleasure.  "I worked it out of a silver coin my mother gave me
+years ago, and which I valued most highly.  For no one else would I
+have done such a thing."
+
+Dane's voice was a little husky as he spoke, and this Jean noticed.
+
+"Your mother is dead, then?" she queried.  She had often longed to ask
+him about her, but owing to his reticence about his past life, she had
+not done so.  She had thought it strange, nevertheless, that he had
+never mentioned his parents.
+
+"My mother died five years ago," Dane explained.  "Whatever I am I owe
+to her.  She was a noble woman."
+
+"Is your father dead, too?  Have you no home?"
+
+"I have had no real home since my mother died," was the evasive reply.
+"My home is wherever night overtakes me.  I cannot tell you any more
+now, so please do not ask me.  I know you will trust me."
+
+He paused abruptly, impulsively took the arrow from the girl's hand,
+and placed it in her dress at her throat.  He then stepped back to view
+the effect.
+
+"It becomes you well, Jean, and you must always wear it there.  It is
+Love's-Charm, and it may mean more to you than you now imagine."
+
+"I shall always wear it," was the low response, "not only as
+Love's-Charm but as a remembrance of this happy day."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+WHILE THE WATER FLOWS
+
+The Colonel was not altogether surprised when that evening Jean told
+him the important news.  He had not been blind and deaf to all that had
+been taking place around him since Dane's arrival.  He was fond of the
+courier, and believed him to be a noble young man, worthy of his
+daughter's love.  He wanted Jean to be happy, for in her happiness his
+own was vitally involved.  Yet it was only natural that the news of the
+betrothal should bring a pang to his heart.  Jean was his all, his
+comfort, his joy.  But now she shared her love with another, a young
+man, of whose past history he knew very little, and nothing of the
+family from which he had sprung.
+
+He showed no trace of this feeling, however, as he sat before the fire.
+Jean was standing by his side, the bright, flickering flames
+illuminating her happy face.  Suddenly she realised something of what
+this revelation meant to him who was so dear to her.  She had never
+thought of it before, and it swept upon her now with a startling
+intensity.  What would her father do without her?  She was all that he
+had, and should she leave him, what would become of him?  She recalled
+his words uttered at the falls.  "If anything happens to you," he had
+said, "I do not believe I could endure life any longer."  She had
+smiled at him then, but she did not do so now.  Stooping, she
+impulsively threw her arms around her father's neck, and kissed him.
+
+"You are not going to lose me, daddy," she said.  "You will always have
+me with you.  And you will have another to help you," she added in a
+lower voice.
+
+"I know it, dear, I know it," was the somewhat faltering reply.  "I
+want you to be happy, Jean, and I believe the young man is worthy of
+your love."
+
+"'Deed he is," Old Mammy declared, as just then she waddled toward the
+fire.  Early that evening Jean had whispered the news into her ear, and
+had received the old nurse's blessing, accompanied by a great motherly
+hug.  "Mistah Dane is a puffect gen'l'man," she continued.  "He's not
+one bit stuck up, an' he's got manners, too.  Why, he touches his cap
+to dis ol' woman, an' if dat ain't a sign of a gen'leman, den I'd like
+to know what is.  I ain't afraid to trust Missie Jean wif a man like
+dat."
+
+"But suppose he should take Jean away?" the Colonel queried.
+
+"Doan yo' worry 'bout dat, Cun'l.  Missie Jean'll nebber leave us.  But
+if she should, dis ol' woman'll go wif her."
+
+"You are right, Mammy," Jean replied.  "I shall not leave you and
+daddy.  We must always remain together."
+
+For some time father and daughter sat before the fire and talked after
+Old Mammy had gone to bed.  To Jean the future looked bright and rosy.
+The Colonel, on the other hand, viewed it with considerable
+apprehension.  In a land as yet a great wilderness, he could not help
+seeing mountains of difficulties rising sternly before them.  He knew
+how many hardships must beset their path for years to come.  At present
+they were living in a most precarious manner, exiles, with the
+pioneering work all ahead.  But with Jean it was different.  To her the
+trail of life looked very pleasant, gleaming golden beneath the mystic
+halo of romance.
+
+The Colonel spent the next day with Dane in the hills.  He wished to be
+alone with the courier who had won his daughter's heart.  There were
+many things he desired to say to him, and he hoped to learn a little,
+at least, about his past life.  He had something on his mind this day
+of far greater importance to him than moose, deer, or caribou.
+
+The morning passed most pleasantly, and the Colonel was more satisfied
+than ever with his companion.  Dane was well versed in forest lore, and
+the ways of the feathered and furry creatures of the trails were to him
+an open book.  Gradually and tactfully the Colonel led him to talk
+about his life, but on this subject he became more reserved.  He spoke
+enthusiastically about his mother, and how much he owed to her.  His
+father, however, he never mentioned.  The Colonel was far from
+satisfied, as he had learned really nothing about Dane's history, nor
+how his parents happened to be in this country.
+
+They stopped to eat their dinner by a sparkling spring which bubbled
+from a wooded hillside.  They were hungry, and thoroughly enjoyed the
+good things Mammy had provided.
+
+"I suppose this is a common occurrence to you," the Colonel remarked
+when he had finished his meal.
+
+"It has been my life for years," was the quiet reply.  "I hardly know
+how to eat at a table."
+
+"Have you no home?" the Colonel asked.  "Is your father not living?"
+
+"Yes, I believe he is living, but I have not seen him for years."
+
+"And why not?"
+
+To this question Dane made no reply.  He sat very still, looking down
+through the trees into the valley below.  The Colonel at first became
+impatient, then angry.
+
+"Look here, young man," he began, "if you are to have my daughter, I
+must know something more about who you are, and where you have come
+from.  Why do you not wish to tell me about your father?"
+
+Had any one else spoken in such a peremptory manner he would soon have
+learned his mistake.  As it was, Dane found it difficult to control
+himself.
+
+"I cannot tell you now," he quietly replied.  "I must explain nothing,
+so please do not press me further."
+
+The Colonel was now thoroughly aroused.  His fighting blood was
+stirred, and he turned angrily upon his companion.
+
+"Are you ashamed of your father?" he roared.  "Who is he? and what has
+he done that you won't tell me about him?  Surely------"  He paused
+abruptly, while a look of consternation leaped into his eyes.  He
+reached out and clutched Dane by the arm.  "Tell me," he demanded, in a
+voice that was but a hoarse whisper, "is your father an Indian?  Speak,
+quick.  I must know the truth."
+
+With a gesture of impatience, Dane threw aside the clutching hand, and
+sprang to his feet, his eyes ablaze with anger.
+
+"No, my father is not an Indian," he cried.
+
+He was on the point of saying more, but restraining himself, he picked
+up his gun and slipped swiftly away among the trees.  Down into the
+valley he moved, hardly caring where he went.  For the second time in
+his life he was afraid of himself; for the second time he fled from an
+angry grey-haired man, not through fear of what might happen to
+himself, but what he might do.  His soul was stirred within him, and
+the blood surged madly through his veins.  But now, as on that other
+occasion, he was saved by a mighty influence from being one with the
+beasts of the forest, and that influence was the prevailing power of
+love.
+
+At length he stopped on the edge of a wild meadow, and threw himself
+down upon a bed of moss under a fir tree.  He remembered how he had
+done the same five years before when he had fled from the face of the
+man from whose loins he had sprung.  It was love then which had
+restrained him and held his hand, the love he bore to a woman whose
+memory was enshrined in his heart, and that woman was his mother.  So
+now his love for the fairest maiden at Loyal kept him from laying
+violent hands upon her father, the man who had insulted him.
+
+And as he lay there his calmness gradually returned, until he once
+again felt master of himself.  He could not remain longer at the
+settlement with the Colonel's anger hot against him.  Something would
+be sure to happen which might separate him forever from the girl of his
+heart's choice.  He must go away and lose himself for a time in the
+heart of the forest.  But before going, he must see Jean once more, see
+her unknown to her father, and ask her to wait and be patient.  The
+thought of going to the Colonel for a reconciliation never once entered
+his mind; such a thing was most foreign to his independent nature.
+
+Time passed unheeded as he remained there lost in thought.  At length
+he was startled by the report of a gun, followed almost immediately by
+a ringing cry of fear.  Leaping to his feet, he dashed into the open,
+and looked intently up across the wild meadow.  Nothing unusual was to
+be seen, but a great crashing could be plainly heard among the bushes.
+To Dane that sound was similar to a discordant note to a trained
+musician's sensitive ear.  He had often heard it before, and knew its
+meaning.  It always meant danger, and never more so than now.
+
+Bounding forward in the direction of the sound, in a few seconds his
+eyes fell upon the cause of the disturbance.  A great bull moose was
+charging, and the object of his rage was the Colonel, frantically
+striving to free himself from a tangle of fallen tree-tops into which
+he had plunged.  That the man had fled a short distance after wounding
+the moose was quite evident.  But to escape now by flight from that
+infuriated animal was utterly impossible.  This the Colonel realised,
+so his only hope lay in seeking refuge amidst the tops of the fallen
+trees.  This position, however, was most precarious, for the branches
+were half rotten and brittle, absolutely unable to withstand the
+terrific goring impact of those wide-spread antlers, impelled by
+insensate rage and over one thousand pounds of flesh, bone, and sinewy
+muscles.
+
+In an instant Dane comprehended the seriousness of the situation.  He
+knew that there was no time to lose, so bringing his musket to his
+shoulder, he took a quick, careful aim and fired.  The great antlered
+demon was but a few feet from the tree-tops when the bullet tore into
+its side just back of the shoulder.  It charged and crashed into the
+branches, but where it charged it fell, and after a brief convulsive
+struggle remained still.  The fighting days of the monarch of the
+trails were ended.
+
+Hastening at once to the spot, Dane found the Colonel pinned down
+amidst a tangle of branches and antlers, and unable to help himself.
+With considerable difficulty the courier at last assisted him to his
+feet.  Apart from several bruises upon the body, the only injury was in
+the left arm, on which one of the prongs had struck a glancing blow.
+An instant later this same arm had been caught under the huge body and
+held as in a vise.  The Colonel was weak, and trembled as he
+endeavoured to stand upright.  Blood oozed from several scratches on
+his forehead and trickled down into his white beard.  But he maintained
+a brave spirit, and smiled as Dane questioned him about his injuries.
+
+"I shall be all right shortly," he said.  "There are no bones broken,
+for which I am most thankful.  I am somewhat weak, that is all."
+
+"Suppose we go down to the brook and let me bathe your face," Dane
+suggested.  "It is not far, and you can lean on me."
+
+Supported by the courier, the Colonel slowly made his way along the
+border of the meadow to the little brook which flowed sluggishly
+through a mass of wild grass and alders.  Here Dane brought forth a
+piece of soft cloth from one of his pockets, with which he washed away
+the blood stains from the Colonel's forehead and beard.  Then from a
+small wooden tube he produced some salve-like ointment which he applied
+to the wounds, thus giving immediate relief.
+
+"I see you are well prepared for emergencies," the Colonel remarked,
+both interested and pleased at the young man's skill and attention.
+
+"Experience has taught me to be always ready," Dane replied.  "One
+never knows what is going to happen in the woods, so a few bandages are
+very handy.  That ointment, too, is useful.  It is a simple Indian
+remedy, but very effective."
+
+The Colonel made no further comment, but lay upon the ground lost in
+thought.  There was a far-away look in his eyes, which caused Dane to
+wonder what he was thinking about.  At length he aroused and turned
+toward his companion.
+
+"Young man," he began, "I am greatly indebted  to you for saving my
+life to-day.  But for your prompt action that moose would have crushed
+me to death in a short time.  I now ask your forgiveness for my
+impatience and anger toward you to-day."
+
+He held out his hand, but to his surprise Dane stepped quickly to the
+other side of the narrow brook.
+
+"What is the meaning of this?" the Colonel asked.  "Shall we not be
+friends?"
+
+In reply Dane smiled and stretched out his hand, which the Colonel
+immediately grasped.
+
+"This is the Indian custom," Dane explained.  "While the grass grows,
+the sun shines, and the water flows, we will be friends."
+
+"Amen," broke fervently from the Colonel's lips.
+
+And there across that little stream youth and age clasped hands, and a
+bond of friendship was formed which not even death itself could break.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE SUMMONS
+
+There was a flutter of excitement at the settlement when the betrothal
+of the Colonel's daughter and the King's courier became known.  The
+young people, especially, were quite excited, and discussed it in the
+most animated manner.  But it did not end in talk, for they decided to
+celebrate the event that very evening.  In every home preparations were
+soon under way, and the women vied with one another in the culinary
+art.  Jean was to know nothing about what was taking place, hence a
+careful watch was kept upon her movements.  Old Mammy was let into the
+secret, and her face beamed with pleasure as the news was whispered
+into her ear.
+
+"And you must not tell, Mammy," was the warning.  "We want you to know
+so that you can help us to keep the secret from Jean until the right
+minute."
+
+"Why, bress yo' life," the faithful servant replied, "dis ol' colored
+woman won't say nuffin'.  She nebber knows nuffin', anyway, 'cept to
+hol' her tongue at de right time, which is more'n mos' folks kin do.
+An' doan yo' worry 'bout Missie Jean takin' any hint of what's goin'
+on.  She's in lub, an' when a pusson's in lub, she's so near to heaben
+dat she doan pay much heed to what's goin' on 'round her.  An' dat's de
+way wif Missie Jean."
+
+Of all this excitement and innocent deception Jean was totally unaware.
+Part of the morning she played with the little Indian child along the
+shore, and rambling in the woods a short distance from the house.  Much
+of the afternoon she spent in the canoe upon the water.  She visited
+again the place up the creek under the big maple, and recalled the
+happy day when she and Dane had been last there, and the words of love
+which had been breathed into her ears.  Taking the arrow-pin in her
+hand, she looked at it for some time.  The words "Love's-Charm," kept
+running through her mind, and she wondered in what way that little
+trinket would be a Love-Charm to her.  Suddenly and impulsively she
+raised it to her lips.  Then she gave a quick, startled glance around,
+fearful lest she had been observed.  She smiled at what she considered
+her foolishness, replaced the pin, and pushed the canoe from the shore.
+
+When she reached home she was surprised that her father and Dane had
+not returned.  The days were much shorter now, so the shades of night
+were stealing over the land as she entered the house.  She had noticed
+a great heap of drift-wood piled upon the shore, but thought little
+about it, as it was a common occurrence on these cool nights for the
+young people to have a bonfire.  She found Mammy preparing supper, with
+the child playing upon the floor nearby.  The fire-place was aglow, and
+the flames, licking about several sticks of white maple, illuminated
+the room.  It was a cheery, homelike scene, but Jean's first thoughts
+were for the hunters.  She expressed her anxiety to Mammy, and asked
+what could be keeping them so late.
+
+"Doan yo' worry 'bout dem, chile," the old woman replied.  "Dey's well
+able to take care of demselves.  Yo' might hab reason to be anxious if
+yo' daddy was alone.  But he's got Mistah Dane wif him, an' dat young
+man knows de woods better'n I used to know my cookin'-stove in Ol'
+Connec.  No, yo' needn't worry one bit.  Dey'll turn up all right,
+'specially when dey's good an' hungry; dat's jes like men."
+
+But Jean did worry, especially when another hour passed and the men had
+not returned.  Supper had been ready for some time, and even Mammy was
+beginning to show her impatience.  She fussed with the baby, glanced
+often toward the fire, where the dishes were being kept hot, and at
+last lighted the dip-candles which she had placed upon the table.
+
+"De Cun'l likes to hab de room bright," she remarked, "'specially when
+he comes home.  He kin see yo' pretty face all de better, Missie Jean.
+An' Mistah Dane'll need a good light when he comes in, an' he'll be
+'sprised when he sees how yo' look.  I nebber saw yo' look better'n yo'
+do jes now, wif yo' hair fixed up so nice, de lobely col'r in yo'
+cheeks, an' wearin' dat beau'ful dress yo' brung from Ol' Connec."
+
+Jean turned and smiled upon the woman.  She had been standing at the
+open door for some time, watching and listening for the hunters.
+
+"You must not flatter me, Mammy, or you will make me vain," she
+replied.  "Oh, I wish they would come!  I am getting so anxious."
+
+Scarcely had she finished speaking when the absent ones appeared
+suddenly before her.  Seeing her father leaning heavily on Dane's arm,
+she gave a slight cry of fear, and darted to his side.
+
+"Daddy, daddy, what is the matter?" she asked.  "Are you hurt?"
+
+"Let me get into the house, dear, and I shall tell you," the Colonel
+replied.  "I feel very tired."
+
+Seated before the fire, and later at the table, the story of the fight
+with the moose was told.  The Colonel described the scene most vividly,
+and gave the courier great credit.  He said nothing, however, about the
+quarrel, neither did Dane refer to it.  That had passed with the
+running water over which they had clasped hands of enduring friendship.
+It was well, they were both aware, that none should know of it but
+themselves.
+
+Jean was greatly interested in this adventure, and she watched her
+father with beaming eyes, forgetting at times her supper.  Dane thought
+that he had never seen her look so beautiful.  He admired the dress she
+was wearing, and he was pleased to see the Love-Charm at her throat.
+He observed the flickering light dancing upon her soft, wavy hair, and
+the varying expressions playing upon her face as she listened to her
+father.  His heart was full of joy, and he realised more than ever
+before how pleasant it was to return from the hills to the light and
+warmth of a home where love dwelt.
+
+They had finished their supper, and the Colonel was resting upon a
+settle near the fire, when a knock sounded upon the door, and a number
+of young people at once entered.  They were in the gayest of moods, and
+surrounding Jean and Dane, they led them out of the house.  Down to the
+shore they hurried, where the big bonfire was blazing merrily, and
+great forked flames were leaping high into the air.
+
+"What is the meaning of this, Mammy?" the Colonel asked, as soon as the
+young people had left.  "What is going on to-night?"
+
+"It's a dance 'bout de fire, Cun'l," the old woman explained.  "De
+young folks hab been plannin' all dis bressed day to s'prize Missie
+Jean an' Mistah Dane t'night.  Dey's been cookin' an' cookin', an'
+whisperin' mysterious like, an' laffin' an' laffin' to split dere
+sides."
+
+"What about?"
+
+"Why, doan yo' know, Cun'l?" and Mammy looked her surprise.  "Jes as
+soon as de young folks heard de news 'bout Missie Jean an' Mistah Dane
+dey made plans to cel'brate, so dat's what dey's doin' now.  An'
+listen, Cun'l, to de music.  Simon's settin' on a log, playin' fo' all
+he's worf, an' de young folks is a dancin'.  Yo' bett'r come an' see
+fo' yo' set."
+
+"I can see from where I am, Mammy, if you will move aside," was the
+reply.  "I can't see very well through you."
+
+With the woman's bulky body out of the way, the Colonel was enabled to
+view all that was taking place near the shore.  The fire lighted up the
+ground for a considerable distance, so he could see the young people
+moving to and fro, and hear their chatter and happy laughter.  And in
+their midst were Jean and Dane, the happiest of all.  Occasionally a
+young man would throw some wood, or a great root upon the fire.  As the
+flames leaped up anew, and masses of sparks were hurled in all
+directions, shouts of merriment ascended, followed by shrieks of
+laughter as the maidens fled from the falling, fiery shower.  The
+Colonel smiled as he watched the merrymakers.  He liked to see them
+happy.  Their sojourn in the wilderness had not dampened their spirits,
+and he knew that such people were the right pioneers for a new land.
+
+Jean and Dane thoroughly enjoyed themselves.  They were pleased at the
+interest taken on their behalf, and entered heartily into the spirit of
+the gathering.  As the evening wore on, and the dancing subsided, they
+gathered in little groups around the fire, far enough away to escape
+the intense heat.  And here upon the ground they sat while the good
+things which had been cooked that day were passed around.  Then it was
+that the older members of the settlement came to partake of the repast.
+Several jugs containing West India spirits were produced, and all drank
+to the health of the young couple they delighted to honour.  The use of
+this beverage was almost universal, being dispensed as an ordinary act
+of hospitality, and no festive occasion was considered complete without
+the flowing cup.  Snuff-boxes were then brought forth, and their
+contents liberally sampled, while those who smoked filled their piles
+and lighted them with small burning embers.  Snuff, like Jamaica
+spirits and New England rum, was in more general use than tobacco.
+Various were the shapes and designs of the snuff-boxes, some being of
+considerable value.  They were carried in the pockets, and two men
+meeting would exchange whiffs as a matter of course.  True hospitality
+was deemed lacking where the friendly box was not passed around.  It
+was the custom, and custom makes all things proper.
+
+While this genial spirit of contentment and good will prevailed around
+the fire, a tall Indian stood within the shadow of the forest, and
+watched the scene with much interest and curiosity.  At length he
+stepped forth into the flame-lit circle, and walked deliberately over
+to where Dane was seated.  His presence was at once noted, and a sudden
+hush fell upon the gathering.
+
+"Hello, Pete!" Dane exclaimed in surprise.  "Where have you come from,
+and what do you want?"
+
+The native replied in the deep guttural Indian tongue, and what he said
+caused Dane to start, while an expression of anxiety overspread his
+face.  He asked a question in the same language, with which he was
+quite familiar, and when it had been answered, he turned to the
+intensely interested group around him.
+
+"I am sorry to have to leave you," he announced, "but I must go at
+once, as I am needed up river."
+
+"Is it anything serious?" Jean asked in a low voice.
+
+"I am afraid so," Dane replied.  "I told you that Pete would suddenly
+turn up with important news, and I was right.  The rebels are stirring
+up trouble."
+
+"But you must see daddy before you go," Jean said.  "He will be greatly
+disappointed if you don't."
+
+"Certainly I must see him.  Let us go at once, as there is no time to
+lose."
+
+Together they made their way to the house, leaving the people around
+the fire gazing curiously after them.  As they entered, they saw the
+Indian bending over the sleeping child, and watching it most intently.
+Mammy was standing by on the defensive, fearful lest she was about to
+lose her little charge.
+
+"Doan let him take her, Mistah Dane," she cried.  "I can't spare Babby.
+Drive him out ob de house."
+
+Pete at once straightened himself up to his full height, and smiled as
+he looked upon the agitated woman.
+
+"Injun no tak' babby," he said.  "Injun no cabin.  Babby no mamma."
+
+"Bress de Lo'd fo' His goodness!" Mammy fervently exclaimed, lifting on
+high her hands, "and let all de earf gib t'anks unto His holy name fo'
+ebber an' ebber."
+
+The Colonel was greatly interested over Dane's departure, and asked him
+several questions.
+
+"I can tell you very little now," the young man replied.  "That the
+rebels are up to some mischief is quite certain.  Pete has found out
+where they are to meet to-morrow night, so we must be on hand to learn
+their plans."
+
+"Is it far from here?"
+
+"Quite a distance.  We shall take the canoe, and make it in several
+hours."
+
+"Why not wait until daylight?"
+
+"That would not do, as we need darkness for such work.  The rebels must
+not know of our presence."
+
+"Will there be any danger?" Jean enquired.
+
+Dane smiled as he looked upon her sober face, and saw the anxious
+expression in her eyes.
+
+"Nothing to worry about," he replied.  "To some it might be a dangerous
+undertaking, but Pete and I have been at it so long that it has become
+almost second nature to us."
+
+Jean said nothing more just then, but while her father and Dane talked,
+she whispered something to Mammy.  At once the colored woman became
+very busy, and when at last Dane bade the Colonel good-bye, a basket
+filled with provisions was set before him.
+
+"It's fo' yo' an' de Injun," Mammy explained.  "I hope de Good Lo'd'll
+be wif yo', an' help yo' skedaddle dem rebels.  But yo' can't do
+nuffin' wifout grub, Mistah Dane.  No matt'r if yo' is in lub, yo' mus'
+eat to lib."
+
+Dane smiled as he took the basket, and thanked the big-hearted woman.
+
+"I shall not forget your kindness, Mammy," he told her.  "And neither
+will Pete.  He has a great memory for such things.  Why, all the
+Indians along the river know already what you have done for his little
+child, and they will also hear of this."
+
+The memory of that night never passed from Jean's mind.  She
+accompanied Dane to the shore, and stood there for a few minutes after
+the two couriers had left, She knew that Dane loved her with all the
+strength of his manly nature, and she never felt this more than when he
+had held her in his arms and kissed her ere stepping into the canoe.
+She did not want him to go, and how unfortunate it was that the summons
+should come to him in the midst of the merry-making, and when she was
+so happy.  A spirit of depression suddenly swept upon her, which was
+foreign to her nature.  She tried to banish it even after she returned
+to the house.  But neither the cheerfulness of the fire, nor the
+conversation with her father and Mammy could dispel the strange feeling
+of some impending calamity.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+PLOTTERS IN COUNCIL
+
+Leaving Jean standing upon the shore, Dane settled down to work and
+headed the canoe for the main channel.  His time of idleness was now
+over, and he knew that stern duty lay ahead.  Although it was hard for
+him to go away from the girl he loved, yet the spirit of a new
+adventure thrilled his soul.  It was a call, insistent, imperative, and
+never had he disobeyed the voice.  To him danger was a tonic, and the
+great wild with all its mystery and uncertainty was his playground.
+His nature demanded activity, and the lure of something beyond was as
+breath to his being.
+
+The bark canoe seemed like a thing of life as it cut through the water
+and the night, straight for the open.  It trembled as with excitement,
+impelled by the strong arms wielding the paddles.  It was well seasoned
+to such work.  It was Pete's favourite craft, and it knew all the
+streams for leagues around.  It had poked its nose into every creek,
+cove, and tributary of the St. John River from the Kennebacasis to the
+Shogomoc.  It knew the windings of the Washademoak, and the rolling
+billows of windy Grand Lake had tested its endurance.  It had battled
+with running ice; it had been borne over innumerable portages; and it
+had lain concealed in many secret places while enemies had sped by in
+the darkness but a few yards away.  It bore the scars of ice, rocks,
+and bullets, and its long, lean body had been patched and repatched.
+But notwithstanding all these years of hardships, it was as eager now
+as the hardy men who drove it forward to rush into new adventures.
+
+Steadily Dane and Pete urged the springing craft onward.  Seldom did
+they speak, and hardly a sound did they make as their paddles dipped
+rhythmically into the cold water.  The sky was overcast, and not a star
+was to be seen.  No lights gleamed along the shore.  They were
+completely enwrapped by night and silence, securely enfolded in
+Nature's great secret embrace.
+
+Reaching at length the upper end of an island which divides the river,
+they ran the canoe ashore, rested, and ate some of the food Jean and
+Old Mammy had so thoughtfully prepared.  They talked in low voices, and
+Pete explained the cause of his long absence, where he had been, and
+how for some time he had been trailing the rebels until he had at last
+discovered the place and night of meeting to arrange plans for united
+action.
+
+"How did you know where I was?" Dane asked.  "I didn't tell any one
+where I was going."
+
+"Me know, a'right.  Me know white woman.  Me know Dane."
+
+"You were sure that I couldn't keep away from her?"
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"But I never did such a thing before, Pete.  When did you ever know me
+to run after a woman?"
+
+"Dane find good white woman.  Dane mak' no mistake."
+
+"I have made no mistake," was the emphatic reply.  "I am glad you like
+her, Pete."
+
+"White woman good; tak' care babby, all sam' mamma.  Bimeby Pete----"
+
+He suddenly paused, and laid his right hand upon his companion's arm.
+But Dane's ears were as keen as his own, and he, too, had heard the
+sound of an approaching canoe.  It was coming down river, and in a few
+minutes it was abreast of them.  Nothing could the two concealed men
+see, but as the strange craft was sweeping by, a voice broke the
+silence.
+
+"Is everything ready?" was the question Dane heard asked.
+
+"Yes, Seth's looking after the plans," came a reply.
+
+Nothing more could Dane distinguish, although he strained his ears to
+hear something further.  To him that canoe speeding through the night,
+and the words he had overheard, had a sinister meaning.  That it was
+Seth Lupin to whom reference had been made, there could be no doubt.
+So the villain was still lurking around.  What were the plans he was
+looking after?  Had they anything to do with Jean?  He believed they
+had, and the thought caused him to give the canoe a savage thrust from
+the shore, which sent it reeling back into midstream, He must get
+through with this task, and then hurry as quickly as possible to the
+girl he loved.  But who were the ones in the canoe?  From their words
+he felt sure that they were white men.  In what way were they connected
+with Seth Lupin, and whither were they bound?
+
+He thought of all this as the canoe moved swiftly up the river, and he
+racked his brains in an effort to solve the problem of the plans Seth
+was looking after.  He questioned Pete closely, but the Indian had not
+seen the villain nor heard anything about him.
+
+In about an hour's time they came to a narrow channel which connected
+the river with a lake-like body of water several miles in extent, and
+known by the Indians as the "Wedneebak."  Here they ran the canoe
+ashore, drew it out of the water and carried it up the bank and a short
+distance into the forest.  Breaking off some fir boughs, they made for
+themselves beds upon the ground.  Then taking off their jackets, they
+placed them over their bodies, and, lulled by the wind among the
+tree-tops, they were soon fast asleep.
+
+Early dawn found them both awake, and watching with the keenest
+interest the narrow entrance to the Wedneebak.  They ate sparingly of
+the food from the basket, hoping to make it last throughout the day.
+The morning was cold, but they did not dare to light a fire lest it
+should betray their presence.  They took turns in watching the river
+and in moving about, so in this manner they were able to keep fairly
+warm.
+
+During the morning Dane made a trip to a hill some distance inland,
+where from the upper branches of a large tree he obtained an excellent
+view of the upper stretch of the Wedneebak.  He wished to learn if any
+of the rebels had already arrived for the council.  From this elevated
+position his eyes scanned the shore, and soon detected several wreaths
+of smoke curling up into the air.  How many men were there he could not
+tell, as the crowding trees hid them from view.  He wondered if the
+pow-wow had already begun, or were the men waiting for others to
+arrive?  He longed to go down to the shore, creep up close, and spy
+upon the rebels.  This, however, he knew would be foolish, as it would
+be impossible in broad daylight to approach near enough to learn
+anything of importance.  No, he must wait until night.
+
+Pete was much pleased when Dane returned and told of the discovery he
+had made.
+
+"Good, good," he said.  "Plenty canoe come bimeby."
+
+"But perhaps they are all there now," Dane suggested.
+
+"No, more come bimeby.  See 'm soon."
+
+And in this the Indian was right, for as the day wore away, and
+darkness once more began to steal over the land, the canoes began to
+arrive.  There were a dozen in all, and each contained a number of men,
+some of whom were Indians.  They all came down river, entered the
+narrow channel, and sped up the Wedneebak.
+
+As the last canoe disappeared around a bend, Dane and Pete slipped away
+from their place of watching.  They moved rapidly through the forest,
+and hardly a sound did they make as they advanced.  Their ears and eyes
+were keenly alert, for they were well aware that the critical time had
+now arrived, and that much depended upon their caution.
+
+The darkness had now deepened, and no trail guided their steps.  But to
+them this mattered little.  The forest was their home, and their course
+was as unerring as birds in their flight or beasts in search of prey.
+A life-long training to one, and years to the other had developed the
+sense of instinct which always served when sight and hearing were of
+little or no avail.
+
+And this stood them in good stead now, for when others would have
+detected nothing, they suddenly stopped dead in their tracks, dropped
+upon their hands and knees, and crept cautiously forward.  Never did
+panthers move more warily than did those two human sleuth-hounds
+approach the unsuspecting men gathered from various places for the
+important council.  From creeping they dropped into crawling, with
+their bodies close to the ground.  In this manner they ere long came
+near the water, and not far from where the rebels were assembled.
+Here, concealed by night and a thick clump of small fir bushes, they
+were able to watch all that was taking place, and to hear every word
+uttered.
+
+Ever since Pete had brought him word of this council a great fear had
+been tugging at Dane's heart.  He said nothing, however, about it to
+his companion, but as he rapidly and anxiously scanned the faces of the
+men gathered about the big main fire, he breathed a sigh of relief.
+The one he feared might be present was not there.  A weight was now
+lifted from his mind, so he felt in a better mood to spy upon the band
+before him.
+
+He knew them all, Indians, English-speaking renegades from New England,
+and half-breeds.  It was a motley gathering, and as he listened to the
+drifting conversation before the actual pow-wow began, he realised how
+bitter was the hatred to the English that rankled strong in every
+breast.  The half-breeds had an old score to settle, and this was
+another desperate attempt on their part to arouse the dissatisfied
+natives against the Loyalists.
+
+For a time it was an orderly gathering, and as the men ate of the
+abundance of food which had been provided, they talked in a quiet
+manner.  But when the rum, of which there seemed to be no end, was
+passed around all became more talkative.  They harangued, cursed, and
+wrangled with one another until it appeared to the concealed watchers
+that the whole affair would end in a fizzle.  But Flazeet, the
+half-breed leader, seemed to be perfectly satisfied, and at times a
+grim smile overspread his dark brutal face.
+
+Leaping at length to his feet, he ordered his companions to be silent.
+When he spoke in such a peremptory tone, they knew that it was well for
+them to obey, so after a little grumbling they settled down to listen
+to what he had to say.
+
+Flazeet understood the Indian language, and was also well acquainted
+with the natives, so it was to them he now addressed his words.  He
+told them first of all of the greatness of their race, and that the
+Great Spirit had given to their forefathers the land on which they
+lived.  It was theirs, and no one had any right to take it from them.
+But strangers were coming in, and King George was going to take their
+hunting-grounds away and give them to others.  And who were these
+newcomers?  They were people who had been driven out of their own
+country for their badness.  They had fought against the great white
+chief, George Washington, who had been so good to the Indians, and had
+sent them many presents during the war.  These strangers had been
+defeated, and thousands of them had already arrived in ships, and were
+coming up the river to take possession of the hunting-grounds.  The
+Indians would be driven out.  They would die, because the newcomers
+would kill all the moose, deer, and caribou, cut down the trees, and
+destroy the fish on the various streams.  These were some of the things
+they would do, and the Indians would have no hunting-grounds, so they,
+their wives and their children would starve.  Would the Indians allow
+this?  Would they let these bad men come in and take their lands?  No,
+they must fight, drive these people out, and keep the country which was
+theirs by right.  And now was the time to fight, before too many
+strangers arrived.
+
+This in brief was Flazeet's long harangue.  It made a deep impression
+upon the Indians, and they voiced their sentiments by occasional grunts
+of approval.  So excited did several become when the speech was ended,
+that they leaped to their feet, and inflamed by the words and the rum,
+they were ready to march at once against the strangers.  But Flazeet
+told them to wait, as the newcomers were many and well armed.  It would
+be necessary to move slowly, and to be very careful.  And, besides,
+there were Indians who would stand by the treaty which had been made
+with King George at the mouth of the river, and they would have to
+fight against them.  This matter must be kept a profound secret, and
+when they did attack, it must be swift and deadly.
+
+With considerable difficulty Flazeet managed to calm the warlike
+natives.  Then more rum was passed around, followed by much talking and
+squabbling.  All this was most gratifying to Flazeet, and especially
+interesting to the two couriers concealed among the bushes.  Pete's
+great body quivered with excitement, and Dane could hardly control
+himself.  How he longed for a score of tested men, that he might spring
+upon the rebels, and give them the surprise of their lives.
+
+When at length the excitement had subsided, Gab Rauchad rose slowly to
+his feet.  He was a wiry little half-breed, with a cunning, fox-like
+face.  He spoke in French, and he addressed himself chiefly to his own
+people.  He took them back to the expulsion of the Acadians by the
+English in 1755, a tale old and yet ever new.  In vivid language he
+described the happy condition of the Acadians at Grand Pré, the lands
+they had cleared, and the peaceful lives they led.  Then came the
+English monsters, broke up their domestic hearths, confiscated their
+property, and drove them from the country.  He described in detail the
+privations the expelled Acadians endured, how they wandered from place
+to place, and the ills which overtook them.
+
+For some time he spoke, and every word told of the burning rage which
+filled his heart.  His hatred to the English was intense, and he
+declared that the time of vengeance had now arrived.  With the aid of
+the Indians they would serve the newcomers as their fool of a king had
+served the Acadians.  He became greatly excited as he talked, dancing
+about, waving his arms, and shrieking forth words of defiance and
+revenge.  He cursed King George and the English in general, and called
+upon all present to unite now in a great effort to free the land from
+the newcomers, and to hold it for the expelled Acadians and the Indians
+who were their brothers and comrades in distress.
+
+All this was hard for Dane to endure, and as he listened his nimble
+mind was forming some definite plan of action.  That it must be
+immediate he was well aware, as no doubt these rebels would not be long
+in carrying out their evil and treacherous designs upon the newcomers.
+His mind naturally turned to Jean.  Suppose that band of men before him
+should sweep down unexpectedly upon the little settlement below Oak
+Point, how much mercy would they be likely to grant the Loyalists?  He
+imagined what would be the fate of the women, especially Jean and other
+maidens.  He shuddered as he thought of Joe Flazeet and his companions
+gloating over their victims.
+
+"The English took the lands of the Acadians at Grand Pré because they
+wanted them for themselves."  It was Rauchad speaking, and he was
+appealing to the Indians as Flazeet had done to the half-breeds.  "And
+as they took those lands, so they will take your hunting grounds and
+drive you out.  The Acadians had happy homes; what have they now?
+Nothing.  They had plenty; now they are starving.  And who did this?
+King George, our mortal enemy.  France and England are now at war.  But
+France will win, and this land will belong to us once again, and then
+the Indians will be well treated, and we will all live as one brother.
+Let us do our part now in fighting for the good King of France."
+
+His words met with much approval, and when he had ended, Flazeet arose
+and outlined the plan of attack.  This was just what Dane was waiting
+to hear, and he missed not a single word.  He was greatly excited, and
+he controlled himself with difficulty as he listened to Flazeet.  The
+Loyalists down river were to be wiped out first of all, especially
+those below Oak Point and at Kingston Creek.  They would then move
+rapidly up river and have the entire country conquered ere assistance
+could reach the newcomers from Fort Howe.  It would be a clean sweep of
+the objectionable strangers, and what could Major Studholme do with the
+few men under his command?
+
+When Dane had gained all the information that was necessary, he touched
+Pete on the shoulder, and in another minute they were away from the
+scene of wild revelry which had now begun.  It did not take them long
+to reach the narrow channel, and launch their canoe.  This they headed
+up stream, and with strong arms drove it through the water, straight
+for Oromocto miles beyond.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE KING'S RANGERS
+
+Several days had passed in quiet contentment at the little settlement
+of Loyal after Dane's departure.  Jean missed him very much and longed
+for his return.  The evenings were now dark and cool, so as she and her
+father sat before the fire they often talked about the absent one, and
+wondered what could be detaining him.  Neighbours at times joined them,
+and discussed the possibility of an attack by the Indians and the
+slashers.  But the Colonel scoffed at such an idea.  He maintained that
+the natives were at peace with the English, and would not be aroused by
+the rebels to molest the Loyalists.
+
+Each day anxious eyes were turned upon the river, hoping to see the
+white sails of the _Polly_ bearing up stream.  Captain Leavitt had
+promised to return before winter to bring the needed supplies for the
+long, hard months ahead.
+
+Something, however, at length occurred which diverted their attention
+from the _Polly_, and gave them considerable concern.  This was the
+arrival of several canoes filled with men.  There were a score of men
+in all, and they received a most hearty welcome.  The leader was
+William Davidson, the King's purveyor, who, with several others, was
+entertained at supper by the Colonel and his daughter.  That evening a
+bonfire was built upon the shore, and around this the visitors and most
+of the people of the settlement gathered.  It was a pleasant assembly,
+even though the night was cool.  A liberal supply of Jamaica rum was
+passed around, and this was supposed to add greatly to the comfort of
+all.
+
+Jean sat by her father's side, deeply interested in all that was taking
+place.  Her heart was light, for Davidson had told her that Dane would
+be with her in a day or two.  He and Pete were at present away on
+special business, the nature of which he did not say.  Jean liked the
+looks of these visitors.  They were all hardy, keen, well-built, and
+fearless-eyed rangers in the service of their King.  They had to be all
+that, for their leader would employ no others.  But they were full of
+life and spirit when they met together, and many were the stories told
+of their various adventures.  This night, notwithstanding the
+seriousness of the business which lay ahead, they were like a number of
+boys just out of school.  It was something new to them to meet so many
+interesting strangers such as they found at Loyal.
+
+William Davidson was a worthy leader of such a band of men, and they
+held him in the highest regard.  He was a man in the prime of life, and
+had led a stirring career.  Coming from Scotland, he had settled on the
+Miramichi River, where for a time he engaged in the fishery and fur
+trade.  During the war his Indian neighbours, incited by certain
+rebels, made his life so unbearable that he was forced to flee to the
+St. John River where he settled near the mouth of the Oromocto River.
+Even here he could not find peace, for the following summer he was
+plundered by the Indians, who took all his goods upon which they could
+lay their hands.  Davidson was a marked man owing to his loyalty to
+King George, and the rebels here also aroused the natives against him.
+Little wonder, then, that when he was appointed the King's purveyor in
+supplying masts for His Majesty's navy that the hostility between him
+and the rebels, as well as many Indians, still continued.
+
+But Davidson was a man not easily daunted.  His courage, combined with
+his cool judgment, was well known all along the river.  And since his
+entrance into the King's service he had given many outstanding proofs
+of his bravery and ability.  He was quick to act, but never more so
+than when Dane Norwood brought him word at Oromocto of the plot against
+the Loyalists.
+
+When he at length rose to speak, all talking ceased, and the people of
+the settlement felt that they were now to learn the reason of the
+rangers' presence in their midst.  And neither were they mistaken.
+After Davidson had thanked them for their kindly reception, he told
+them of the danger which threatened their homes, and perhaps their
+lives.  He mentioned the council which had been held on the shore of
+the Wedneebak, and how Dane Norwood and Pete, the Indian, had brought
+him the news.  He and his men had accordingly hastened down river as
+fast as possible to ask the men of Loyal to join them in overcoming and
+putting the plotters to rout.
+
+"But why should they attack us?" the Colonel asked when Davidson had
+ended.  "They do not know us, and we have never harmed them."
+
+"Simply because you are loyal to King George," was the reply.  "The
+half-breeds, who are descended from the Acadians, think they have a
+great grievance against England for expelling their forefathers from
+Grand Pré in 1755.  During the war they made no end of trouble, and did
+their best to stir up the Indians to rebellion.  I know only too well
+what they did, for they drove me from my home on the Miramichi, and
+caused me a great deal of annoyance up river.  They are at their old
+tricks again, and this is their last hope.
+
+"But have they not reason for being angry at what England did to their
+forefathers at Grand Pré?" Henry Watson, a Loyalist, asked.  "We have
+heard much about that transaction, and it was all very unfavourable to
+England.  Perhaps there is another side to the story."
+
+"Indeed there is," Davidson replied, "although it is very difficult to
+separate the truth from the fiction.  It was a very sad affair, and it
+is a pity that it ever happened.  Perhaps England made a mistake and
+acted hastily, but we must consider how serious was the situation when
+the expulsion took place.  Sentiment has played an important part, and
+the thought of thousands of people deprived of their lands, and driven
+out to wander as exiles in strange countries has naturally stirred many
+hearts."
+
+"But were the Acadians disloyal?" the Colonel asked.  "We have been
+told that they were not, and that all were punished for the
+indiscretions of a few."
+
+"That may be so," and Davidson looked thoughtfully before him.  "But
+the English contend that when the Acadians settled on their lands over
+forty years before it was with the distinct understanding that they
+could only retain them by becoming British subjects.  But they had not
+complied with those terms.  The English contend that the Acadians did
+everything in their power to assist the French and embarrass the
+English.  Many of them joined with the Indians in the attacks on the
+garrison at Annapolis, and on other English fortified posts.  They
+supplied England's enemies with cattle and grain at Louisbourg,
+Beauséjour, and elsewhere.  They acted the part of spies on the
+English, and maintained a constant correspondence with the French.
+They were on friendly terms with the Indians, who were such a menace to
+the English that an English settler could scarcely venture beyond his
+barn, or a soldier beyond musket shot of his fort for fear of being
+killed or scalped.  That is the English version of the affair which I
+heard in Halifax.  The Acadians deny it, and say it is all false."
+
+"We heard," one of the settlers said, "that the Acadians were expelled
+because the greedy English colonists looked upon their fair farms with
+covetous eyes, and that the government was influenced by these persons."
+
+"I have heard that, too," Davidson replied, "and I have made enquiries
+about that matter.  But I do not believe it is true, because those
+abandoned farms were not settled by the English until years after the
+Acadians were expelled, and the lands at Annapolis were not occupied
+until nine or ten years after the French had left them.  Why did not
+the English colonists settle upon those abandoned farms at once, if
+they were so anxious to have them?  They did nothing of the kind, so I
+do not think that had anything to do with the expulsion."
+
+"What was the real cause, then?" Henry Watson asked.
+
+"It was the seriousness of the whole situation.  England was just
+entering upon a great war with France.  It was a death-struggle, so
+there was no room for half-way measures.  Feeling ran high, and the
+English may have become panicky.  There was a bitter hatred, too, which
+may have had something to do with it.  The English believed that with
+so many concealed enemies in the country, and such a large number of
+open enemies on the borders, their position was far from secure.  They
+thought that the Acadians were beginning to show their real feelings,
+especially so whenever a rumour reached them that a French fleet was in
+the Bay of Fundy.  Anyway, they at last became so much worked up that
+they ordered the Acadians to give up the arms they had in their
+possession, and to take the oath of allegiance to King George.
+Refusing to take the oath, the Acadians were expelled.  You now know
+both sides of the pathetic affair.  The story of the expelled people is
+generally believed, partly, no doubt, for sentimental reasons.  The
+English may have acted hastily and unwisely, but they contend that
+there was nothing else to do under the circumstances."
+
+"So some of those expelled people came here, and are now trying to make
+trouble for us; is that it?" the Colonel asked.
+
+"Some of them are.  Others are living very quietly, and behaving
+themselves in a proper manner.  But there are several very bitter and
+unscrupulous agitators, chief of whom are the half breeds, Flazeet and
+Rauchad, who will stop at almost nothing.  They are full of hatred and
+long for revenge.  They have not only drawn with them a number of
+lawless Acadians, and English-speaking traitors, but they are now
+inducing too many Indians to unite with them.  I have suspected them
+for some time, and watch has been kept upon their movements.  They have
+been plotting all summer, and now they are about to act.  But thanks to
+our couriers, Dane Norwood, and Pete, the Indian, I know of their
+plans.  We are, therefore, here to ask you to assist us.  Others, we
+believe, will come to our aid, so we should be able to put the rebels
+to rout without much difficulty."
+
+The conversation now became general.  The Loyalists were thoroughly
+aroused, and all the men agreed to help the rangers against the enemy.
+Davidson did not explain what he intended to do, but asked all to trust
+him for the present.  With this the Loyalists were satisfied, and they
+went back to their houses to make preparations for their march against
+the rebels.
+
+Davidson and his men slept upon the ground that night, wrapped in their
+blankets.  This had been their life for years, so they thought nothing
+of it.  These rangers who knew every trail and stream in the country,
+were at home wherever night overtook them.  Possessions they had none.
+A life of indolence and ease they despised.  The spirit of adventure
+animated their souls, and their only creed was loyalty to King George.
+With such men Davidson wielded a strong influence in a region where the
+King's regular forces could not penetrate.  It was largely due to such
+bands of men that England's prestige was maintained in the heart of the
+wilderness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+WHERE THE RANGERS LED
+
+The next day there was considerable stir at the settlement.  The women
+were busy cooking, while the men spent some time cleaning their muskets
+and "running" bullets.  All felt anxious, and serious faces were seen
+among the Loyalists.  Old Mammy was greatly disturbed, and Jean found
+it difficult to calm her fears.
+
+"Why, Mammy, you never made such a fuss all during the war when daddy
+was in danger every day," the girl chided.
+
+"Ah, chile, dat was different.  Yer daddy was fightin' white men den.
+But dese are Injuns, an' dey'll scalp de wounded, an' den tie 'em to a
+tree an' burn 'em alive.  Den dey'll come an' carry off de women fo'
+wives.  I'll die befo' I'll be de wife of any ol' Injun, I sure will."
+
+"Don't you worry, Mammy," Jean assured.  "The Indians are not going to
+come here.  The rangers and our men will be able to handle them.  I am
+not one bit afraid."
+
+As the shades of evening were stealing over the land, the men gathered
+for their march against the enemy.  They were a formidable band, and
+Davidson was much pleased as he watched them fall into line.  The
+Colonel had charge of the little squad of Loyalists, and his old spirit
+possessed him as he drilled and instructed them for a few minutes in
+front of his house.  The rangers watched this performance with
+interest, and smiled indulgently.
+
+"I am afraid that won't do much good in wilderness warfare," Davidson
+reminded.  "General Braddock tried it, and you know what happened.
+However, I am hoping that there will be no fighting, so it won't make
+much difference."
+
+Half an hour later the men were swinging on their way through the
+woods.  No one spoke, and all walked as warily as possible.  As night
+shut down travelling became more difficult for the men of the
+settlement, although the rangers seemed as much at home in the darkness
+as in the daylight.  For over two and a half hours they moved steadily
+forward, and at length stopped by the side of a little brook which
+flowed down to the river.  Here they rested and ate some of the food
+which they had brought with them.  They had not been long here ere a
+low whistle sounded up the valley.  Davidson at once replied, and a few
+minutes later soft approaching footsteps were heard.  Then a dim form
+emerged from the darkness, and stood in their midst.
+
+"I am glad to see you on time, Dane," Davidson accosted.  "How many men
+did you get?"
+
+"Twenty-five," was the reply.  "Pete is bringing them up.  I slipped on
+ahead to see if things are all right."
+
+"Yes, everything is working well so far.  Have you found out anything
+new?"
+
+"Nothing except that some of the rebels have gathered at Pine Lake, and
+others are expected to-morrow.  Pete and I were trailing them to-day,
+and it was rare sport."
+
+"I hope you were careful, Dane."
+
+"We are always careful, though it wasn't necessary to-day.  The Indians
+were quite cautious, but some of the white men lumbered along like
+oxen, cursing and complaining at a great rate.  Flazeet and Rauchad had
+quite a time with them, and kept encouraging them with promises of rum
+and the fun they would have with the Loyalists."
+
+"They'll get a different kind of fun from what they expect," Davidson
+replied.  "And the more rum they swig, the better it will be for us.
+How far is it from here to the lake?"
+
+"About five miles in a straight course.  We can do it easily in an hour
+and a half."
+
+"Oh, you could do it all right in that time, and less, for that matter.
+But all here are not so well accustomed to the woods at night.  Isn't
+that so, Colonel?"
+
+"It certainly is," was the emphatic reply.  "I shall need two or three
+hours, for I find the walking very difficult.  And, besides, one has to
+be careful not to make any noise."
+
+"Whatever noise we make will not trouble the rebels," and Davidson
+laughed.  "They'll be sleeping as sound as babies by daylight."
+
+In a short time Pete arrived with the recruits from Kingston, and they
+were given a hearty welcome.  It was a glad meeting for the Loyalists,
+and they spent several hours in earnest conversation about their
+various affairs, and exchanging bits of information concerning the old
+homes they had left.  The men from Kingston described the progress they
+were making in clearing their lands, and building their houses.
+
+Several small fires had been started, and around these the men
+gathered.  The night was cool, and a stiff wind from the northwest
+swayed the tops of the great trees.  Had it not been for the serious
+business upon which they were bent, the Loyalists would have enjoyed
+the outing immensely.  But the thought of what lay ahead was ever with
+them.  There was something uncanny about this camping-spot in the
+forest, and they often glanced apprehensively toward the walls of
+blackness which surrounded them.  They were not cowards, for their
+courage had been fully proved in many a hard fight.  Even the Colonel
+felt somewhat depressed as the night wore on.  It seemed weird and
+unnatural, this mode of warfare against a skulking enemy.  If he could
+only lead his men against the rebels out in the open it would have been
+different.  But this waiting for hours, and with no apparent method of
+attack, was hard for him to endure.
+
+The rangers, on the other hand, did not mind it in the least.  This was
+their life, and they took it as a matter of course.  Dane, especially,
+was at his ease.  He was glad of the rest, as he had been on the move
+all day.  But he was anxious to get through with the job that he might
+return to Jean.  He had asked the Colonel about her, and they had
+talked apart for some time.
+
+"I hope she is not too much distressed over this affair," he said.
+
+"She is naturally worried," was the reply.  "But she has great
+confidence in the rangers--and in you," he added after a slight pause.
+"I agree with her, and feel greatly indebted to you and Pete for what
+you have done.  I hope we may be able to settle the rebels once and for
+all."
+
+"I don't think there is any doubt about it.  So far, our plans have
+worked without a hitch, and Davidson is an old reliable hand at such
+work.  Strategy with him is the main thing, and it has proven useful on
+many occasions ere this.  He always avoids bloodshed as far as
+possible."
+
+It was a great relief to the weary Loyalists when Davidson at last
+bestirred himself, and told all to get ready for the march to the lake.
+The band was at once divided into five groups, each containing several
+rangers, who were well acquainted with their leader's plans.  Dane
+stayed close by the Colonel, carried his musket, and assisted him when
+his steps lagged.  It was a slow, toilsome journey through the forest
+on that cold, frosty morning.  There were hills to climb, and swamps to
+cross.  It would have been hard work even in the daytime, but night
+added to the difficulty of the undertaking.  The Loyalists, not
+accustomed to such travelling, often stumbled and tripped over stones
+and snags.  But the rangers walked as if on a beaten highway, and
+proved of great assistance to the less skilful.  No one complained,
+however, and when any one spoke, it was in a subdued voice.  The
+Colonel strove bravely to hold his own with the younger men.  But he
+was becoming very weary, and more than once he leaned on Dane's arm for
+support.
+
+"I am sorry to burden you" he said, "but this trip is almost too much
+for me."
+
+"I am afraid it is," was the reply.  "You should have stayed at home
+and let us attend to the rebels."
+
+"I suppose I should have done that," and the Colonel sighed as he
+paused for a minute on the brow of a hill they had just climbed.  "But
+I want to do my part.  I did it during the war to the best of my
+ability.  Jean was proud of me then, and I do not want her to be
+ashamed of me now."
+
+Dane was about to reply when a slight sound from one of the rangers
+sealed his lips.  He knew that it spelled danger, and that caution was
+needed.
+
+"We are close to the lake," he whispered.  "It is just over there.  We
+are to remain here for a while."
+
+The men were glad enough to rest, so throwing themselves down upon the
+ground, they refreshed themselves with some food.  Anxiously they
+awaited the coming of the dawn, and through a break in the trees they
+often turned their eyes eastward.  At length the far-off horizon rose
+slowly into view, the darkness began to melt away, and objects about
+them grew more distinct.  This was the signal for them to continue
+their journey, and once again they set their faces toward the lake.  It
+was easier travelling now, and seldom did any one stumble.  This was
+well, for the strictest silence had to be maintained as they neared
+their goal.  They were walking in single file, and the rangers were
+doubly alert, peering here and there, and listening to every sound.
+
+At length they separated, Dane going alone with the Colonel somewhat to
+the right.  Each ranger took one or two of the settlers, and in another
+minute all had disappeared among the trees.  Dane led the Colonel
+slowly along, until presently an opening appeared before them.
+
+"It is the lake," Dane whispered.  "We must creep now to the edge of
+the woods, and keep ourselves well hidden."
+
+Dropping upon their hands and knees, they worked their way along until
+they came right to the border of the forest.  Here they stopped, and by
+the dim light of the morning they could see before them a band of men
+lying upon the shore, wrapped in their blankets.  There were fifty or
+more, including Indians, and they were sound asleep.
+
+"We've got them this time, all right," Dane again whispered.  "Here is
+your gun; you may need it.  We must now wait for Davidson to make the
+next move."
+
+It was a beautiful spot which the rebels had chosen for their place of
+meeting.  The lake was not large, but it lay like a gem amidst its
+setting of great dark pines.  The shore where the plotters were lying
+was sandy, and from all appearance they had spent much of the night in
+a wild carousal.  They were huddled in various grotesque shapes, and
+several were snoring loudly.
+
+In about fifteen minutes a sound, scarcely audible, was heard near
+Dane's side, and glancing around, he saw Davidson creeping toward him.
+
+"The trap is all set," the leader whispered as he came close.  "It only
+waits to be sprung."
+
+"Are the men all arranged?" Dane asked.
+
+"They are in fine order, and all in line, only a few feet from one
+another.  The Loyalists caught on in no time.  I am surprised that the
+rebels are all asleep.  It's a wonder they didn't place some one on
+guard."
+
+"I believe they did.  Look," and Dane motioned to a huddled form
+somewhat apart from the others.  "There is the guard, but the rum must
+have affected him like it did the rest.  Anyway, they were not
+suspicious, and had no idea that their plot was known."
+
+"Now get ready," Davidson ordered.  "We must round up this bunch before
+any more arrive."
+
+Then from his lips sounded forth a clear peculiar whistle.  Almost
+immediately wild yells from a score of rangers rent the air, followed
+by ringing cheers of defiance.  Dazed and startled, a number of rebels
+threw aside their blankets, scrambled to their knees, and looked
+around.  Flazeet and Rauchad were the first to comprehend the
+situation.  Yelling to their still sleeping comrades, they leaped to
+their feet, and were about to seize their muskets, when Davidson
+sternly ordered them to desist.
+
+"Hands up," he commanded.
+
+The ringleaders instantly obeyed, for they at once recognised the
+King's purveyor, the one man they so greatly feared.  But one
+dare-devil rebel sprang for his gun a few feet away.  He never reached
+it, however, for from the border of the forest two muskets spoke, and
+he crumpled in his tracks upon the sand.  This was sufficient warning
+to the rest, and all now awake stood sullenly and silently staring hard
+at their captors who had come into full view.
+
+"Get over there, and be quick about it," Davidson ordered, motioning to
+the left.
+
+The rebels at once obeyed, and standing huddled together, awaited
+further developments.  Most of the men had no heart for any opposition,
+even if they had the opportunity.  They had been promised plenty of
+rum, a good time, and no end of fun with the Loyalists.  Such a
+disastrous outcome as this had been far from their minds.  The Indians
+now realised that they had been led into a trap, and their hearts were
+full of rage, more against their leaders than their captors.  But
+Flazeet and Rauchad were not in the least repentant.  Their eyes and
+faces expressed their anger and hatred as they watched Davidson coming
+toward them.
+
+"What is the meaning of all this?" the purveyor asked.
+
+"It's none of your business," Flazeet replied with a savage oath.
+
+"I've made it my business, though, and so have the men with me."  A
+smile lurked about the corners of Davidson's mouth as he watched the
+confounded rebels.  "You didn't expect this, Joe, did you?"
+
+"And why should I?  Why can't we meet here without being disturbed?
+What right have you to come upon us like this?  What do you want,
+anyway?"
+
+"I want you and a few others, and you know very well what for, so don't
+begin any nonsense."
+
+"This is an outrage," Flazeet stormed.  "I always thought this was a
+free country, where men can meet together if they want to without being
+held up like this."
+
+"It is a free country, Joe, and we are trying to keep it so.  But when
+men start plotting against peaceable people, they must be restrained.
+That is the reason why we are here."
+
+"Do you mean to say that we are plotters?"
+
+"Yes, and the meanest kind at that.  You have been stirring up the
+Indians and others for some time.  You will be surprised, no doubt, to
+know that every word that you and Rauchad uttered at your big council
+by the Wedneebak was overheard and reported to me.  I know what you
+said to the Acadians and the Indians who were there that night, and how
+you cursed King George.  You planned to wipe out the Loyalists, though
+that was easier said than done."
+
+Flazeet and Rauchad stared dumbfounded at the speaker.  Their rage was
+changing now to a nameless fear.  They thought of that night by the
+Wedneebak when they imagined that only those concerned in the plot were
+present.  Had they been betrayed by one of their number? they asked
+themselves.  They could not believe it, for they had kept in close
+touch with all the men ever since.  There must have been spies
+surrounding them that night, and this thought sent cold chills up and
+down their spines, causing their faces to turn a ghastly hue.
+
+Davidson noted their confusion, and smiled.  He knew that they were
+greatly puzzled, and it pleased him.  The Acadians and Indians were
+deeply impressed, and showed it by the expressions of fear and awe upon
+their faces.  Their respect for the King's purveyor had always been
+great, but they considered him now as more than human.  That he knew of
+every word which had been spoken at their council by the Wedneebak, was
+beyond their comprehension.  That they were completely cowed, Davidson
+knew.  He turned to the Indians and addressed them in their own
+language.  He told them how their false leaders had led them into
+trouble, and caused them to rebel against King George's people.  But if
+they were willing to behave themselves, he would let them go.  He
+wished to take only the ringleaders with him, and hand them over to
+Major Studholme at Fort Howe.
+
+"King George will treat you well," he said in conclusion.  "There is
+plenty of land for both you and the white people.  You will still have
+your hunting-grounds, so you and your families will have plenty of
+food.  But if you listen to such men as Flazeet and Rauchad here, and
+make any more trouble, King George will send soldiers as many as the
+trees of the forest, and will drive you all out.  He does not want to
+do that.  He is anxious to be your great chief, and help you.  Are you
+willing to obey him?"
+
+When Davidson had ended, he waited until the Indians had consulted one
+another.  Then their chief speaker stepped forward, and declared that
+from henceforth he and the Indians with him would be loyal to King
+George and make no more trouble.  The Acadians also gave a reluctant
+assent.  But as these latter were few, and were by no means
+representative of the loyal Acadians in the land, Davidson was little
+concerned about what they said.  He was chiefly anxious to have the
+Indians on his side.  The slashers were becoming very troublesome up
+river, and he wanted to keep the natives from joining them against the
+King's mast-cutters.  By breaking up this band of rebels, he believed
+that much had been accomplished.
+
+"I am going to treat you well," he told the Indians and Acadians.  "I
+am going to give you back your guns and let all of you go except your
+leaders here and two or three more.  When you have buried that man over
+there, go home and be forever thankful that you have got out of this
+trouble as well as you have."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+THE LINE IN THE SAND
+
+Taking with them the two ringleaders and two other rebels as witnesses,
+the victors marched back to the settlement.  There was no need for
+secrecy now, so the forest re-echoed with shouts, laughter and songs of
+the care-free rangers.  They were somewhat disappointed at the outcome
+of the affair, as they longed for a fight with the plotters.  But down
+in their hearts they knew that Davidson had taken the wisest course in
+dealing with the Indians.  With Flazeet and Rauchad out of the way,
+they felt certain that the gang would give no further trouble.
+
+The Colonel found it impossible to keep up with his companions, so he
+and Dane walked more slowly some distance in the rear.  It was
+difficult for the young courier to restrain his steps, as he longed to
+speed like the wind to the one he believed was anxiously awaiting his
+coming.  But he would not leave the Colonel who was weary after his
+trying experience.
+
+"This has been too much for me," the latter confessed, as he paused and
+rested for a few minutes.  "I am sorry to detain you, for I know how
+you long to be on ahead with the others.  It is good of you to stay
+with me."
+
+"Don't you remember our agreement?" Dane asked.
+
+"What agreement?"
+
+"The one we made out in the hills, of course, that 'While the grass
+grows, the sun shines, and the water flows we will be friends.' Friends
+help one another, do they not?  Although I am anxious to get to the
+settlement, yet I could not think of leaving you to lose yourself in
+the woods.  I would never forgive myself, and what would Jean think of
+me?"
+
+"She thinks a great deal of you now, young man, and I believe you are
+worthy of her regard."
+
+"I hope I am, and for her sake, at least, I am glad that my life has
+been clean.  I have travelled in strange ways, and lived at times among
+base and vicious men, but I have always kept myself apart from their
+evil doings.  I owe it all to my mother's teaching and influence."
+
+"She must have been a noble woman," the Colonel remarked, as he resumed
+his journey.
+
+"She was," Dane replied, "and I know of but one who resembles her.  You
+know to whom I refer.  Until I met Jean, I thought that my mother was
+the only one who reached my ideal of what a woman should be.  Since
+meeting her, I have been very happy.  Without her, the world would be
+very dreary to me.  But perhaps you cannot fully understand what I
+mean."
+
+"I understand better than you imagine," was the quiet reply.  "When I
+say that Jean is just like her mother, you can be assured that I
+understand exactly what you mean."
+
+The Colonel was very tired when he at length reached the settlement.
+He and Dane were both surprised at the silence which reigned about the
+place.  They had expected to hear sounds of the rangers and others
+making merry over the success of their march against the rebels.  But
+everything was as quiet as a funeral, causing an ominous feeling to
+steal into their hearts.  Had anything of a serious nature happened
+during their absence? they asked themselves, although they did not
+express their thought in words.  What was the meaning of those little
+groups of men and women talking so earnestly?  And why was Davidson
+advancing alone to meet them?  Something surely was wrong.
+
+As, Davidson approached, they noted the serious expression upon his
+face.  The Colonel stopped, and with fast-beating heart waited for the
+purveyor to speak.
+
+"We have been watching for you," Davidson began.  "I am afraid you are
+very tired."
+
+"I am somewhat weary," the Colonel replied.  "But, tell me, is anything
+the matter?  What is the meaning of this strange quietness?  And why do
+you meet us like this?"
+
+"We are anxious about your daughter," Davidson explained.  "She has
+been missing since last night."
+
+At these words a cry escaped Dane's lips, and he wheeled impetuously
+upon his leader.  But the Colonel did not utter a sound.  His face grew
+white as death, and his body trembled.  He stared at the ranger as if
+he had not heard aright.  Then he raised his left hand, and pressed it
+to his forehead.
+
+"You say that Jean is missing?" Dane asked.  "What has happened to her?
+Tell me, quick."
+
+"Yes, she has disappeared, and no one here knows what has become of
+her."
+
+With a groan Dane looked beseechingly at Davidson.
+
+"Surely some one must have seen her," he declared.  "Was she alone?
+Was she out on the water?  Was she in the woods?  Perhaps she is lost,
+and is wandering about trying to find her way home."
+
+"That is not it, Dane.  She was visiting at one of the houses early
+last night, and stayed for about an hour.  She left there for home, and
+has not been seen since."
+
+Dane made no reply.  His brain was in a tumult.  He tried to think, to
+find some solution to the problem.  Jean was gone!  Where had she gone?
+What had happened to her?  His thoughts suddenly darted to Lupin, the
+cowardly villain.  Then he recalled what he had heard a few nights
+before on the river as that mysterious canoe sped by in the darkness.
+"Seth's looking after the plans," were the final words which had
+reached his ears.  Had those plans anything to do with Jean's
+disappearance? he asked himself.  Forgotten was everything else as with
+lightning rapidity these thoughts surged through his mind.  He came to
+himself with a start, and was surprised to see that the Colonel had
+left him, and was with Davidson at the door of his own house.  He
+hurried after him, and entered the house just as the bereaved father
+dropped upon a seat near the table, and buried his face in his hands.
+He went to his side and laid a hand upon his shoulder.
+
+"I will find Jean," he said.  "Don't get too much discouraged."
+
+"You will find Jean?" the Colonel eagerly asked.  "Have you any idea
+where she is?"
+
+"I do not know, but Pete and I will find her."
+
+At these words Old Mammy lifted her bowed head.  She had been swaying
+to and fro, and moaning in the most doleful manner.
+
+"Oh, Mistah Dane, find Missie Jean," she pleaded.  "Bring back my sweet
+lamb.  I'se 'fraid de Injuns or bears has toted her off.  Oh! oh! oh!
+What will I do wifout my darlin' chile!"
+
+"We will find her, Mammy, never fear," Dane comforted.  "Get some food
+ready, and Pete and I will begin the search at once."
+
+"I'll have it ready fo' yo' in a jiffy, Mistah Dane," and the old woman
+toddled to her feet.  "I'se been cookin' all day fo' I knew de men
+would come back wif big ap'tites.  I'll put up 'nuff to las' yo' fo' a
+week."
+
+In another minute the faithful servant was busy filling a capacious
+basket with the good things she had stored away in the cupboard.  Dane
+turned to Davidson, who had been talking with the Colonel.
+
+"Where is Pete?" he asked.  "I have not seen him since coming back."
+
+"He is down on the shore," was the reply.  "He went there as soon as he
+heard the news, and has been there ever since."
+
+Dane walked to the door and looked out.  Down among the trees he saw
+the Indian, moving slowly around, with eyes intent upon the ground.
+Leaving the house, Dane hurried across the open, and he had almost
+reached the native when the latter dropped upon his hands and knees,
+and examined something he had just discovered.
+
+"Have you found anything?" Dane asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha," Pete replied, lifting his head, and holding forth a tiny
+shred of cloth.
+
+Dane seized it and examined it most carefully, while his heart gave a
+great bound.
+
+"It is a piece of Jean's dress!" he exclaimed.  "I would know it among
+a thousand.  Where did you find it?"
+
+"On dat," and the Indian laid his hand upon a sharp-pointed prong which
+jutted out from the great root of a fallen tree.  "White woman carried
+off, eh?"
+
+"It seems like it, Pete.  Her dress must have caught on that snag.
+Have you found anything else?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Injun track, see," and he pointed to the ground just in
+front of him.
+
+Dane stooped and without much difficulty he was able to discern the
+imprint of a moccasined-foot where it had pressed a small mound of
+sand.  He straightened himself up and looked around.
+
+"Any more such tracks, Pete?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, down on shore.  Canoe come dere.  Injun carry off white
+woman, eh?"
+
+"There is no doubt about it.  And we've got to find her.  Are you ready
+to help me?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, Pete ready.  Pete get canoe, eh?"
+
+"All right, and I'll be with you in a few minutes."
+
+Half an hour later Pete's canoe, the old reliable, which the rangers
+had brought back to the settlement, was again headed up river.  Dane
+sat astern and drove his paddle into the water with the force of a
+Titan.  He had been greatly stirred at times in the past, but never
+such as now.  The blood surged madly through his veins, and the muscles
+of his bared arms stood out like whips of steel.  He thought of the
+cowardly attack upon the helpless girl, the one he loved better than
+life.  Where was she now?  Perhaps already she had become the victim of
+Seth Lupin.  The idea was horrible, and his paddle bent as the
+glittering blade carved the water.  But the base Lupin should not
+escape.  He would track him, if necessary, to the farthest bounds.  He
+would find him, and when he had found him . . .
+
+The sun of the now shortened day dipped below the far-off western
+horizon.  A chilly breeze drifted up with the tide.  Gradually the
+trees along the shore became indistinct.  The stars tumbled out one by
+one.  Silence reigned on water and land.  But still the canoe sped
+noiselessly onward.  Not once had Dane spoken to the Indian; his mind
+was too much occupied with other things.  The picture of a white head
+bowed with grief as he had last seen it at the settlement, rose before
+him.  What agony of soul was that silent man now undergoing.  He
+emitted a slight groan, which caused Pete to glance quickly around.
+
+"Dane seek, eh?" he queried.
+
+"Not sick, Pete; only mad.  I'm in hell."
+
+"A-ha-ha, me know.  Bad, eh?"
+
+Dane's only reply was a more vigorous stroke than ever, which caused
+the canoe to quiver as it leaped forward.  He was too much excited as
+yet to form any definite line of action.  He thought only of the Indian
+encampments along the river and the various tributaries.  Surely at one
+of these he would find out something which would guide him in his
+search.  There was no time to be lost.  Winter was not far away, and
+the river would soon be frozen from bank to bank.  Already the wild
+geese had gone South in great wedge-like battalions, and any day the
+wild nor'easter might sweep down, and with the blast of its cruel
+breath strike rivers, lakes, and babbling brooks into a numbing silence.
+
+For days and nights they continued their search.  From camp to camp
+they sped with feverish haste, but not a clue could they find.  The
+Indians had heard nothing of the missing girl, and Dane's heart sank
+within him at each fresh disappointment.  What was he to do?  Where was
+he to go?  These were the questions he asked himself over and over
+again.  Both he and Pete were weary, for they had slept but little, and
+had only eaten what they could obtain at the various encampments.  How
+much longer could they continue?  Soon the river would be frozen, and
+then the search would have to be carried on by land.  And all this time
+what untold hardships was Jean undergoing, providing she was still
+alive?
+
+At length when hope was almost gone, an Indian passing up river gave
+him a glimmer of light.  He had been at the mouth of the Washademoak
+the night the white girl had been carried off.  A strange canoe had
+passed by swiftly in the darkness, and he had heard a slight moan of
+distress.  This was all, but it aroused in Dane a new spirit of hope.
+There might yet be time to follow this clue, and the Washademoak was a
+likely place to hide the girl.
+
+It was morning, and they were far up the river when this information
+was received.  The setting sun found them resting upon the shore not
+far from the entrance to the Washademoak.  They had just finished their
+frugal supper, and were about to continue on their way, when the white
+sails of the little schooner _Polly_ hove in sight, bearing steadily up
+stream.  Captain Leavitt was on deck, and catching sight of the two
+rangers, he hailed them.  As the vessel approached, Dane and Pete
+launched their canoe, and awaited her coming.  The wind was not strong,
+and when the _Polly_ at last drew near, they could see the deck filled
+with men, women, and children.  In another minute the canoe was
+alongside, and Captain Leavitt leaning over the starboard rail.
+
+"Hello, Dane," he accosted.  "You're just the man I'm on the lookout
+for.  Here's a letter from Davidson.  I didn't expect to find you so
+easily.  Any word of the missing girl?"
+
+"Not much, Captain.  We have a slight clue, though.  What's the news at
+Portland Point?"
+
+"Stirring times there, Dane.  The town is building up fast, and more
+people have arrived."  He then lowered his voice.  "These are some of
+the late-comers.  They are going up river to settle."
+
+"At this time of the year?" Dane asked in surprise.
+
+"Yes, and mighty hard luck, isn't it?  We are bound for St. Anne's, but
+I question whether we can make it with this cold weather upon us.  I
+must get back before the river freezes.  Some are following in open
+boats, just think of that!  I don't know what will become of them."
+
+Dane's eyes turned to the Loyalists who were watching him and Pete with
+considerable curiosity.  They formed a most pathetic group of people
+shivering there upon deck.  They seemed weary almost to the point of
+exhaustion, and yet in their eyes and bearing could be observed a
+spirit that nothing could daunt.
+
+"Did Davidson get the prisoners down all right?" Dane asked as he was
+about to let go of the rail.
+
+"Yes, they're waiting trial now.  But that letter will tell you all
+about it."
+
+In another minute the canoe was adrift, and the Loyalists were waving
+their hands as the _Polly_ sped on her way.  Dane at once opened the
+letter, and read its contents.  As he did so, his face became very
+grave, and a spirit of rebellion welled up within him.
+
+"Look at this, Pete," and he held forth the letter as soon as he had
+stepped ashore.  "Davidson has ordered us both to Fort Howe."
+
+"Why?" the Indian asked.
+
+"To tell what we heard at the Wedneebak.  We are wanted as witnesses
+against Flazeet and Rauchad.  What do you think of that?"
+
+"We go, eh?"
+
+"How can we?  What about Jean?"
+
+"Dane always go when chief call, all sam' wild goose, eh?"
+
+"I always have, Pete.  But it is different now.  Jean needs me.  She is
+in danger.  She may be cold.  She may be hungry.  She may be----"
+
+Dane did not finish his sentence, for Pete had suddenly stooped, and
+with a small stick was drawing a line upon the sand, east by west.
+
+"See," he said, "King dere," and he touched the ground on the south
+side of the line with the point of his stick.  He did the same on the
+north side, adding, "white woman dere.  King, white woman, eh?"
+
+"That's just it, Pete.  It's between Jean and the King, between love
+and duty.  I must think it out.  You sleep."
+
+For over an hour Dane paced up and down the shore, his mind rent by
+conflicting emotions.  He was in the King's service, and it was his
+duty to respond whenever called.  But why did not Davidson leave him
+alone now?  What right had he to send for him when he knew of the
+importance of his mission in searching for the missing girl?  At times
+he felt inclined to disobey the summons.  He could make a living in
+some other way.  It was not necessary for him to remain in the King's
+service.  Some one else could do the work.  But each time a voice
+whispered that such a course would not be honourable.  He had not yet
+taken his discharge, and so was not free.  How could he ever again face
+Davidson and the rangers?  They would consider him a traitor, and he
+well knew how they would discuss him around their camp fires.  To them
+his deflection from duty would be an unpardonable offence.  They would
+condone almost anything rather than disloyalty to the King.  Duty to
+him overshadowed every other matter, even that of the heart.
+
+As Dane paced up and down thinking of these things, his mother's words
+flashed into his mind.  "Be always loyal to God and the King above all
+things," she had impressed upon him.  "The King is God's anointed one,
+and he rules by divine right."  Dane had never doubted this, neither
+did he do so now.  But he had since learned that love, too, is a divine
+thing, and cannot lightly be disobeyed.  What is the King to me? he
+asked himself.  A mere name.  But Jean is a living reality.  The King
+lives in luxury, and has millions to look after his interests.  But
+Jean is now wandering somewhere in the wilderness, in great need, and
+with no one to help her.  Why should I not go to her first of all?  I
+can live without the King, but not without Jean.
+
+The more he thought, the fiercer became the battle.  Night had closed
+around him, and the steadily increasing nor'east wind sang the prelude
+of a coming storm.  Dane glanced at the moon riding high above the tops
+of the pointed trees.  He knew the meaning of its overcast appearance,
+and the circle which surrounded it.  There was no time to be lost.  He
+must decide at once.  But which should it be?  Pete was asleep, and the
+fire was low.  Mechanically he stooped and threw a few sticks upon the
+hot coals.  As the flames leaped up they illuminated the ground for
+some distance around.  They brought into clear relief the line made by
+the Indian upon the sand.  This primitive symbol arrested his
+attention, and a sudden fancy entered his mind.  Picking up a small
+stick, he wrote in the sand on the south of the line the word "King,"
+and on the north "Jean."  These he compared with critical eyes.
+
+"Same number of letters in each," he mused.  "One stands for duty, the
+other for love.  K-i-n-g, J-e-a-n," he spelled.  "They both sound good,
+and have a fine ring about them.  I am bound to both, and must decide
+now.  Oh, Lord, which shall it be!"
+
+The perspiration stood out in beads upon his forehead, so intense was
+his emotion.
+
+"I can't decide against Jean!" he groaned.  "And I can't be disloyal to
+the King!"
+
+Again his mother's words came to his mind.  "Be loyal to God and the
+King above all things."  How would she choose if she were in his place?
+Yes, he knew.  Not for an instant would she have hesitated.  For a few
+minutes he stood staring straight before him.  His face was pale, and
+his hands clenched hard, and his lips were firmly compressed.  At
+length he turned, walked over to where Pete was lying, and touched him
+upon the shoulder.  The Indian opened his eyes and looked around.
+
+"Come, Pete, it's time we were away."
+
+"Where, Dane?"
+
+"Down to the Fort."
+
+"Geeve up white woman, eh?"
+
+"Give her up?  No," Dane savagely replied.  "I'll never give her up.
+But don't ask me any more questions now."
+
+In a few minutes they were on their way, wind and tide being
+favourable.  They had gone but a mile, when rounding a bend a big camp
+fire upon the shore attracted their attention.  People were moving
+about, and these Dane surmised were the Loyalists Captain Leavitt had
+mentioned who were following in open boats.  Some were seated before
+the fire in a most dejected manner.  The cries of children reached him,
+accompanied by women's soothing words.  Dane had no desire to stop, for
+his own trouble was all that he could now endure.  So on the canoe
+sped, past the forlorn exiles, and forward to the Fort beyond.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+UNDER COVER OF NIGHT
+
+With a mingled feeling of anxiety and relief Jean watched the Loyalists
+and rangers march forth against the rebels.  She had no doubt as to the
+outcome of the undertaking, but she felt uneasy about her father, and
+how he would stand the journey.  On the other hand, she cherished the
+thought that on the morrow Dane would be with her, and all would be
+well.
+
+For a while she stood in the doorway, looking out upon the river over
+which the mantle of night had settled.  Mammy was crooning to the
+Indian baby before the fire.  It was an old darky lullaby, and the
+faithful servant had sung it to her when she was a child.  It brought
+back memories of her youthful days, which now seemed so long ago and
+like a dream.
+
+"Doan stan' dere, chile," Mammy at length reminded.  "Yo'll get yo'
+deff a col'."
+
+Jean turned, picked up a shawl and threw it over her head.
+
+"I am going to run over to see Mrs. Watson for a while," she said.
+"Danny was not well to-day, so I am anxious to know how he is getting
+along.  With her husband away, Mrs. Watson must be very lonely tonight."
+
+Mrs. Watson was greatly pleased to see the girl, and offered her a seat
+near the fire.
+
+"How is Danny?" Jean asked.
+
+"He is much better, I think, and is sleeping soundly," the mother
+replied, as she stole on tip-toe to the side of the rough cradle, and
+looked down fondly upon the little white face.  "John was so sorry to
+go away with the baby sick," she continued, coming back to the fire.
+"I do hope there will be no fighting.  Suppose some of our men should
+be killed!"
+
+"I have great confidence in the rangers, and Mr. Davidson told me that
+not likely there would be any fighting," Jean comforted.  "I believe he
+has some plan to entrap the rebels."
+
+"Let us hope that he is right," and Mrs. Watson sighed as she rose and
+placed a big stick upon the fire.  "How cold the nights are getting.  I
+wonder how we shall manage through the winter."
+
+"We have plenty of wood, anyway, Mrs. Watson, and so should keep warm.
+And we have enough meat to last us for months.  When the _Polly_ brings
+our supplies, we shall have an abundance of everything."
+
+"I wonder what can be keeping that boat, Jean.  We expected her before
+this.  I hope Captain Leavitt has not forgotten us."
+
+"He will come in time, never fear.  We should have news, too, from our
+old home.  How strange it is to be shut off for months with no
+communication with the great world beyond."
+
+"It is like being buried live, dear.  And just think of the long winter
+ahead, with snow and ice everywhere."
+
+"But we shall make our little world right here, Mrs. Watson.  I am
+looking forward to the winter.  We are going to have a cosy, happy
+time, and lots of fun at Christmas.  The children are talking about it
+already, and I know that wonderful presents are being made.  I have
+been working at mine for some time, and I suppose you will have
+something for Danny."
+
+Mrs. Watson smiled as she rose and took down a little basket from a
+rude shelf on the wall.  From this she brought forth several little
+home-made articles, and laid them in Jean's lap.
+
+"John is handy with his knife," she explained, "and made this boat,
+horse, and cart.  He is going to make something else when he gets time.
+I made that doll out of some odds and ends, and John carved the head.
+We shall also make some molasses candy of funny shapes.  Danny will be
+delighted.  Poor little fellow, he talks so much about Santa Claus, and
+the things he is going to get."
+
+"I am sure he will not be disappointed," Jean replied, as she examined
+each present.  "You and Mr. Watson have done remarkable work."
+
+For some time they sat and talked before the fire, and when Jean at
+last rose to go, Mrs. Watson looked at her with admiration.
+
+"This life certainly agrees with you," she said.  "I never saw you look
+better.  And you are the envy of all the girls, too.  I do not wonder
+at that."
+
+Jean blushed, for she knew very well to what the woman referred.
+
+"If they envy me, they never show it," was the cheery reply.  "They are
+as kind and sweet to me as can be."
+
+"They couldn't be anything else, dear.  They would give worlds to be
+engaged to a young man like Dane Norwood, and to wear such a brooch as
+the one he gave you.  All the girls look upon him as a hero."
+
+In order to hide her embarrassment, Jean kissed Mrs. Watson and left
+the house.  It was dark outside, but she did not mind this as she had
+often come that same way alone at night.  In fact, no sense of fear
+entered her mind, for she was thinking of the words she had Just heard.
+As she raised her right hand and touched the Love-Token at her throat,
+a feeling of joy thrilled her heart.  She recalled the day it had been
+given to her, and Dane's avowal of love.  To-morrow he would be with
+her again, and her happiness would be complete.
+
+She had gone but half way home when, without the slightest warning, she
+was seized by strong arms, a big hand was placed over her mouth, and
+she was borne bodily away.  Desperately she struggled to free herself,
+and made frantic attempts to call for help.  But her efforts were all
+in vain, for those entwining arms held her fast, and that hand still
+pressed firmly her mouth.  At length she ceased her struggles, for a
+great terror rendered her limp and helpless.  She knew that she was
+being carried through the bushes toward the river.  After that she
+remembered no more until she found herself lying in the bottom of a
+canoe which was being driven through the water at a great speed.  With
+a startled cry, she raised her head and looked around.  Dark though it
+was, she could dimly see the forms of two men swaying strongly at their
+paddles.
+
+"Where am I?" she asked in a trembling voice.  "What are you going to
+do with me?"
+
+For a few seconds there was intense silence.  Then the men spoke to
+each other, and although Jean could not understand what was said, she
+knew from the deep guttural words that her captors were Indians.  After
+a brief conversation, nothing more was said, and the girl had not the
+heart to question further.
+
+Her fears were now greatly increased.  She had heard of people being
+carried off by Indians, and tales of cruelty and insult worse than
+death lingered in her mind.  What was the fate in store for her?  Why
+had the Indians carried her off?  She had not harmed them.  The more
+she thought, the more puzzled she became.  She shivered as she sat
+crouched there.  The night was cold, and the wind piercing as it
+whipped across the water.  For protection she drew around her shoulders
+a blanket which had been placed over her body when she was unconscious.
+That the Indians must have done this was a faint ray of light in the
+darkness of her despair.  There must be some spark of feeling in their
+savage hearts, at any rate.  She longed to see their faces.  Were they
+hard and brutal, or did they exhibit some signs of friendliness?  She
+thought of Dane and Pete.  How soon they would hasten to her assistance
+if they knew of her trouble.  But how would they know where she was?
+She pictured the consternation of all, and the grief of her father and
+Dane upon their return home.  She knew how the latter would spare no
+efforts to find her.  And her poor father!  A moan escaped her lips as
+she thought of his agony of soul.  She looked wildly around, but only
+the blackness of night could she see.  Her eyes sought the stars.  How
+far away and cheerless were those twinkling lights.  What did they care
+for her troubles?
+
+And as she looked, there came into her mind the opening lines of one of
+the psalms, "Unto Thee lift I up mine eyes, O Thou that dwellest in the
+heavens."  How often she had heard those words at church, but never
+until now had they meant comfort and hope.  They were a light to her in
+her darkness.  There was One who could and would help and to Him alone
+she must now turn.  Bowing her head, she appealed to Him, and asked Him
+to watch over her, to keep her from all dangers, and to take her safely
+back home.
+
+A sense of security such as she had never before known possessed her.
+A great presence seemed near, overshadowing her, and giving her a new
+strength and courage.  Despair was replaced by hope, and she felt that
+she could face the future with confidence.  No longer did the stars
+seem cheerless.  Instead, they were eyes smiling down upon her, telling
+her to be brave, that the One who guided them in their course would not
+forsake her.  She determined not to lament.  She would show the Indians
+that a white girl could suffer and be strong.
+
+Slowly the dawn of a new day edged into the night, and the stars faded
+one by one.  Jean could see her captors now quite distinctly.  They
+were great stalwart natives, whose faces betrayed neither friendliness
+nor hostility.  They never even glanced at her, but seemed entirely
+bent upon their work.
+
+As the sun was about to appear above the tree-tops, the steersman
+headed the canoe for the shore.  After they had landed, a small fire
+was started, and a kettle containing cooked meat was placed over the
+flames.  Jean watched with interest all that was going on around her.
+This seemed to surprise the Indians, and when she pointed to the
+kettle, their faces relaxed into the faint semblance of a smile.
+Presently one of the men dipped a cup into the kettle and handed it to
+the girl.  She took it, not without some hesitation, and after it had
+cooled a little, placed it to her lips.  It tasted good, so she drank
+it all.  The Indian next thrust a sharpened stick into the kettle, and
+brought forth a piece of the partridge which he placed in her cup.
+This was tender, and Jean enjoyed it as much as she did the broth.  It
+brought a renewal of strength to her body, and she felt less weary.
+
+Breakfast ended, the Indians took their few dishes to the water, washed
+and scoured them with sand, and left them upon a big stone for the sun
+to dry.  The cleanliness of these natives was a surprise to Jean, and
+this touch of civilisation gave her some encouragement.  She had often
+heard of the uncouth Indians, but here were men who could put many
+white people to shame.
+
+For about two hours they remained there, and while the Indians dozed in
+the sun, Jean walked up and down the shore, or sat upon a rock looking
+out over the water.  It was a beautiful morning, with not a breath of
+wind astir, and the mirror-like river reflected the great trees along
+its border.  Where she was she had no idea.  That she was some distance
+inland she felt certain.  But how far?  Whither was she bound? and what
+were the Indians going to do with her?  Over and over again she vainly
+asked herself these questions as she gazed pensively out over the water.
+
+All through the morning they continued on their way, and only stopped
+once to rest and to eat a hurried meal.  Then on again, hour after
+hour, with nothing to break the monotony of vast forests crowding to
+the very shores.  The river was quite narrow now, and very crooked.
+This led Jean to imagine that they were nearing the headwaters of the
+St. John, for never once had she suspected that they were ascending one
+of its tributaries.  She was weary, and her body ached from her cramped
+position.  It seemed an age since she had last slept in her own little
+bed far away.  At times during the day her eyes had closed through
+drowsiness, but she had always aroused with a start.  She felt that she
+must keep awake until night, at least--and what then?
+
+At length, rounding a bend, her eyes rested upon two people standing
+upon the shore not far ahead.  That they were Indians, a man and a
+woman, she could easily tell.  Her captors saw them, too, so they ran
+the canoe close to where they were standing, and began to converse with
+them in the native language.  That they were talking about her Jean was
+fully aware, for at times the woman looked at her in a manner not at
+all unfriendly.  They seemed to be disputing about something, and their
+voices grew quite loud, and their words most emphatic.
+
+Presently the woman stepped up close to the canoe, reached out and
+touched the little brooch at the girl's throat.  "Su-wan!  Su-wan!" she
+exclaimed.  After examining it most carefully, she turned upon the
+captors and addressed them in an angry manner.  They merely grunted at
+what she said, and pushing the canoe from the shore, once more
+continued on their way.  Jean longed to know what had been said, and
+the meaning of the woman's sudden interest in the little arrow.  She
+looked back several times and saw the two still standing upon the
+shore.  When another bend hid them from view, a great loneliness swept
+upon her.  She felt that those two were friendly, and had rebuked her
+captors for what they were doing.
+
+For about another hour they pushed forward, the river becoming narrower
+all the time.  Suddenly before them appeared several Indian lodges,
+entirely covered with great strips of birch bark.  The place was
+evidently deserted, for no sign of life was to be seen.  Here the canoe
+was run ashore, and landing made for the night.
+
+Supper over, one of the Indians handed the captive a blanket, and
+motioned to the nearest lodge.  Jean understood his meaning, took the
+blanket, and did as she was bidden.  The lodge was empty, so placing
+the blanket upon the ground, she sat down and watched the Indians
+through the opening which served as a door.  A few minutes later her
+captors pushed off their canoe, stepped lightly on board and started
+down the river.  With fast-beating heart the girl watched them until
+they had disappeared from view.  Then a terrible feeling of desolation
+came upon her.  She was in the wilderness, alone, with untold dangers
+surrounding her.  Had they deserted her?  Had the Indians brought her
+there to perish?  The thought was horrible.  What had she done to
+deserve such a fate?  With straining eyes she watched the river, hoping
+to see the Indians return.  But night again shut down and they did not
+come.  Certain was she now that they had left her to die.  Burying her
+face in her hands, she sobbed out her grief, the first time since her
+capture.  She had tried to be brave, but in all her imaginings she had
+never dreamed of such a fate as this.
+
+And as she cowered there in the night, listening fearfully to every
+sound around her, the canoe, bearing her two captors stole noiselessly
+by, and sped onward through the darkness.  The grief and loneliness of
+the girl meant little to them.  Their work was done, they had received
+their reward, and far off around various camp fires they would relate
+to their own people the tale of the pale face captive girl.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+THE UNKNOWN QUANTITY
+
+While Jean was crouching there alone in the desolate lodge, several men
+were gathered around a small fire over half a mile down stream.  They
+had been drinking, and their words were loud and coarse.  Seth Lupin
+was the leader, and he was in great spirits.  Three of his companions
+were the slashers who had attacked Dane Norwood at Portland Point, and
+they, too, seemed much pleased.
+
+These brutes in human forms firmly believed that they were safe from
+all prying eyes, and that their words of lust and revenge were lost
+amidst the forest depths.  Little did they realise that not far away
+the form of an Indian was pressed close to the ground, that keen ears
+were listening to every word, and that flashing eyes were watching
+their slightest movements.
+
+When, however, Lupin at length stepped into the canoe lying on the
+shore, and began to paddle rapidly up the river, the prostrate Indian
+rose to his feet, and glided swiftly among the trees, straight for the
+lodge where Jean was crouching.  As the canoe touched the shore a short
+distance below the encampment, the native was silently standing near a
+large spruce tree.  No sooner had Lupin landed, than like a catapult
+the Indian was upon him.  With a wild gurgling cry of fear the
+surprised man reeled back, and tried to ward off the attack.  But his
+efforts were all in vain, for the Indian's fingers were upon his throat
+with a vise-like grip.  Notwithstanding his frantic struggles, he was
+borne steadily to the ground, and there he lay with his assailant
+perched upon his body, and his fingers still clutching hard.
+
+Seth Lupin had run his course.  He knew no mercy, so no mercy was
+vouchsafed to him.  In his diabolical mind he had planned the ruin of
+an innocent girl.  But in his blind passion he had forgotten that the
+Great Avenger of the just uses many strange instruments in defending
+His own.  He, like others, had left out of consideration the Unknown
+Quantity.  The mighty forest had witnessed numerous tragedies, but none
+more swift and sure than the one this night on the bank of that narrow
+inland stream.
+
+Within the lodge Jean heard that wild cry of fear, and it caused her to
+spring to her feet in terror.  Her eyes stared out into the night, and
+unconsciously she lifted her right hand and struck at the blackness as
+if to drive it away.  Listening intently, she could hear fearful sounds
+as of a desperate struggle, and then all was still.  What did it mean?
+What unknown horrors were surrounding her?  With cold clenched hands,
+and body rigid with terror, she strained her eyes into the darkness.
+She imagined that she could see forms creeping stealthily toward her,
+and the faintest outlines of great tree trunks were to her hideous
+monsters.
+
+And as she looked and waited, something did appear suddenly before her.
+With a cry she started back, and raised both hands to defend herself.
+But a voice at once reassured her, causing her heart to leap with hope.
+
+"White woman safe now," it said.  "Injun tak' care white woman.  Come."
+
+"Who are you?" Jean asked in a trembling voice.
+
+"Me Injun Sam.  White woman no 'fraid Sam.  Come."
+
+"Will you save me?" the girl asked.  "Will you take me home?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Bimeby.  Come."
+
+A feeling of security now swept upon Jean, so leaving the lodge she
+followed the Indian, who at once led her away from the river into the
+forest.  It was difficult to see her guide, and so hard was the walking
+that she often stumbled, and several times fell.  At length the Indian
+took her by the arm.
+
+"Sam help white woman, eh?" he queried.
+
+"Thank you," Jean panted.  "You are very good."
+
+With the native's assistance, she was thus enabled to make much better
+progress.  How strong he was!  He kept her from falling, and lifted her
+bodily at times over a root or a fallen log.  And he was gentle, too,
+stopping to rest as they climbed some hill, and speaking words of
+encouragement.
+
+"White woman no strong," he said.  "White woman all sam' Injun bimeby."
+
+To Jean it seemed as if their journey through the forest would never
+end.  She was so tired, and her feet very sore.  Gradually her strength
+and courage weakened, and her steps lagged.  At length she stopped, and
+her body trembled.  She could go no farther.  She just wanted to lie
+down and rest.  Then she tottered, and would have fallen had not the
+Indian caught her in his powerful arms.
+
+"White woman all sam' babby," he said.  "Injun tote white woman, eh?"
+
+"No, no, you must not carry me!" Jean protested.  "I am too heavy."
+
+The Indian's only reply was a grunt of amusement, as he started forth
+with the girl in his arms.  What a tower of strength he seemed as he
+moved through the forest and the night.  Not once did he stumble, and
+his going was almost noiseless.  Jean wondered where he was taking her.
+But she did not worry, for this native inspired her with confidence,
+and she firmly believed that he was really her friend.  Anyway, she was
+too tired to think.  She only longed to lay down her weary body and
+aching head and rest.
+
+The Indian did not have to carry her far, for suddenly a light pierced
+the darkness, and in a few minutes they were by a camp-fire.  A woman
+was standing there, and Jean recognised her immediately as the one she
+had met that afternoon, and who had examined the little arrow-brooch.
+She glanced quickly at her rescuer, and knew him, too.  A sigh of
+relief escaped her lips.  Never were friends more welcome.
+
+Near the fire was a brush lean-to, and gently the Indian laid the girl
+down upon some soft furs and blankets.  He smiled with satisfaction as
+he did this, and so overcome was Jean with gratitude, that she caught
+his great rough brown hand in both of hers, and held it fast.  Tears
+were in her eyes as she looked upon his honest face.
+
+"Thank you, oh, thank you," she murmured.  "You have saved my life.
+How can I ever repay you?"
+
+"Sam no want pay," was the quiet reply.  "Sam glad save white woman."
+
+The woman now came and knelt by the girl's side.  She looked into her
+eyes, stroked her tangled hair, and touched the Love-Charm at her
+throat.
+
+"Poor babby!  Poor babby!" she crooned.  "Hard tam, eh? white man bad,
+ugh!"
+
+"Why do you say 'white man'?" Jean asked in surprise.  "Indians carried
+me away.  You saw them this afternoon."
+
+Suddenly a suspicion flashed into her mind, which caused her to sit
+bolt upright.  Did a white man have anything to do with it?  And was
+that man Seth Lupin?  But why had she not seen him?  Then she thought
+of that wild cry of despair outside the lodge, which had caused her
+such terror.  She looked into the Indian woman's face.
+
+"Tell me," she said.  "Was it Seth Lupin?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Seth.  Bad.  Ugh!"
+
+"Where is he now?"
+
+The woman merely shook her head, and spoke a few rapid words to her
+husband.  She then turned to Jean and placed a light hand upon her
+shoulder.
+
+"No mind white man now.  Babby tired."
+
+Jean smiled as the woman pressed her gently back upon the soft furs,
+and then stooped to take off her shoes.  The latter were torn, and her
+feet were sore.  It felt good to lie there, and to have some one attend
+to her needs.  When the shoes had been removed, and a pair of soft
+moccasins placed upon her feet, she felt more comfortable.
+
+"Why are you so good to me?" she asked.  "You are just like a mother."
+
+The woman only smiled in reply, and placed extra rugs about the girl.
+She then turned and cut a slice from a piece of moose meat.  Through
+this she thrust a sharp-pointed stick and held it over the glowing
+coals.  When it was browned to her satisfaction, she sprinkled it with
+a little salt, let it cool for a few minutes, and then handed it to her
+guest.
+
+"Eat, eh?" she queried.  "Good."
+
+Jean smiled as she took the meat in her fingers and tasted it.  She was
+hungry, and the steak was tender.  It seemed so strange to be lying
+there in the wilderness, eating in such a primitive manner.  She
+thought of her old home in Connecticut, and how carefully her mother
+had trained her.  She remembered how when a child she had been rebuked
+because she had taken a piece of meat in her fingers.  But it was the
+custom here in the wild, and she rather enjoyed it.  And as she ate,
+the two Indians watched her with much interest.  Such a novelty did she
+seem to them, that she could not refrain from smiling.
+
+"Am I eating right?" she asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha," the woman replied.  "Babby all sam' Injun bimeby."
+
+"Why do you call me baby?  I am very big."
+
+But the woman shook her head.
+
+"White woman no beeg, no strong, no hunt, no feesh, no pack; all sam'
+babby."
+
+"Oh, I see," and Jean's eyes twinkled.  "I know I cannot hunt, fish, or
+pack.  But you will teach me, will you not?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Injun teach babby bimeby.  Sleep now."
+
+Jean did feel drowsy, and the bed was so soft and comfortable.  For a
+while she watched the friendly Indians as they sat near the fire, and
+talked low to each other.  It all seemed like a wonderful dream--the
+leaping flames, the dancing sparks, and the gentle sighing of the wind
+in the tree-tops.  Her thoughts drifted away to her father and Dane.
+How anxious they must be about her.  But the Indians would take her
+home, and all would again be well.  What a story she would have to tell
+of her capture and experience in the wilderness.  How could she ever
+repay her rescuers for what they had done for her?  She tried to think
+of what she might give them.  But her thoughts became confused, and she
+drifted oft into a peaceful sleep with the problem unsettled.
+
+Occasionally the Indians turned and watched the girl.  When they saw
+that she was asleep, they looked at each other and smiled.  Then they
+brought forth their blackened clay pipes, which they filled and
+lighted.  For a time they smoked in silence and contentment.  At length
+they began to converse softly in their own language.  That they were
+talking about the sleeping girl was evident, for several times they
+glanced in her direction.  Once Sam ceased in the midst of his talk,
+leaped to his feet, and clutched an imaginary object with both hands.
+He then squatted down again, and continued his tale of the tragedy that
+night by the shore of the forest stream.
+
+When he was through he rose to his feet, picked up his musket, and
+looked again at the girl.  He then plunged into the night and the
+forest, leaving his wife to keep guard alone by the fire.  The dawn of
+a new day was breaking when he returned and threw two snared partridges
+down upon the ground for his wife to prepare for breakfast.  But
+something more important than birds had kept him abroad that night.
+His face was serious, and his eyes glowed with anxiety and anger as he
+laid aside his gun, and spoke a few commanding words to his wife.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+LOYAL FRIENDS
+
+It was broad daylight when Jean opened her eyes and looked curiously
+around.  It was a still, frosty morning.  The sun sifted down through
+the branches of the trees, and formed a fantastic net-work of light and
+shadow upon the ground.  A deep silence prevailed, and as the girl
+looked dreamily at the lordly pines, birches, and maples, her eyes
+wandered far up among their overhanging branches.  They reminded her of
+some majestic cathedral, with stately pillars and crowning arches,
+pictures of which she had at times seen.  She remembered how her father
+had once told her that the forest was the original cathedral, and that
+along the silent woody aisles primitive people used to worship the
+Great Spirit.  She understood now, as never before, how the designs for
+the first cathedral had been copied from the forest.
+
+Lowering her eyes, they rested upon the Indian woman kneeling before
+the fire.  It was a fascinating scene, and in keeping with the solemn
+grandeur of the place.  There was the humble worshipper at the
+altar-fire, offering her devotions in a simple reverent manner.  Jean
+smiled at this fancy, for she was certain that the idea of worship was
+not at all in the woman's mind.  She was merely cooking the partridges
+her husband had brought in several hours before.
+
+"Good morning," Jean at length accosted.
+
+The woman turned quickly, and rose to her feet.  She smiled as she
+stood and watched the girl lying there with her hair tossed in rich
+profusion over cheeks and shoulders.
+
+"Plenty sleep, eh?" she asked.
+
+"Yes, I have had a great sleep, and am much rested.  It is very
+comfortable here."
+
+"Hungry, eh?"
+
+"Why, I believe I am," and Jean laughed.  "What are you cooking?"
+
+"Bird.  Sam ketch'm.  Good.  Smell'm?"
+
+"I certainly do, and it makes my mouth water."
+
+The woman at once stooped, dipped a cup into the pot which was
+simmering over the coals, and handed it to Jean.
+
+"Soup.  Good," she said.
+
+"It is good," Jean agreed after she had tasted it.  "This will make me
+strong.  You are a fine cook.  What is your name?"
+
+"Kitty."
+
+"Kitty what?"
+
+"Kitty Sam."
+
+"Is that all?"
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"But you have an Indian name, have you not?"
+
+"Injun name long.  Babby no spik Injun name."
+
+After Jean had finished her breakfast, she felt much refreshed.  She
+washed herself at a little brook which babbled through the forest, and
+arranged as well as she could her tangled hair.  One little pool served
+as Nature's mirror, and in this she could see her face and the brooch
+at her throat.  She again recalled the happy day it had been given to
+her.  How long ago that seemed, and she wondered where Dane was now.
+No doubt he was frantically searching for her, his heart filled with
+grief and fear.  She must get home as soon as possible, for she knew
+how her father's heart must be nearly broken.  She would get the
+Indians to take her back at once.  But when she mentioned this upon her
+return to the lean-to, Kitty shook her head.
+
+"No go now," she said.  "Cold bimeby.  Snow come.  Ribber freeze."
+
+"Will we go then?" Jean eagerly asked.
+
+"Mebbe, Sam come back soon.  Sam know."
+
+"Where is Sam now?"
+
+"Sam dere," and she motioned off toward the river.  "Sam watch white
+man.  Sam track'm all sam' bear.  White man no see Sam."
+
+"What white man?  Isn't he dead?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, Seth dead.  More white man."
+
+"What, are there others?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Bad!  Ugh!  Hunt babby.  No find babby.  White man mad."
+
+"Will they come here?"  A new fear had now come into Jean's heart.  So
+there were other men after her!  Who were they?  But she had confidence
+in her dusky friends, and believed that they would save her.
+
+"White man come, mebbe," the Indian replied.  "No ketch Injun, no ketch
+babby.  All gone."
+
+"Where shall we go?"
+
+"Way off," and Kitty waved her hand to the right.  "Beeg wood, see?"
+
+"And you will take me there?  But I want to go home."
+
+"A-ha-ha, go home dat way, bimeby," and she pointed westward.  "Beeg
+ribber, Wu-las-tukw."
+
+"I never heard of that river.  Where is it?"
+
+"Way off dere.  Wat you call'm?"
+
+"The St. John?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Injun call'm 'Wu-las-tukw,' beeg ribber."
+
+"And you will take me there?"
+
+"Bimeby, mebbe.  Sam know."
+
+They were seated near the fire during this conversation, and the Indian
+woman was busy with a deer-skin garment.  It was a warm looking jacket,
+and she was sewing on an extra string of bright-coloured beads.  When
+this had been accomplished to her satisfaction, she held it forth for
+Jean's inspection.
+
+"Good coat," she said.  "Try'm on, eh?"
+
+Jean at once stood up, and when she had slipped on the jacket, the
+Indian woman viewed her with pleasure.
+
+"Wear'm, eh?" she queried.  "Warm?"
+
+"Indeed it is," Jean replied.  "Is this for me?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Keep babby warm.  Kitty mak' more bimeby.  Babby no cold."
+
+A mistiness came into the girl's eyes as she stood there.  The kindness
+of this woman affected her deeply.
+
+"Why are you so good to me?" she asked.  "You never saw me until
+yesterday, and yet you are doing so much for me.  I don't understand."
+
+"Kitty tell, eh?"
+
+"I wish you would," Jean replied as she seated herself upon the rugs
+and furs.  "I want to know."
+
+The Indian woman threw a couple of sticks upon the fire, and then faced
+the girl.  She reached out and touched the little arrow-brooch with the
+forefinger of her right hand.
+
+"Dane geeve babby dat, eh?" she asked.
+
+"Why, yes, how did you know that?"
+
+"Injun know much," and the woman smiled as she spoke.  "Injun know
+Dane; Dane know Pete.  See?"
+
+"Did Pete tell you about this?" and Jean touched the arrow.
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Pete tell Injun.  Pete, Sam, all sam' mamma.  See?"
+
+"What, are Pete and Sam brothers?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, all sam' mamma."
+
+A new light now began to dawn upon Jean's mind, and she understood
+certain things which had been puzzling her since yesterday afternoon.
+She also recalled Dane's words when he gave her the brooch.  "It is
+Love's-Charm," he had said, "and it may mean more to you than you now
+imagine."  She realised how much it had meant to her, and no doubt it
+had saved her from a terrible fate.
+
+"You knew me by this?" she asked, again touching the arrow.
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Kitty see quick.  Kitty know Dane geeve babby arrow.  Pete
+tell Injun."
+
+"Didn't those Indians who carried me away from home know?  Didn't Pete
+tell them?"
+
+"Dem bad Injun.  Bah!  Porkeepine!  Fight King George!"
+
+"What do you mean by porcupine?"
+
+"Micmac; all sam' slasher.  Fight King George."
+
+"But all the Indians are not rebels."
+
+"No, no.  Plenty good Injun no fight King George.  All sam' Dane."
+
+"You have known Dane quite a while, I suppose!" Jean asked, while a
+conscious flush stole into her cheeks.
+
+"A-ha-ha, long tam.  Dane leetle babby, so beeg," and she spread out
+her hand, palm downward, about two feet from the ground.  "Kitty know
+Dane; Kitty know Dane mamma."
+
+"What, you know his mother?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Good woman.  Dead now."
+
+"Do you know his father?"
+
+The woman turned suddenly toward the fire without replying.  Jean
+noticed this, and wondered.  She also remembered Dane's peculiar manner
+when she had mentioned his father.  Her interest and curiosity were now
+aroused more than ever.  There must be some mystery connected with
+Dane's father, she felt certain.  She longed to know, and hoped to find
+out something from this woman.  There was no opportunity, however, just
+then as Sam appeared unexpectedly before them.  He was much excited,
+and addressed a few rapid words to his wife.  Jean rose to her feet,
+her face pale with fear.
+
+"Are the white men after me?" she asked in a trembling voice.
+
+"A-ha-ha." Sam replied.  "White man chase babby."
+
+"Why?"
+
+Jean knew why, but she wanted to hear what the Indian had to say.
+
+"White man find Seff dead by ribber.  White man act funny, much 'fraid.
+Bimeby find babby gone.  White man much mad."
+
+He paused, picked up his musket which he had laid aside, and examined
+the priming.
+
+"Did you see them?" Jean asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Sam see'm.  White man no see Sam."
+
+"Are they coming this way?"
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"Will you shoot them?"
+
+"Sam shoot bimeby, mebbe.  White man no ketch babby."
+
+Of this Jean had no doubt.  What a tower of strength this Indian seemed
+to her just then.  The day before she had given up all hope of earthly
+aid, yet here was one, and a native at that, who was ready to protect
+her.  How wonderful it all appeared.  And it was against men of her own
+race he would defend her.  Of the savage Indian she had heard and read
+much.  But here were two of the despised race putting white men to
+shame.
+
+In the meantime the Indian woman had been very busy.  She had gathered
+the few cooking utensils together, and was now rolling up the blankets
+and skins.  Presently Sam assisted her, and in a remarkably short time
+they were ready for their journey.
+
+Jean begged to be allowed to carry something, but Sam shook his head as
+he pointed to her shoulders and feet.
+
+"No strong," he said.  "Feet leetle.  Bimeby Injun pack babby, mebbe,
+eh?"
+
+"Oh, I hope not," the girl smilingly replied.  "I must walk to-day."
+
+With their packs strapped upon their backs, Sam picked up his musket,
+and Kitty the axe.  With a final glance around to see that nothing was
+overlooked, Sam led the way among the trees, with Jean following, and
+Kitty bringing up in the rear.
+
+All through the afternoon they pressed forward along the silent forest
+ways.  Occasionally the Indians halted that the girl might rest.  Their
+care of her was remarkable, and to them she seemed like a mere child.
+It was quite evident that they had taken her to their hearts, and that
+nothing was too good for her.
+
+Jean was surprised at herself for standing the journey so well.
+Although very tired at times, she never once complained.  She was not
+accustomed to moccasins, and the roots and stones bruised her feet.  Up
+hill and down they moved, across valleys, swamps, and wild meadows.
+There was no trail, but Sam led the way with an unerring instinct.  He
+chose the smoothest spots, but even these were hard for the girl's
+tender feet.  Very thankful was she when at length he halted by the
+side of a little forest lake, and unstrapped his pack.
+
+"Camp here," he announced.  "Plenty water."
+
+Jean dropped upon the ground, weary almost to the point of exhaustion.
+Her body ached, and her head throbbed with a dull pain.  But after she
+had rested a while, and eaten the supper which Kitty speedily prepared,
+she felt better.  Sam erected a cosy lean-to, and when the rugs and
+blankets had been spread out upon the fresh, fragrant spruce boughs, he
+insisted that Jean should occupy the choice place near the fire.  So
+lying there, she watched her kind-hearted companions as they moved
+about making ready for the night.
+
+It was a beautiful spot where their camp was built.  The little lake,
+covered with a thin coating of ice, mirrored the great trees in its
+glassy surface.  It was one of Nature's gems tucked away in the heart
+of the mighty forest, known only to the wandering Indians, and their
+feathered and furry kindred of the wild.
+
+As day faded, and night cast its mantle over forest and lake, the stars
+appeared and twinkled down their welcome.  As Jean watched them, she
+thought of the night she had been stolen from home, and how cold and
+cheerless those same stars had seemed.  She also recalled the prayer
+she had uttered in her distress, and the sense of peace which had come
+upon her.  In what a remarkable manner her prayer had been answered.  A
+feeling of intense gratitude welled up in her heart, and almost
+unconsciously she began to sing an old familiar hymn.
+
+  The Lord's my Shepherd, I'll not want,
+    He makes me down to lie
+  In pastures green; He leadeth me
+    The quiet waters by.
+
+Her voice was not strong, but exceptionally sweet.  Her singing
+attracted the Indians, who left their work, and squatting near her
+side, listened with rapt attention.  Jean, seeing their interest,
+paused at the end of the second verse, and smiled.
+
+"Do you like singing?" she asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha," Kitty replied.  "More, eh?"
+
+  Yea, though I walk through death's dark vale,
+    Yet will I fear no ill;
+  For Thou art with me; and Thy rod
+    And staff me comfort still.
+
+When Jean had ended singing this verse there was a mistiness in her
+eyes.  How wonderfully true were those words in her own case.  The
+Shepherd had been with her through death's dark vale, He had comforted
+her, and led her to this quiet woodland lake.
+
+"Babby seek?" Sam asked, noticing her emotion.
+
+"No, not sick, but very thankful," was the quiet reply.  "My Great
+Father in heaven has sent you to save me and to take me home.  Do you
+know Him?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, me know'm.  White man tell Injun long tam ago."
+
+"Missionary?" Jean asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Long black robe.  Cross, all sam' dis," and Sam made the
+form of the symbol of salvation with his forefinger.
+
+Jean knew that he referred to some French missionary who had visited
+the country.
+
+"And he taught you about the Great Father?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Long black robe come up Wu-las-tukw in canoe.  Sam no
+forget.  Sing more, eh?"
+
+Jean did as she was requested, and sang several of the hymns she
+remembered.  At times she glanced at her dusky companions.  Their eyes
+shone with pleasure, mingled with admiration as they watched the
+reclining girl, and listened to the words of hope and comfort.  They
+were but unlettered natives of the wild, yet their hearts responded
+readily to the concord of sweet sounds.  Often the good lying in such
+hearts needs but a gentle fanning to burst forth in the beauty of love,
+service, and devotion.  Little did Jean realise the influence she was
+exerting upon those two friendly Indians in that quiet lodge in the
+depths of the great forest.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+THE SMOKE SIGNAL
+
+When Jean awoke the next morning she was stiff and sore.  She longed to
+stay there all day and rest.  But Kitty informed her that they must
+move on at once, for not only were the slashers hot upon their trail,
+but that a storm was coming, and they would need better shelter than
+their rude brush lean-to could give.  In a short time Sam returned and
+reported that their pursuers were floundering about in a valley several
+miles away.  They had evidently lost the trail, and it would take them
+some time to find it again.
+
+"Will they keep on following us?" Jean asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha," Sam replied.  "Stop bimeby, mebbe.  See?" and he laid his
+hand upon his musket.
+
+"Will you shoot them?"
+
+"Mebbe.  Bimeby."
+
+"Oh, you mustn't!" and Jean shuddered.  "That would be murder."
+
+"White man kill Injun all sam' dog.  Ugh!"
+
+"Would they?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Sam know."
+
+"You killed one white man, remember.  But you must not kill any more.
+Will you promise me?"
+
+"Sam no say.  See bimeby."
+
+After Jean had eaten a hurried breakfast, the few belongings were again
+packed up, and once more they started forward.  The morning was cold,
+and the trees were swaying and creaking like great masts at sea beneath
+a whipping wind.  Jean shivered as she bravely and patiently followed
+Sam through that trackless wild.  All through the morning they toiled
+onward, and the afternoon was waning when the rain swept down upon
+them.  It froze as it fell, and ere long the ground was covered with a
+coating of ice.  At times Jean slipped and would have fallen but for
+Kitty, who caught her by the arm and helped her over the rough and
+treacherous places.  The clothing of the three wayfarers soon became
+stiff with the frozen rain, and resembled ancient armor.  But still
+they pressed onward, and night was again shutting down when another and
+a larger lake burst suddenly into view.
+
+On the shore of this fine body of water were several Indian lodges,
+completely deserted.  To Jean they looked cold and forbidding, so very
+glad was she when Sam led the way to a dense thicket of young fir and
+spruce trees.  Nestling in their midst was the cosiest lodge Jean had
+ever beheld.  In fact, it consisted of a couple of lean-tos, facing
+each other, between which was an open space a few feet in width.  This
+latter served as the fire-place, the smoke ascending through the
+opening above.
+
+In a short time a bright fire was burning, and Jean comfortably
+ensconced upon the blankets and furs.  Not a drop of rain touched her,
+for the roof of this abode was covered with long strips of birch bark.
+This, so Kitty explained, would be their home until the streams froze
+hard enough to carry them.  How pleasant it was to Jean to lie there
+and rest.  She felt that she could not endure another day of travel
+through the forest.  She had been tired the night before, but it was
+little compared to now.  Every bone in her body ached, and her feet
+were sore and blistered.  It was good to lie there listening to the
+rain beating its tat-too upon the roof, and watching the smoke
+scurrying upwards.  She could hear the wind howling among the trees,
+and vainly striving to force an entrance into their snug retreat.
+
+Nearby Sam had his cache among the lower branches of four spruce trees,
+and high enough from the ground to be safe from prowling animals.  From
+this he brought down some provisions, including a piece of moose meat,
+tea, and a little flour.  With the latter Kitty baked several bannocks
+before the fire, which tasted especially good to Jean after her sole
+diet of meat.  These were eaten with the honey of wild bees which the
+Indians had gathered during the summer.
+
+"These are good," Jean remarked, as she helped herself to a second
+bannock.  "Where did you get this honey?"
+
+Kitty laughed as she pointed to her husband, who was dragging in
+several large sticks.
+
+"Sam get'm last summer.  Bees bite Sam, see?" and she put her hands to
+her face and neck.  "Sam head beeg.  Hurt."  Again she laughed at the
+recollection of her husband's swollen face.
+
+When Sam had finished his task of bringing in the wood, he squatted
+before the fire and ate his supper.  Then he brought forth a plug of
+tobacco, whittled off several slices with his hunting-knife, filled his
+blackened pipe, and lighted it with a small brand from the fire.  His
+wife did the same, and soon the two were smoking in great contentment.
+Jean, watching, thought how little it took to satisfy such people.
+Their belongings were few, and their places of abode many.  She longed
+to know more about these two Indians, why they were living apart from
+their tribe, and whether they had any children.  They must have mingled
+with white people, for they readily understood everything she said,
+although they themselves spoke in broken English.
+
+She thought of these things the next morning as she and Kitty were
+comfortably seated near the fire.  The rain had ceased during the
+night, the clouds had rolled away, and the ice-laden trees, touched by
+the sun, shone and sparkled with surpassing loveliness.  It seemed like
+fairy-land to Jean when she first looked forth that morning, and she
+exclaimed with delight.  From the lake to the high peak off toward the
+west millions of icy diamonds had caught the bright beams, and were
+scintillating their glory far and wide.
+
+"I never saw anything like it" Jean told Kitty.  "Have you seen it?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, me see'm," the Indian woman replied without the least sign of
+enthusiasm.  "Kitty see plenty.  Trail bad.  Ice heavy.  Branch hang
+down.  Bad.  Ugh!"
+
+"Perhaps it will keep back those men who are following us," Jean
+suggested.  "They may not be able to get through the forest."
+
+Kitty shook her head as she looked out upon the lake.
+
+"Ice no stop white man.  Trees beeg, no ice, trail good.  Sam come
+bimeby.  Sam know."
+
+"Where is Sam now?"
+
+"Sam watch slashers.  Sam gone long tam.  Come bimeby."
+
+"What will he do if the white men come here?"
+
+"White man no come."
+
+The woman rose to her feet and looked off to the high peak in the
+distance.  Then she sat down near the opening where she could watch the
+hill without too much trouble.  Jean wondered at this, although she
+made no comment.  No doubt she would understand in time.
+
+"Have you lived long in this place?" she asked.
+
+"Two, t'ree winter, mebbe."
+
+"Where do you live in the summer?"
+
+"Many place; Wá-sit-um-ó-wek; Wu-las-tukw; Beeg Lake, some tam."
+
+"Where is Big Lake?"
+
+"Way dere," and Kitty motioned westward.  "Go dere bimeby."
+
+"You often meet white people, I suppose?"
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"Do you and Sam always travel alone?  Are there other Indians around
+here?"
+
+"Plenty Injun sometam'.  See'm bimeby, mebbe."  Again she glanced
+toward the distant hill.
+
+"Have you any children?" Jean asked.
+
+"No babby now.  Babby all die."
+
+"But Pete has children, has he not?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Pete plenty babby."
+
+"Why, then, did he bring his baby to me when its mother died?  Why did
+not you take care of it?"
+
+Kitty looked quizzically at the girl before replying.
+
+"Dane no tell, eh?" she queried.
+
+"Tell what?"
+
+"Why Pete leave babby."
+
+"No, he never told me.  Perhaps he didn't know."
+
+"Pete know.  Pete find out 'bout King George peep'l.  See?"
+
+Noticing the puzzled expression upon the girl's face, the woman smiled.
+
+"Pete no sure 'bout white peep'l," she continued.  "Pete leave leetle
+babby.  All good t' leetle babby.  Pete trust King George peep'l.  Pete
+no forget."
+
+A new light now came into Jean's mind, and she partly understood why
+the baby had been left at the settlement.  It was simply a plan on
+Pete's part to learn whether the Loyalists were worthy of his trust and
+special attention.  Never for an instant had she thought of such a
+thing.  When that little waif had been brought to her home that night
+of the wild storm, she and old Mammy had taken it to their hearts, and
+had done all they could for its welfare.  But how much it had meant to
+her.  Pete had spread the word abroad among his own people, and because
+of the care of a little Indian child, she herself had been saved from a
+terrible fate.  She thought of the arrow Dane had given her.  She knew
+that it had a great deal to do with her rescue, but not all.  The care
+of the baby was back of that.  But did Dane know?  Had he any idea that
+the baby and the arrow were so closely connected?  Was that the meaning
+of his words when he had given her the arrow?  Did he think that some
+day she might need protection, and that the Love-Token would prove of
+great value?
+
+"Dane told you about this, didn't he?" and she touched the brooch.
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Dane tell Injun."
+
+"And you knew me by this?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Injun know all sam' white woman take care babby."
+
+She paused abruptly, sprang to her feet, and pointed excitedly to the
+high hill.
+
+"See!  See!" she cried.  "Pu-kut!  Pu-kut!"
+
+Jean hastened to her side, and her eyes followed the woman's
+outstretched arm.  Up on the dazzling, sun-crowned peak a wreath of
+smoke was ascending beyond the tops of the highest trees.  It rose
+straight into the air like a tall shaft ere it spread and fell in wavy,
+fairy-like curls, and slowly disappeared from view.
+
+"What is it?" the girl asked, feeling certain that it meant something
+important.
+
+"Slashers come," Kitty explained.  "Sam call Injun."
+
+"Now I understand," Jean replied, while a great fear smote her heart.
+"The slashers are near, and Sam wants help; is that it?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Smoke call Injun."
+
+"Will the Indians see it?"
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"Will they know what it means?"
+
+"Injun know."
+
+"But suppose there are no Indians near?"
+
+"Plenty Injun see pu-kut.  Beeg hill.  Injun know."
+
+"Will the Indians come?"
+
+"Bimeby."
+
+"In time to save us from the slashers?"
+
+"Mebbe.  Sam come bimeby.  Sam know."
+
+Curiously and anxiously Jean watched that signal flaring from the high
+hill.  She asked Kitty many questions, and learned how in times of
+danger the Indians sent up the smoke-wreath from certain hill tops.  At
+night a blazing fire was used, and in this manner news was carried many
+miles in a remarkably short time.
+
+Several hours wore slowly away as the two anxious women kept watch upon
+the hill.  When at length the smoke ceased to ascend.  Kitty's face
+brightened.
+
+"Sam come soon," she said.  "Injun come bimeby."
+
+"How do you know?" Jean asked.
+
+"Injun mak' pu-kut.  Injun say 'come.'"
+
+"Did the Indians reply by sending up smoke?  Is that what you mean?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Sam come soon.  Injun bimeby."
+
+And in this Kitty was right, for in less than an hour Sam appeared
+before them.  He smiled as he entered the lodge, laid aside his musket,
+and helped himself to some meat from a pot near the fire.  As he ate,
+he told about the slashers.  They were not far away, and were waiting
+to make the attack that night.  How he learned this he did not explain,
+and Jean asked no questions.  It was sufficient for her that he knew,
+and she had great respect for his knowledge of the ways of the wild,
+and his practical common sense.
+
+Slowly the afternoon edged into evening.  The Indians were late in
+coming, and often Sam cast anxious glances along the shore of the lake.
+Several times he made short journeys into the forest, lest the enemy
+should come upon them unawares.  Jean, too, was greatly agitated.
+Suppose the slashers should arrive, what could Sam do alone?  What
+would become of her?  She recalled Dane's words that night at Portland
+Point when he had saved her from Seth Lupin.  "Do you know how
+beautiful you are?" he had asked.  "If you don't, then you are not
+aware of your danger.  That villain, Lupin, knows of your beauty, so he
+followed you here.  The slashers and others will soon know, too, and I
+might not always be on hand."  That was months ago, but she remembered
+every word.  She thought then that Dane had spoken rather plainly, and
+had told him so.  But she knew now how well he understood the risks she
+would run, and that he was speaking for her welfare.  Oh, if Dane and
+the rangers were with her in the forest how soon they would put the
+slashers to rout, and take her home.  But they were far off, so her
+only hope lay in the arrival of the Indians, from where she did not
+know.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+TEMPERED PUNISHMENT
+
+Darkness came, and with it the long-expected Indians.  They were a
+score in all, and they glided like spectres along the shore and up to
+the lodge in the thicket.  It was a joyous greeting they received as
+they gathered around the fire, and for a few minutes there was a
+regular babel of tongues, although Jean did not understand a word that
+was being said.  At length the visitors ceased talking and listened to
+Sam, who spoke with great earnestness, and motioned at times eastward.
+That he was speaking about the slashers, and why he had sent for
+assistance, Jean was certain.
+
+These newcomers were a sturdy and formidable band of hunters.  They
+were of powerful physique, in the prime of life, and their faces
+inspired Jean with hope and confidence.  They were clad in buckskins,
+and armed with muskets, hatchets, and hunting-knives.  They were
+warriors now, ready for the fray with the slashers, their enemies of
+years.  They were King George's men, as well, true and loyal.  Several
+of them had the proud distinction of kneeling at Fort Howe five years
+before and taking the oath of fidelity to the King.  They never wearied
+of telling about that event, and of the grand pow-wow which followed
+the signing of the treaty.  It had been a notable time for them.  After
+they had taken the oath of allegiance, they delivered to Colonel
+Francklin a string of Wampum as a solemn confirmation of their deed.
+Following this there was great mirth when they had drunk the King's
+health, and received a liberal supply of presents.  The next day they
+had been taken on board the man-of-war lying in the harbour, when they
+again drank the King's health, and were presented with a pound of
+gunpowder each.  When they at last left for their wilderness homes,
+they were saluted by the cannon of Fort Howe and His Majesty's ship
+_Albany_, and they in return had given three huzzas and an Indian
+war-whoop.  Such attention and good will had made a deep impression
+upon those who had attended the peace-parley.  After that they were
+ever ready to fight against King George's enemies, and they did all in
+their power to convert the Indians who still remained rebellious.
+
+The story Sam now told the newly-arrived warriors about the capture of
+the girl by the two rebel Indians aroused their wrath, and they
+determined to punish the cowardly Micmacs as soon as possible.  As for
+the slashers, they hoped to settle with them at once, which would prove
+a warning to others.  Occasionally they glanced at Jean as she sat
+watching them.  They knew her history now, and they admired her, for
+Sam had told them of her courage on the trail, and of her bright,
+cheerful disposition.  They were much interested, too, in the little
+arrow at her throat, and when Jean handed it to them, they examined it
+intently, and talked to one another in quite an excited manner.
+
+Not for long, however, could the Indians remain at the lodge.  There
+was stern work ahead of them this night, and Sam was becoming uneasy.
+When he at length rose to his feet and picked up his gun, the visitors
+did likewise.  They examined the priming of their weapons, the bullets
+in their pouches, and the quantity of powder in their powder-horns.
+Finding everything to their satisfaction, they were about to leave the
+lodge, when Jean sprang to her feet and laid a hand upon Sam's arm.
+
+"Don't kill the white men," she pleaded.  "Drive them away, but, please
+don't kill them."
+
+Sam turned and looked at her in silence for a few seconds.  His eyes
+were filled with an expression of admiration for this fair girl.  He
+was willing to do anything for her, but he knew that she did not
+understand the importance of the mission upon which he and the other
+warriors were bent.
+
+"You won't kill them, will you?" she asked, noting his silence.
+
+"Slashers bad," Sam replied.  "Slashers hurt babby."
+
+"I know they would if they got the chance.  But can't you drive them
+away without killing them?  Oh, it would be terrible if you should
+shoot them!  You killed one man, and isn't that enough?"
+
+Sam was in a quandry.  He longed for the blood of the slashers whom he
+hated.  This was a great chance to wipe them out of existence.  Never
+before had he had such a just cause against them, and why should he not
+make the most of it?  But it was hard for him to resist the request of
+the white girl.  He turned to the other Indians, and spoke to them in
+quick, short syllables.  They replied, but what they said Jean did not
+know.  She could only hope.
+
+"No kill slashers, eh?" Sam queried, turning to the girl.
+
+"Please don't.  Drive them away; frighten them, but do not kill them."
+
+"Sam no say now.  See bimeby, mebbe."
+
+To Jean Sam was the very embodiment of good nature and gentle care.
+And she had good reason for this high regard.  But as a great bear has
+been known to bestow a remarkable affection upon a lost child,
+notwithstanding its savage nature, so it was with Sam.  Could Jean have
+seen him that night as he led his score of followers against the
+slashers she would not have believed him to be the same Indian who had
+been so kind to her.  The wild nature within him was aroused.  He was
+on the warpath against a hated enemy.  As he glided through the forest,
+his eyes glowed like living coals of fire, and his great body quivered
+with excitement.  His companions, too, were intensely stirred.  The
+slashers were against King George, and that was all-sufficient.  Like
+weird spectres they moved through the night.  Not a word did they
+speak, and not a twig snapped as their moccasined feet pressed the
+ground.  Never did a girl have a more determined and thoroughly-trained
+body of men speeding forth on her behalf than did Jean Sterling that
+night in the heart of the great northern forest.
+
+For a little over half an hour the Indians continued on their way, up
+hill and down, with no abatement to their speed.  At length, after
+climbing a higher hill than usual, they paused on the eastern slope and
+held a low-whispered consultation.  This took but a few minutes, and
+when they again advanced it was not in single file, but spread out to
+the right and left like two wings, with Sam in the centre.  Down in the
+valley were the slashers, and toward them they moved, silently and
+stealthily as the panther stalking its prey.  With bent, crouching
+bodies, and every sense keenly alert, they glided toward the
+unsuspecting slashers.  Nearer and nearer they approached, and at
+length when the light of a camp fire winged its way into the forest
+depths, they lessened their speed, dropped upon their hands and knees,
+crept cautiously forward, and then stopped but a bow-shot away.  Here
+they remained as silent and rigid as the great trees, keenly observing
+all that was taking place before them.
+
+Near the fire about twenty-five men were gathered, talking in the most
+animated manner.  They were an evil-looking group of creatures, dirty,
+unshaven, their clothes ill-fitting and torn.  They formed the dregs of
+the wild, lower than the Indians and the dumb beasts of the trails.
+They were parasites, a menace to law and order.  Honor was unknown
+among them, and the purity of such a girl as Jean Sterling only aroused
+the base passions within them.  The rangers they feared, as well as the
+Indians who were loyal to King George.  They were cunning woodsmen,
+subtle as the serpent, and sly as the fox.  They were hard to catch,
+being in one place to-day, and miles away the next.  When food was
+plentiful they were gluttons, but when it was scarce they starved for
+days.  They had a craze for rum, and when drunk they were ugly, maudlin
+brutes.  They were fond of a fight, and fought like demons on the
+slightest pretext.
+
+Only one thing seriously affected them, and that was a superstitious
+fear.  It hounded them wherever they went, as is so often the case with
+low, base minds.  They had signs many, in the heavens above and the
+earth beneath, and to these were slaves.  Therefore, when they saw Seth
+Lupin lying dead on the bank of the river with the marks of the
+clutching fingers upon his throat, some trembled with fear, and glanced
+apprehensively around.  It was the work of the devil, so they said, and
+they were anxious to leave the place.  Others, however, scoffed at
+them, declaring it was none other than Sam, the ranger, who had been
+seen lurking in the vicinity that very day.  These latter by threats
+had induced the fearsome ones to accompany them into the wilderness
+where they knew the supposed murderer had his abode.  They could easily
+overcome him, so they believed, and carry off the beautiful girl.  But
+it had been a difficult journey.  They had lost their way, and
+floundered about in valleys and swamps.  Fear still possessed the
+hearts of more than half their number, and time and time again they
+were on the point of turning back.  But as Sam and his followers
+watched from the darkness of the woods, the slashers were in better
+spirits.  They were to attack at midnight, and carry off the girl.
+They discussed their plans for some time, and then curled up near the
+fire for a short sleep ere beginning the march.
+
+The lurking Indians waited patiently until silence reigned around the
+fire.  Then like unleashed hounds they swept forward, each with a
+musket in one hand and a hunting-axe in the other.  With blood-curdling
+yells they leaped into the midst of the prostrate men, and as the
+slashers sprang to their feet, amazed and stricken with fear, they went
+down before the blows of their assailants like grain before the
+reapers.  Only a few managed to escape by darting aside and losing
+themselves in the blackness of the forest.  The others lay still where
+they had fallen, with their conquerors standing over them.  The Indians
+had accomplished their task, so with grunts of satisfaction they
+stripped the slashers of their powder-horns, hunting-knives, muskets,
+and all the provisions they could find.  Loaded with these, they sped
+back to their former place of waiting, where they cast their booty upon
+the ground.  Here they squatted and watched the unconscious men near
+the fire.
+
+For some time the Indians remained in this position, and when they
+began to think that their blows were heavier than they had intended,
+the slashers showed signs of life.  First one and then another lifted
+his head and looked about in a dazed manner.  Presently all but two or
+three were sitting bolt upright staring at one another.  Then as the
+recollection of what had happened dawned upon their confused minds,
+they staggered to their feet and groped for their guns.  Being unable
+to find them, they threw a few small sticks upon the dying fire.  When
+their search for the muskets proved in vain, and when they also found
+that their powder-horns, knives, and provisions were also gone, they
+stared at one another in profound amazement.  They paid no heed to
+their still prostrate comrades.  Their only thought was for themselves.
+A wild insensate fear swept upon them as they huddled there, peering
+into the forest.  This was something they had never before experienced,
+and it was beyond their comprehension.  It could not have been the work
+of Indians, so they believed, for then not one of them would have been
+left alive.  But the yells which had awakened them sounded like the
+yells of Indians, and several had faint recollections of dusky forms
+hovering over them.
+
+"It was not Indians," one of the men declared.  "It was a legion of
+devils which struck us.  Who ever heard of Indians doing such a job?
+Why, they would have finished every man-jack of us.  It's a warning to
+us to get out of this place and leave that girl alone.  I said so at
+the first when I saw those marks upon Seth Lupin's throat.  There's
+something d---- uncanny about this, and I'm done with it.  Let's get
+away before anything else happens."
+
+Seeing that the slashers were now thoroughly frightened, and would
+trouble them no more, Sam and his companions picked up their belongings
+and booty, and glided away silently among the trees.  They were not
+altogether satisfied with their night's work, and so little was said as
+they sped onward.  Their savage nature demanded complete revenge upon
+their old-time enemy.  The partial knock-out blows were not to their
+liking.  Little did the slashers realise that they owed their lives
+that night to the very girl whose ruin they had sought, who through her
+gentle influence upon her dusky defenders had caused them to stay their
+hands and temper their punishment toward their hated enemies.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+THROUGH THE WILDERNESS
+
+Jean learned about her defenders' success upon their return to the
+lodge.  She had been anxiously awaiting their coming, and when they did
+arrive and she saw the booty they carried with them, her heart sank
+within her.  The slashers must all have been slain, so she imagined.
+When Sam, however, told her what had happened, she was greatly relieved.
+
+"Will they trouble us any more?" she asked.
+
+"No more now," and Sam smiled.  "White man head hurt.  Sore.  Slashers
+much 'fraid.  Go 'way queek."
+
+"Oh, I am so glad," and Jean gave a sigh of relief.  She felt quite
+secure now, and she looked with admiration upon the hardy Indians who
+had done so much for her.  She thanked them, and they were pleased at
+her words.  To see this white girl happy made up somewhat for their
+disappointment of the night.
+
+The next day the visitors left for their own lodges, so once again Jean
+and her two companions were alone.  The days that followed were busy
+ones for the Indians.  There were many things to do before starting on
+their long journey overland of which Jean had no idea.  First of all,
+there was a travelling-suit to be made for the white girl.  From the
+cache Sam brought down some soft, tanned caribou skin, and upon this
+Kitty began to work.  Jean watched her with great interest and
+admiration.
+
+"What do you call that?" she enquired, pointing to the skin.  "Will you
+teach me some of your words?  I want to speak Indian."
+
+Kitty looked at the girl and laughed.
+
+"Injun talk hard," she said.  "Babby spik Injun, eh?"
+
+"Yes, will you teach me?  Now, what do you call this skin?"
+
+"Mu-ka-lip-we-u," was the reply.
+
+"And what is the name of that sinew-thread?"
+
+"Tun-u-wan."
+
+Jean repeated these words, and so well did she speak them that Kitty
+was much pleased.
+
+"Babby learn queek," she encouraged.  "Babby spik all sam' Injun
+bimeby."
+
+"I am going to learn Indian," Jean declared, "and I want you to tell me
+the names of many things."
+
+The studying of the Maliseet language was a new pleasure to Jean, and
+she made excellent progress.  She asked the names of various things
+about the camp, and in a few days she had stored up in her mind quite a
+stock of words.  She now spoke of the fire as "skwut," firewood as
+"Skwut-o-e-to'tch," the mouth as "hu-ton," eyes as "u-si-suk," hair as
+"pi-es."  There was no end to the words she learned, and both Sam and
+Kitty vied with each other in teaching her.  When Sam brought in a
+rabbit he would hold it up and say "Ma-tu-kwes," or if a partridge,
+"se-se-ka-ti-ke-es."  Then he would laugh as Jean tried to pronounce
+the words.
+
+When the ice was firm enough to venture upon, Jean watched Sam as he
+cut a hole, dropped down a line, and brought forth a fine speckled
+trout.  As the fish flopped about, he exclaimed, "Sko-tum!  Sko-tum!"
+
+One day he produced a piece of ash wood, and began to make the frames
+of a pair of snow-shoes.
+
+"Ha-kum-mul," he said.
+
+"What is that?" Jean asked.
+
+"Snow-shoes for babby.  Long trip bimeby."
+
+"What! am I to use them?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  When wast come."
+
+"What is wast?"
+
+"Snow.  Plenty bimeby."
+
+When Sam had finished the frames of the snow-shoes, Kitty set at once
+to work to weave the web of strips of dried caribou skin.  Jean was
+even more interested in this than she had been in the making of her
+travelling-suit, and she was never tired of watching the woman's
+skilful fingers as she fashioned the warp and woof upon the frames
+until the perfect webs were completed.  What strong snow-shoes they
+were, and how graceful!  Jean was anxious to try them, and longed for
+the snow to come.
+
+But during this time of waiting Kitty began the training of the girl
+for the hard march overland.  Every day she would take her into the
+woods for a walk.  At first Jean was quite tired when she returned to
+the lodge, but ere long she was able to travel much farther, and came
+back fresh and unwearied.  She understood the meaning of these trips,
+and enjoyed them.  The harder she trained the more fitted she would be
+to contend with the difficulties which lay ahead.  Her body thrilled
+with excitement, and her cheeks glowed with animation whenever she
+thought of the joy of going home.  Seldom were her loved ones out of
+her mind, and she pictured her father's delight when she opened the
+door and walked in, clad in her caribou-suit.  How the people of the
+settlement would throng around her, and what a story she would have to
+tell.  She wondered what had become of Dane.  She believed that he was
+frantically searching for her, and the hope dwelt in her heart that he
+might find her and they would go home together.
+
+After a week of steady training Jean was anxious to begin the journey.
+When she mentioned this to Sam he shook his head and looked up at the
+moon which was shining above the tree-tops.
+
+"Pu-sa-nuts se-pa-wun-ok," he said.
+
+Seeing the puzzled expression upon the girl's face, he laughed.
+
+"Beeg snow soon."
+
+"How do you know?"
+
+"Ni-pauk-set--moon-tell Sam."
+
+"How does the moon tell you?"
+
+"Ring round moon, see?  Bimeby no moon.  Beeg snow."
+
+And in this the Indian was right.  Toward morning a wind sprang up and
+wailed through the forest.  When Jean opened her eyes the next morning
+the trees were swaying beneath a strong nor'easter.  The sky was
+leaden, and the air already flecked with fine snow.  In another hour
+the storm was upon them in full intensity, driving across the lake, and
+blotting out the opposite shore from view.  It beat against the thicket
+in its frantic efforts to reach the little lodge.  To keep out the
+stray gusts which did occasionally escape the barricade of trees, Sam
+hung skins and blankets across the two ends of the abode.  Thus within
+all was snug and warm.  The fire burned brightly, and the smoke poured
+up through the wide space overhead.  The roar of the storm in the
+forest sounded like the raging of the sea, and the waving of the
+tree-tops resembled the rolling and heaving of mighty billows.  It was
+an exciting day to Jean.  Never before had she witnessed such a storm.
+The fiercer it raged, and the more furiously it howled and beat against
+the sheltering trees, the more delighted she became.  From a small
+opening on the south of the lodge she could see the snow swirling along
+the shore of the lake and piling up in long drifts against several
+fallen trees.  It was good to be in such a cosy place where she could
+watch unharmed the trumpeting legions of the great nor'easter.
+
+All through the day the storm continued, and night brought no
+abatement.  It was still raging when Jean curled herself up in her
+blankets and lay there watching the dancing flames and the two Indians
+quietly and contentedly smoking on the opposite side of the fire.  At
+length her eyes closed, and lulled by the tempest, she was soon fast
+asleep.
+
+When she awoke the next morning the sun was shining brightly, and a
+great peace lay upon forest and lake.  It was a new world upon which
+she opened her eyes, a world of dazzling glory, somewhat akin to the
+vision vouchsafed to the ancient seer in his lonely island when he
+beheld a new heaven and a new earth.
+
+Jean was all eagerness now to assay her first venture upon her new
+snow-shoes.  The simple breakfast ended, and clad in her woodland suit,
+Sam taught her how to arrange the magic slippers upon her moccasined
+feet.  How Dane's heart would have thrilled could he have seen her
+standing before the lodge, her lithe, supple body drawn to its full
+height, her face aglow, her eyes sparkling, and her furry cap poised
+lightly upon her head surrounded by a wealth of soft, billowy hair.
+The rude lodge, the great trees, and the fair girl standing there
+formed a scene of surpassing charm which many an artist would have
+given much to capture.
+
+At first Jean found the walking on the snow-shoes somewhat difficult,
+and many a tumble did she receive which caused Kitty much amusement.
+But directed by the Indian woman, she soon overcame her awkwardness and
+ere long was able to move forward gracefully and rapidly.  In two days
+she was quite an expert, and could even run upon the springing
+snow-shoes, much to the delight of the two natives.
+
+"Ka-lo-ut.  Ka-lo-ut--Good.  Good," was Sam's comment as he watched her
+coming off the lake at the end of the second day of training.  "Babby
+walk all sam' Injun now."
+
+The next morning the Indians began to pack up their few belongings, and
+Jean was delighted when they told her that at last the long overland
+journey was to begin.  The streams were now frozen, and the travelling
+good.
+
+"How long will it take us to make the journey?" Jean asked Sam.
+
+"Long tam.  Wan moon, mebbe.  Two moon, mebbe."
+
+"What! two months?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, mebbe.  See bimeby."
+
+It was near mid-day when at last everything was ready and they left the
+little lodge by the lake and plunged into the forest.  A pang of regret
+smote Jean's heart as she cast a backward glance upon the humble abode.
+She had spent happy days there, and it had been to her a place of
+refuge from her pursuers.  She knew that she would never see it again.
+Suppose Dane should come to the lodge and find it deserted!
+
+The journey through the forest was of necessity slow.  With a pack upon
+his back, and drawing a small sled loaded with blankets and food, Sam
+went ahead and broke the trail.  Kitty followed, also carrying a heavy
+load and the musket.  Jean brought up the rear, and she found the
+walking quite easy owing to the excellent trail beaten down by her
+thoughtful companions.  She had insisted upon carrying something, so a
+small pack had been made up for her and strapped in Indian fashion
+across her shoulders.  This pleased her, as she felt that she was doing
+a little, at any rate, to help.
+
+It was a wonderful region through which they moved.  Up hill and down,
+across wild meadows and frozen swamps.  Most of the time they travelled
+through great forest tracts, unharmed as yet by fire or axe.  The
+trees, thick-set and tall, reminded Jean of great masts.  A brooding
+silence reigned in these sombre depths, broken only by an occasional
+chatter of a surprised squirrel, the whirr of a partridge, or the
+cheepings of the little chickadees as they hopped from branch to
+branch.  Once during the afternoon they stopped and ate a little of the
+cooked food Kitty had brought along.  Jean was glad of this rest, for
+notwithstanding the training she had received, she was quite weary.
+She was most thankful when that evening Sam halted by the side of a
+little brook, unslung his pack and laid it upon the snow.
+
+"Yut-ku-lo-wut," he said.
+
+"What does that mean?" Jean asked.
+
+"Good camp-place."
+
+Then he turned to his wife.
+
+"Mu-tu-o-to," he said, which the girl knew as the order to build a
+fire.  She was pleased that she understood this command, and it
+encouraged her to continue the study of the native language.
+
+While Kitty, with Jean's assistance, gathered some dry wood, and
+lighted the fire, Sam erected a lean-to.  Thus by the time darkness
+enshrouded the land they were ready for the night.  It was good to lie
+down and rest after the march of the day, and Jean soon feel asleep.
+
+Thus for several days they continued their journey, travelling by easy
+stages.  Jean was more accustomed now to the trail, and the stiffness
+of the first two days had worn away.  It was welcome news to her,
+however, when Sam one night told her that by sundown on the morrow they
+should be at the big river, the Wu-las-tukw.
+
+"Oh, I am so glad," she fervently replied.  Once on the noble St. John
+it would seem almost home.
+
+The next day they passed through a wonderful forest of great white
+pines.  Never had Jean seen anything like them.  They were as straight
+as arrows, and their tops seemed to her to reach the clouds drifting
+overhead.  Ere long she noticed that many of them bore the axe blaze,
+and examining more closely, she saw the form of a broad arrow cut deep
+into the bark.  "What is that?" she asked.
+
+"King George arrow," Sam explained.  "All King George tree," and he
+waved his hand in an eloquent gesture.  "White man cut'm bimeby."
+
+"Oh, I know," Jean exclaimed as she recalled what Dane had told her.
+"These are for masts for the King's navy, are they not?"
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"Are there mast-cutters near here?"
+
+"Off dere," and Sam motioned westward.
+
+"Will we see them?"
+
+"No see'm now.  Bimeby, mebbe."
+
+"Where are they?"
+
+Sam stopped, stooped and with his forefinger made two parallel lines in
+the snow several inches apart.
+
+"A-jem-sek," he said, touching the nearer line.  "Wu-las-tukw," and he
+touched the other.  He next placed his finger between the two.  "White
+man here," he explained.  "Plenty King George tree."
+
+"Is A-jem-sek a river?" Jean asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha."
+
+"Will we soon be there?"
+
+"Wan sight, mebbe."
+
+Jean had learned that these Indians measured short distances according
+to sight, and that they said "one sight," "two sights," "three sights,"
+instead of miles.  She now knew that the A-jem-sek, whatever that river
+might be, was not far away, and that it must be a branch of the St.
+John.  And between the two, farther on, were the King's mast-cutters.
+Her hopes rose high.  How good it would be to see white men she could
+trust.  They would help her to reach home, she felt certain.
+
+They were moving down a gentle slope now, and making fair progress.
+Suddenly Sam stopped, and examined strange straggling tracks in the
+snow.  Kitty and Jean also looked, the latter asking what they meant.
+
+"White man," Sam explained.  "No snow-shoe."
+
+"Are they slashers?" Jean anxiously enquired.
+
+Sam shook his head, and examined the tracks more closely.
+
+"No slasher, no snow-shoe," he said.  "Funny track, all sam' lost."
+
+As they proceeded, they came across other tracks, showing where men had
+been walking through the snow, wandering here and there, in an
+apparently aimless manner.  Sam became very curious now, as well as
+cautious.  He took the musket from Kitty, and carried it in readiness
+for any emergency.  Jean was quite excited, and peered keenly ahead,
+not knowing what to expect next.
+
+Except for the creaking of the snow-shoes, not a sound did they make as
+they sped onward, and in about half an hour the trees seemed suddenly
+to part and present an open space to their view.  It was the A-jem-sek,
+a narrow stream connecting Lake K'tchi-kwis-pam with the Wu-las-tukw,
+so Sam explained to Jean.  As they stepped out upon this river they saw
+two men but a short distance away, drawing a small sled loaded with
+wood, who stared with startled amazement at the sudden appearance of
+the three travellers.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+IN DESPERATE STRAITS
+
+As they advanced toward where the two men were standing, Jean was
+somewhat afraid lest they might be slashers.  This fear, however, was
+at once removed when she beheld their pitiable condition.  Their
+clothes were in tatters, and their bearded faces were drawn and
+haggard.  They stared at her with eyes from which all hope had fled,
+and so weak did they seem that they could hardly stand.  Their backs
+were bent as if through age, and they rested their hands upon the
+loaded sled for support.  As Jean paused, smitten by a sudden feeling
+of awe, one of the men wearily lifted his hand and beckoned to her.
+
+"Who are you?" she asked, when she had drawn near.
+
+"We are as dead men," was the hollow reply.  "But in God's name, who
+are you?"
+
+"I am Jean Sterling, daughter of Colonel Sterling.  I was carried away
+from home, but was rescued by these Indians, who are now taking me back
+to my father."
+
+"Ay, we heard of you, did we not, James?" the man enquired, turning to
+his companion.
+
+"Ay, we heard of you, Miss, on our way here, as William says," the
+other replied, "But so great have been our own cares and sorrows since
+then that we have forgotten about you."
+
+"Do you live here?" Jean asked, wondering who these men could be.
+
+"No, no, not living, but dying here, we and our wives and children.  We
+are Loyalists, Miss, who arrived with the Fall Fleet.  We came up the
+river in open boats, mistook this river one night for the main channel,
+and were frozen in here before morning.  Our sufferings have been
+great.  We are starving to death.  Though," he added after a slight
+pause, "there are not so many to provide for now."
+
+"What! have some died?" Jean asked.
+
+"Seven, Miss, mostly little ones.  They are all under the snow, and the
+rest of us will soon be with them."
+
+"Come, come, you must not give up yet," the girl encouraged.  "Sam and
+Kitty will help you, I am sure.  Where do you live?"
+
+"Just over there," and the man motioned to the right.  "It's a poor
+place, and the last storm was terribly hard on us."
+
+"Take me there, then," Jean ordered.  "I want to see your women and
+children."
+
+A feeling of responsibility had suddenly come to her such as she had
+never before known.  These two men before her were in the depths of
+despair, so something had to be done to arouse and stimulate them with
+courage.  Hitherto she herself had been dependent upon others, and
+followed their guidance.  But now it was different.  Here were people
+in a strange land, and in difficult circumstances who had for the time
+lost their grip of things, and needed special assistance.  It all came
+upon her in a flash, transforming her from a follower to a leader; from
+dependent girlhood to the glory of responsible womanhood.
+
+Guided by the two men, they soon reached the encampment but a hundred
+yards away.  At sight of this Jean stopped and stared in profound
+amazement.  It was no wonder that the women and children huddled there
+were cold.  The ones who had fashioned these rude abodes were evidently
+unacquainted with life in the open, so desolate was the place, and with
+very little protection from the driving storms.
+
+There were about ten families in all encamped here, and at the first
+glance Jean could tell that they were actually starving.  The women,
+who received her kindly, presented as brave an appearance as possible.
+But their faces were worn and haggard, showing plainly the sufferings
+they had endured.  The children, especially the younger ones, looked
+better, having no doubt received extra food and attention.
+
+The arrival of the visitors caused considerable excitement and interest
+among the Loyalists.  Men, women, and children all crowded around one
+fire, and listened with wonder to the tale Jean related of her capture,
+and how she was rescued by the two good Indians.  She in return heard
+the pathetic story of these unfortunate people from the time they left
+their old homes until the present.
+
+"It was bad enough," one woman said, "when we were all well.  But when
+the babies began to pine and die for want of proper nourishment, then
+it was terrible.  We gave them the best of everything, and tried to
+keep them warm, even pressing them against our own bodies.  But it was
+all in vain, so we laid the little darlings to rest one by one.  They
+are better off, I suppose, but it was very hard on us."
+
+Her eyes, and the eyes of all were brimming with tears.  Jean was
+deeply affected, and her heart went out in sympathy to these
+unfortunate people.  She glanced about the rough brush abodes, and
+noted how few and thin were the blankets.
+
+"You have very little bedding, I see," she remarked.
+
+"Not nearly enough," was the reply.  "We had no idea that winter would
+come so soon, so sent most of everything on the _Polly_."
+
+"Are you out of provisions, too?"
+
+"We have been out of food for days, excepting the few rabbits the men
+caught.  There are moose in the woods, but our men have not the skill
+or strength to get any."
+
+During this conversation Jean's mind had been very active.  She knew
+that something had to be done, and at once, if these people were to be
+saved from starvation.  She turned away and walked over to where Sam
+and Kitty were erecting a little lean-to in the midst of a small
+thicket of fir and spruce trees.
+
+"Sam, I want you to do something for those people," she at once began.
+"They are starving."
+
+"White man all sam' crazee," the Indian replied.  "Camp bad, ugh!"
+
+"I know that, Sam, so you must show them how to build good ones like
+your lodge by the lake.  Will you?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, bimeby, mebbe."
+
+"They are starving, too, Sam, so I want you to get something for them
+to eat.  Will you go at once?  Kitty and I will finish this lean-to."
+
+Sam, however, made no reply, but went on with his work.
+
+"You will go, won't you?" she pleaded.  "They are King George's people,
+and were driven out of their own country.  I know you will help them."
+
+These words had the desired effect, and electrified the Indian to keen
+interest.  That they were King George's people was all-sufficient.  He
+spoke to Kitty, who produced two wire snares from one of their bundles,
+and handed them to her husband.  Sam then picked up his gun and turned
+to Jean.
+
+"Me go now," he said.  "Come bimeby.  Get bird, mebbe."
+
+In another minute he was away, and Jean turned her attention to the
+building of the lean-to.  As the Indian woman began to prepare supper,
+Jean longed to take some of the meat to the needy ones.  But it was so
+small that it would be of little use.  She could only hope that Sam
+would return with a good supply of birds.
+
+Neither was she disappointed, for shortly after dark the Indian
+appeared carrying several plump partridges he had snared.  These were
+soon prepared and speedily cooked, so this night the Loyalists had a
+better supper than usual.
+
+Sam now directed his attention to the rude abodes, and as he examined
+them he emitted several grunts of disgust.  Early the next morning he
+found an excellent camping-spot, and took Jean over to see it.
+
+"Good camp here," he told her.  "Plenty tree, plenty wood."
+
+"Will you help those people to build new lodges?" she asked.
+
+"A-ha-ha, Sam help."
+
+"And can you get more meat?  Perhaps you can shoot a moose."
+
+"Sam get feesh bimeby.  Kai-u-hus, mebbe."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"All sam' rat.  Swim in water, build house."
+
+"Do you mean muskrat?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  White man call'm 'Injun turkey.'  Good."
+
+"You are a great man, Sam.  You saved my life, and now you are saving
+the lives of those poor people."
+
+"Sam glad," was the quiet reply.  "Sam King George man.  Sam help King
+George peep'l."
+
+Jean went over and explained to the Loyalists Sam's idea about building
+the new abodes.  They were much pleased at this suggestion, and the men
+at once followed Sam to the spot he had chosen, and began work.  After
+he had given them full instructions, and helped them to make a start
+upon their new homes, he provided himself with a small supply of food,
+and started forth upon a hunting expedition.  He took with him his sled
+and a single blanket.
+
+"Will you be away all night?" Jean asked as she stood watching him ere
+his departure.
+
+"Mebbe.  See bimeby."
+
+"Don't stay too long, Sam, for if you do we shall all starve.  Kitty
+says that we have very little food left."
+
+The Indian smiled as he stooped and arranged his right snow-shoe.
+
+"Kitty no starve, Babby no starve," he replied.  "Sam come bimeby.
+Plenty grub."
+
+This was an anxious day for Jean, as she was well aware that the entire
+camp was on the verge of starvation.  The children were already picking
+and sucking the bones of the partridges, and there was no food in the
+place.  Even the little they had brought with them was gone, so she and
+Kitty went without any dinner.  She did her best to cheer and encourage
+the dispirited Loyalists, telling them that Sam would soon return with
+plenty of meat.  He was their sole dependence now, and suppose anything
+should happen to him!  But she had confidence in his skill and
+judgment, so hoped for the best.
+
+Much of the day she spent with the women and children, listening to the
+hardships they had endured, and playing with the little ones.  At times
+she visited the men, and watched them as they toiled bravely at their
+houses.  They were weak and hungry, but they uttered no word of
+complaint.  Occasionally she saw them gnawing and chewing the bark of
+tender birch twigs, while some tried to find sustenance in pine,
+spruce, and cedar cones.  But for the hope that Sam would return with a
+supply of food, they would have given up in despair.
+
+The day was drawing to a close when the women and children were
+transferred to their new abodes.  Fires were burning brightly, and
+fresh fir boughs made soft beds.  The children were delighted with this
+change, and the expression in the women's eyes showed their pleasure.
+As Jean watched the mothers making up the beds for the night she
+noticed how few and thin were the blankets.  She well knew that they
+must have more clothing if they were to be kept from perishing during
+the long winter ahead.  And other food they must have than meat,
+especially the children.  Her mind turned naturally to the King's
+mast-cutters.  She must go to them, for no doubt they had a supply of
+provisions on hand, as well as extra blankets.  She was sure that they
+would be willing to help these needy people.
+
+At first she thought of getting Sam and Kitty to go.  But thinking the
+matter over, she decided that it would be better to go herself.  The
+Indians might not be able to explain fully the serious condition of the
+Loyalists, or else the mast-cutters might not pay much attention to
+what they said.  She mentioned this to no one, however, preferring to
+wait until Sam returned that she might talk it over with him.
+
+There was little rest that night for the older ones.  The hungry
+children had cried themselves to sleep, while the helpless parents
+watched and listened with heavy hearts.  They were beyond tears now,
+having shed so many in the past.  The men were weary to the point of
+exhaustion after their day's work without any food.  As they huddled
+there they often cast anxious glances out into the night, hoping to see
+the Indian coming from the forest.  They themselves had done the best
+they could to provide game, but they were unused to hunting, and when
+they became weakened through lack of food, they were able to do but
+little.  All they could do now was to trust to the Indian and await his
+return.
+
+Jean decided to watch with Kitty, as she felt sure that Sam would come
+back before morning.  But as the hours wore on, her eyes became heavy.
+The bed of fir boughs and blankets was comfortable, so at length she
+passed into a sound sleep, leaving Kitty awake and watchful.
+
+When she opened her eyes it was daylight, and the delicious odor of
+frying meat pervaded the air.  Kitty was stooping before the fire,
+while Sam was squatting but a short distance away.  They both turned
+and smiled as the girl awoke and spoke to them.
+
+"When did you get back, Sam?" she asked.
+
+"Short tam' go.  Plenty meat now."
+
+"Oh, I am so glad!  What did you get?"
+
+"Feesh, Injun turkey, hut-tok."
+
+"What, a deer!" Jean exclaimed, for she knew the meaning of the Indian
+word.
+
+"A-ha-ha, hut-tok.  Beeg."
+
+"Good for you, Sam!  You are a great hunter.  Where is the deer?"
+
+"White man eat'm," he replied with a smile.
+
+"And did you haul it into camp?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Sam strong, beeg."
+
+This supply of meat was a God-send to all, and there was great
+rejoicing among the Loyalists.  They praised the Indian for what he had
+done, and he was looked upon as a hero, especially by the children.
+
+When breakfast was over, and Sam was enjoying his pipe near the fire,
+Jean spoke to him about going to the mast-cutters for assistance.  The
+Indian listened intently, and when the girl had finished speaking, he
+remained for awhile in deep silence.
+
+"Can we do it?" Jean at length asked.  "How far is it?"
+
+"Sam go wan sleep, babby two sleep," was the reply.
+
+Jean smiled as she drew herself to her full height.
+
+"Don't you think I can do it in one sleep as well as you?" she
+bantered.  "Why, I am strong now, almost like an Indian."
+
+"Babby no all sam' Injun yet," Sam reminded.  "Bimeby, mebbe."
+
+"But will you go, Sam?"
+
+"A-ha-ha.  Wan sleep, Sam go."
+
+"In the morning?"
+
+"Mebbe.  Sam see."
+
+With this Jean had to be content.  She was pleased that the Indian was
+willing to go with her, although she was well aware that he would start
+only when he was ready.  She talked it over with the women, and a new
+hope rose in their hearts when they learned about the King's
+mast-cutters.
+
+"What should we have done without you?" one woman remarked with a sob
+in her voice.  "The Lord surely must have sent you and those Indians
+just when our needs were so great.  We can never repay you for what you
+have done for us."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+SIX CANDLES AND ONE
+
+The short winter day was drawing to a close as Jean and her two Indian
+companions moved down the western side of a long hill.  They were
+making for the valley below through which ran a small brook, where they
+hoped to camp for the night.  They had been abroad since morning, and
+Jean was now very tired.  Her strength was not so great as she had
+imagined, and she recalled with amusement her proud boast the day
+before.  Sam had been right, and she was glad that he did not try to
+reach the mast-cutters in "one sleep."  She could not possibly do it,
+although it would have been easy for the Indians.  They had this day
+regulated their speed to her feeble steps.  But without her how they
+would have sped through the forest.  They were both wonderful
+snow-shoers, and on several occasions she had watched them as they
+bounded over the snow with great swinging, tireless strides.  Her
+admiration of these faithful, self-reliant people was unbounded.
+
+They had almost reached the valley when the report of a gun rang
+through the forest, followed in a few seconds by a cry of distress.
+Sam stopped dead in his tracks, gripped hard his musket, and peered
+keenly among the trees.  The next instant he was bounding forward,
+leaving Jean and Kitty staring after him.
+
+"What is it?" the girl asked, her face white with fear.
+
+"Kitty no say now," was the reply.  "See bimeby."
+
+And as they waited and listened with fast-beating hearts, another
+report echoed through the forest, and then all was still.
+
+"Sam shoot," Kitty explained.  "Come."
+
+Hurrying forward, they soon reached the valley, and ere long they saw
+Sam bending over some object.  Nearby was a large moose, with its great
+body and branching antlers half buried in the snow.  But to this Sam
+gave no heed.  His attention was centred upon a human being, moaning
+and writhing in pain.  Jean saw at once that it was a man, with white
+hair and long, flowing beard.  With a cry she rushed forward and knelt
+by his side.
+
+"Are you hurt?" she asked in a tremulous voice.
+
+At this question the man started, lifted his head, and looked curiously
+at the girl.  An expression of defiance glowed in his eyes, which
+caused Jean to wonder.
+
+"Are you hurt?" she repeated.  "Can we help you?"
+
+"Am I hurt?" the man growled.  "Do I look hurt?"
+
+These words instead of frightening the girl only tended to make her
+somewhat angry.  She wished to do what she could to help the man, but
+she did not like his sarcasm.  It was altogether uncalled for, so she
+thought.
+
+"You look as if you are hurt," she replied.  "But, then, you are the
+best judge of that.  We are willing to do what we can for you, but if
+you do not want our help we shall leave you alone."
+
+Her tone was severe, and this the man noted.
+
+"I am hurt," he confessed in a milder voice.  "That devil over there
+nearly made an end of me.  O, Lord!"  He placed his hand to his side,
+and his brow contracted with pain.  "I guess I'm done for, anyway."
+
+"Where do you live?" Jean asked.  "We must get you home."
+
+"Just down the valley.  Sam knows where.  I think I can walk with his
+help.  He's a good Indian, and he saved my life to-day.  He was just in
+time."
+
+With considerable difficulty the injured man was lifted out of the snow
+where he was half buried, and helped to regain his feet.  One of his
+snow-shoes was gone, but Kitty found it several yards away.
+
+"It was that which caused all the trouble," the man explained.  "When
+the moose charged, something went wrong with that snow-shoe, and before
+I could do anything the brute was upon me."
+
+After Sam had fixed and arranged the snow-shoe upon the man's
+moccasined foot, he took him by the arm and started forward, with the
+women following.  Their progress was slow, for the injured man often
+stopped and pressed his hand to his side.  That he was suffering
+greatly was most apparent, and Jean felt sorry for him.  She wondered
+who he was, and the reason for the look of defiance in his eyes.  That
+he had called Sam by name puzzled her, for the Indian had never spoken
+of him to her.
+
+She was more mystified than ever when ere long they came in sight of a
+log cabin nestling on the hillside at the entrance of the valley.  In
+front of the house was a small clearing surrounded by a rough pole
+fence, causing Jean to believe that the owner had lived there for some
+time, and did a little gardening.
+
+When, however, she entered the building her surprise was greater than
+ever.  The main room was as comfortable and cosy as hands could make
+it.  The floor was covered with fur rugs of various shapes and sizes.
+The walls, too, were adorned with skins of the bear, fox, otter,
+wolverine, and other animals.  At the farther end of the room was a
+large fire-place, above which was a fine moose head with great
+branching antlers.  Several hardwood sticks were burning upon the
+hearth, showing that the owner had not been long away from home.  There
+were also other articles on the walls, such as Indian curios, bows and
+arrows, as well as a few pictures.  In the middle of the room was a
+table, covered with a cloth of rich design.  In the centre of this
+stood a candle-stick, made of wood, evidently hand-wrought.  It had
+seven branches, and in each was a dip-candle.  A well-polished silver
+tray, containing a pair of snuffers, was lying near.  There were
+several books upon the table, one of which was lying open, as if the
+reader had hurriedly laid it down as he rose from the deep, comfortable
+chair nearby.  There were other chairs in the room, as well as stools
+and benches, but this big chair excelled them all in size and quaint
+workmanship.  It was evidently the owner's special favourite, for it
+showed signs of much use.
+
+To the left of the fire-place was the one couch the room contained, and
+to this the injured man at once made his way.  He sat upon the edge and
+rested for a few minutes.  He was breathing hard, and most of the time
+he kept his right hand to his suffering side.  He seemed to pay no heed
+to what was taking place around him, but stared straight before him as
+if in a dream.  He aroused at length, and glanced at the three standing
+before him.
+
+"Make yourselves at home," he said.  "There is plenty of food in the
+next room.  It is quite warm there, for I always keep a fire going.
+The women, I think, will find it comfortable.  Sam, I want to speak to
+you alone."
+
+Jean was not slow in taking this hint, so she opened a door to the
+right of the fire-place and passed into the adjoining room.  This was
+somewhat similar to the one they had just left, excepting that it was
+not so cosy.  The table had no cloth covering it, and upon it stood a
+single candle stuck in a wooden candle-stick.  This she lighted with a
+coal from the fire-place, and then looked curiously around.  Along one
+side of the room was an abundance of provisions, all in bags, and
+carefully arranged.  There were blankets, too, piles of them, and
+nearby a stack of furs.  Jean thought of the Loyalists on the
+A-jem-sek.  Here was sufficient food and clothing to last them for some
+time.  And why should they not have them?  She would speak to the owner
+just as soon as possible, and no doubt he would be willing to send
+something to the needy ones.
+
+As she looked toward a corner of the room opposite the food and
+blankets, she was astonished to see many muskets leaning against the
+wall.  She went over and began to count, and found there were fifty in
+all.  She also saw numerous old swords, bayonets, and boxes filled with
+bullets.  There were cans, as well, which she believed contained
+powder.  She grew more puzzled now than ever.  Who could the man be,
+and why did he have so many guns?  Perhaps he was a trader, and dealt
+with the Indians.  But why had not Sam and Kitty spoken about him?
+Then she recalled the look of defiance in his eyes when she had first
+met him.  What was the meaning of that?
+
+She crossed the room to where the Indian woman was searching among the
+pots, pans, and other cooking utensils near the fire-place.
+
+"What are you going to do?" she asked.
+
+"Cook supper," was the reply.  "Plenty grub, eh?"
+
+"There certainly is, Kitty.  I wonder what that man is going to do with
+it all."  She then lowered her voice, and glanced toward the door.  "Do
+you know anything about him?" she enquired.  "Why does he have so many
+guns?"
+
+"Kitty know," was the reply.  "White man beeg chief."
+
+"What kind of a chief?"
+
+"Kitty no say now.  Bimeby, mebbe."
+
+"Is he a trader?"
+
+"A-ha-ha, mebbe."
+
+This was all the information Jean could gain from the woman, and she
+was greatly mystified.  Kitty evidently knew who the man was, and yet
+she would tell nothing more than that he was a big chief.  She sat down
+before the fire and tried to puzzle it all out.  But the more she
+thought, the more confused she became, and at last was forced to give
+up in despair.  Perhaps she could find out for herself.  Anyway, she
+must get food and clothing to send to the Loyalists as speedily as
+possible.
+
+In the meantime Kitty had found a quantity of Indian meal and was
+cooking some cakes in one of the frying-pans she had found.  There was
+also a good supply of molasses in a cask, which when served with the
+cakes makes fairly good eating.  It was a change, at any rate, from the
+constant meat diet.
+
+"Kitty cook plenty bimeby," the Indian woman announced.  "Good tam, eh?"
+
+"Some of that food must go to those starving people on the A-Jem-sek,"
+Jean replied.  "And look at those blankets.  Why, there are enough to
+keep them all warm.  You and Sam will take some, will you not?"
+
+To this request Kitty made no response, and while Jean was wondering
+why she did not answer, Sam entered the room, and came close to the
+fire.
+
+"Beeg chief want see babby," he announced.
+
+"How is he?" the girl asked, rising to her feet.
+
+"Seek here," and Sam placed his hand to his side.  "Much seek.  Bad!"
+
+Jean at once went into the other room, which was lighted only by the
+fire, and crossed to where the injured man was lying.
+
+"You want to see me?" she enquired.  "Is there anything I can do for
+you?"
+
+"Yes, light the candles.  It is very dark here."
+
+Jean at once obeyed, and in a few minutes the candles were burning
+brightly.  The effect was beautiful, and as she stood watching them she
+wondered why there were just seven.
+
+"You like them?" the man asked.
+
+"I do," Jean acknowledged.  "But I am curious to know why there are
+just seven."
+
+"Oh, that is a perfect number," the man explained.  "It is according to
+the Bible, you know.  Now, take the snuffers and put out six."
+
+Jean did as she was bidden, greatly mystified, until but one candle was
+left burning.
+
+"There, that will do," the man said.  "Now, come over here and sit by
+my side.  That is better," he continued when she had complied with his
+request.
+
+"How are you feeling?" Jean asked.
+
+"A little easier now.  I am somewhat of a doctor, and Sam helped me.
+But never mind that.  I want to know who you are, and why you are
+travelling with those Indians?"
+
+Briefly as possible Jean told her story, and when she had ended the man
+remained silent for a few minutes.  She could not see the expression
+upon his face, nor the peculiar light in his eyes owing to the darkness
+of the corner where he was lying.  Could she have done so, she would
+have been more surprised than ever.
+
+"It is a strange story you have told me, young woman," he at length
+remarked.  "You have been wonderfully delivered.  You should consider
+yourself very fortunate in having such friends as those Indians."
+
+"Indeed I do," Jean declared.  "They have done more for me than I can
+ever repay.  I know now how to sympathise with others in distress, and
+so want to help those unfortunate Loyalists."
+
+"So you are on your way to get food and clothing from the mast-cutters?"
+
+"Yes, but we won't have to go to them now, as I am sure you will help
+out those poor people.  You have plenty of supplies."
+
+"And they will stay here, young woman."
+
+"What! you won't send any to those people in distress?"
+
+"Why should I?  They are Loyalists, and that is enough."
+
+Jean started and stared at the man in amazement.
+
+Surely she had not heard aright.
+
+"Do you mean what you say?" she asked.
+
+"I certainly do.  Those Loyalists will never receive any help from me.
+Let them starve and freeze; it is no more than they deserve."
+
+These cold, inhuman words stirred Jean's fighting blood.  She rose
+quickly to her feet, her eyes ablaze with anger.
+
+"I don't know who you are," she began, "and I don't know why you hate
+the Loyalists.  But--" she paused just for an instant, "some of that
+food and clothing will leave this place to-morrow morning."
+
+The man sat bolt upright at this declaration, and flung out his right
+hand as if to hit the girl.  Then he sank back upon the bed with a
+groan.
+
+"You can't help yourself," Jean reminded, "so it is better for you to
+keep quiet.  Some of those supplies are going, whether you like it or
+not."
+
+"But this is a hold-up, a robbery," the man charged.
+
+"I don't care what you call it, and I'm not worrying about that.  I
+only know that men, women, and children are starving not far away, so
+while there is food here they are going to have some of it."
+
+Jean was surprised at her boldness.  But it was not time for half-way
+measures.  If the owner would not agree to let the supplies go, she
+would take matters into her own hands.
+
+"Oh, but for this confounded pain in my side I would soon teach you who
+is master of this house," the man shouted.  "You are an impudent hussy,
+and I believe the story you told me about being carried away is a lie.
+And how do I know but what you are lying about those Loyalists?  You
+and your Indian companions may keep what you take for yourselves."
+
+"You can believe me or not, just as you wish," Jean quietly and firmly
+replied.  "But those supplies are going to the Loyalists in the
+morning.  I would be ashamed to be called Colonel Sterling's daughter
+if I were afraid to use strong measures to save starving people."
+
+At these words the man suddenly lifted himself on his right elbow, and
+peered keenly at the girl.
+
+"Light the rest of those candles," he ordered.  "I must see your face.
+I want to know if you are telling me the truth."
+
+Jean did so, and then returned to the man's side.
+
+"Stand there," he commanded, "a little to the right, so I can see your
+face.  Ah, that's better.  Now, tell me your father's Christian name."
+
+"James," the girl replied.
+
+"Yes, but James what?  He has a second name, has he not?"
+
+"Witrow.  James Witrow Sterling; that's his full name."
+
+"What was your mother's name?"
+
+"Deborah Ruth."
+
+"But her maiden name?"
+
+"Winslow."
+
+"And your name?"
+
+"Priscilla Jean, although I only get 'Jean.'"
+
+"After whom were you named?"
+
+"A very dear friend of my parents."
+
+"Who was she?"
+
+"Priscilla Jean Norman, so I have been told."
+
+"Where is she now?"
+
+"I do not know.  She and her husband disappeared years ago, and no word
+has been received from them since.  They were the dearest friends my
+father had, and he feels the loss very keenly."
+
+"Is your mother alive?"
+
+"No; she died several years ago."
+
+With a deep sigh the man dropped back upon the pillow, and remained
+silent for a few minutes.  Jean sat down by his side, lost in thought.
+What was the meaning of the man's sudden excitement? she asked herself.
+And why did he question her so closely about her parents' names?
+Perhaps he had known them in the past.  At length the man stirred,
+reached out his right hand and touched hers.
+
+"Young woman," he began, "for your parents' sake alone I give you
+permission to take food and clothing to those starving people."
+
+"Oh, I am so glad!" Jean replied.  "But did you know my father and
+mother?"
+
+To this question the man seemed to pay no heed.  His eyes were fixed
+upon the seven candles.
+
+"Yes, there were seven of us," he murmured as if to himself, "seven who
+were all in all to one another.  But six went out, and I was left
+alone.  Put them out again, Miss, and leave just one burning.  You may
+go now, as I want to think.  Send Sam to me.  He can sleep in here
+to-night.  You will find plenty of blankets in the next room.  Good
+night."
+
+Quietly and almost reverently Jean extinguished six of the candles, and
+then left the room.  She felt that there was a deep mystery surrounding
+this man's life of which the seven-branch candle-stick was but the
+outward symbol.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+TIMON OF THE WILDERNESS
+
+Jean awoke the next morning much refreshed after the good night's rest.
+She slept upon a liberal supply of blankets which Kitty had prepared
+for her upon the floor.  This was a treat after camp-life, and when she
+opened her eyes the Indian woman was cooking breakfast.  It was not yet
+daylight, but the room was quite bright from the dancing flames of the
+fire-place.  It felt nice to lie there with a roof above her and no
+weary journey ahead for that day, at least.  She recalled the events of
+the previous day, and wondered how the injured man had passed the
+night.  She had fallen asleep thinking about him, and the mystery of
+his life.  Whoever he was, she was thankful that he had known her
+parents, and that for their sake he was willing to send food to the
+Loyalists.  The Indians were to start that morning, so she must be
+ready to assist them in selecting the supplies.
+
+About a quarter of an hour later Sam entered the room.  He did not
+knock, for such etiquette was not in his simple code of Indian manners.
+He merely looked to see what his wife was cooking, and then turned
+toward Jean.
+
+"Beeg chief want see babby," he announced.
+
+"How is he this morning, Sam?"
+
+"No good.  Bad."
+
+Fearing that the man was much worse, Jean hurried into the other room,
+and went at once to the couch.
+
+"Good morning," she brightly accosted.  "How are you feeling now?"
+
+"None too good," was the reply.  "I didn't sleep a wink last night."
+
+"Your side hurt you, I suppose."
+
+"Perhaps so.  But never mind about that now.  I want you to help Sam
+pack up the outfit.  Don't let him take too much, and see that he
+doesn't get any of that rum.  It's in a keg near the molasses.
+
+"You will have some breakfast, will you not?" Jean asked.
+
+"I suppose so.  There's a box yonder," and he pointed to the opposite
+side of the room.  "You'll find some bread and cold meat.  You might
+bring me a cup of strong tea; perhaps it will steady my nerves.  Hand
+me my pipe and tobacco; they're on that flat stone projecting from the
+fire-place."
+
+About the middle of the forenoon the relief party drew away from the
+house on their arduous journey to the A-jem-sek.  It had taken Sam some
+time to repair the broken toboggan he had found in a shed near by.
+When this had been loaded with supplies, Sam threw the rope across his
+shoulders and started forward, with Kitty following.  It would be a
+hard trip, Jean was well aware, so she told the Indians how grateful
+she was, and that no doubt King George would hear of their good deed.
+Her words pleased the simple-minded natives, and they undertook the
+difficult task in the best of spirits.
+
+"Don't forget to tell the Loyalists about the moose," Jean reminded as
+she stood watching them from the back door.
+
+"Injun no forget," Sam replied.  "White man come bimeby.  Sam, mebbe."
+
+The girl watched her faithful friends until they had disappeared from
+view.  All at once she seemed inexpressibly lonely as she stood there.
+While the Indians were with her she felt secure.  But now she was alone
+with the mysterious invalid in the next room.  She might have gone,
+too, but the man had asked her to stay until the natives returned, and
+she could not very well refuse his request.  Anyway, she would be of
+more use here than out on the trail.  She wondered what was the cause
+of the feeling of depression that had so suddenly swept upon her, and
+which was contrary to her buoyant nature.  All at once the great silent
+forest appeared to her like some sinister monster, holding a lurking
+enemy within its brooding depths.  She chided herself for her
+foolishness, but for all that, she could not entirely banish the
+strange feeling.
+
+Going into the adjoining room, she found the invalid asleep.  Not
+wishing to disturb him, she sat down by the table and picked up the
+book lying open there.  It was a copy of Shakespeare's works,
+well-bound, and showing signs of much use.  She turned to the front
+blank pages, hoping to see a name inscribed there.  But nothing could
+she find.  She examined two other books, one a copy of Virgil's
+"Aeneid," and the second "The Tatler," but no clue could she obtain as
+to the identity of the owner.  In one of them, however, she did find
+where a name had been scratched out, as with a knife.
+
+Taking up again the copy of Shakespeare's works, she glanced at the
+play where the book was lying open.  It was "Timon of Athens," and the
+page upon which her eyes rested contained Timon's terrible curse
+outside the walls of Athens.  She read it through, and then let the
+book drop upon her lap, wondering why any one in his right mind could
+so curse his fellow beings.  She glanced toward the man upon the cot.
+Had he been reading those words ere he laid the book aside?  she mused.
+What connection had that curse with him?  Did he hate his fellow men as
+Timon did of old?  Perhaps he, too, had been wronged, and had fled to
+this lonely place.  She recalled what he had said about those starving
+Loyalists.  Surely there must be some good reason for his intense
+bitterness.
+
+As she thus sat there gazing dreamily into the fire, the man on the cot
+stirred, uttered a slight moan, opened his eyes and looked at the girl.
+
+"Ah, so you've been keeping watch, have you?" he asked.  "Pretty lonely
+job, isn't it?"
+
+"Not at all," Jean brightly replied, laying aside the book and rising
+to her feet.  "I have been looking at your books.  My, what a reader
+you must be!  But why do you read such stuff as that?"
+
+"What stuff?  I hope you don't call Shakespeare's works 'stuff.'"
+
+"Oh, I am merely referring to Timon's curse.  It is terrible.  But,
+there, I don't want to talk about it.  Let me make you a cup of tea.
+That will do you more good than any book."
+
+"Make it good and strong," the man reminded.  "And while you are about
+it you might as well bring me a noggin of rum.  I haven't had any since
+yesterday morning."
+
+The invalid drank the tea first, and pronounced it excellent.  He let
+the rum remain by his side while he filled and lighted his pipe.
+
+"Did you have a good sleep?" Jean asked as she again sat down by the
+table.  "I hope you feel better."
+
+"I had a fairly good sleep, Miss, although the pain in my side is no
+better.  However, I am used to suffering.  So you don't care for
+Shakespeare, eh?"
+
+"I didn't say that," Jean defended.  "But I don't like reading those
+terrible passages about curses and such like."
+
+"But I like them, Miss.  They just suit me, and I feed on them."
+
+"How can you?  It is more than I can understand."
+
+"You would, though, if you had been treated as I have been.  I am
+Timon, and his sufferings were no greater than mine.  His so-called
+friends were false to him, and so were mine.  He cursed them, and I
+have made his curses mine.  I am really Timon."
+
+"Suppose I call you 'Timon,' then," Jean suggested with a smile.  "I
+don't know what else to call you, for I do not know your name.  'Mr.
+Timon' sounds very well, does it not?"
+
+"Yes, you may call me anything you like.  I suppose Timon is as good as
+any other name.  And it suits me, too."
+
+"You must have had a hard life," Jean replied, not knowing what else to
+say.  "It has evidently made you very bitter against your fellow men."
+
+"Hard is not a strong enough word, Miss.  You see that copy of the
+'Aeneid'?  Well, I read as much of that as I do Shakespeare.  I like to
+follow the history of Old Aeneas.  Many of his troubles were mine, and
+truly has Virgil sung of them.  He was an exile by fate, and so am I.
+He had many wanderings, and so have I.  He was treated with base
+ingratitude, and so was I.  Yes, Timon and Aeneas are my brothers in
+tribulation.  Like them I hate and curse my enemies."
+
+"But this is a Christian age," Jean reminded.  "We are taught by our
+Great Master to love our enemies, to bless and curse not."
+
+"What! love King George, that crazy fool?  Love a thing that brought on
+the war?  Love a creature with the brains of a mouse?  Nonsense.  I
+don't believe the Lord ever meant us to love such a being."
+
+Jean little expected that her quiet rebuke would cause such an
+outburst.  She had always held the King in the highest esteem, as one
+who ruled by divine authority.  To hear him now reviled, was more than
+she could endure.
+
+"You have no right to talk about our good King in such a manner," she
+stoutly defended.  "He is a great King, and thousands have died for him
+in the terrible war."
+
+"A great King!  A great King!" the man sneered.  "And how great is he?
+He is so great that he objected to painting St. Paul's Cathedral as
+being too much like the Roman Catholic custom.  He is so great that he
+doesn't like Shakespeare, but he laughs to split his sides at farces
+and pantomimes, where clowns swallow carrots and strings of sausages.
+He is so great that he spends much of his time learning the exact
+number of buttons, tags and laces, and the cut of all the cocked-hats,
+pigtails, and gaiters in his army.  Oh, yes, he is so great that he is
+always meddling in other people's affairs.  He pokes his red face into
+every cottage for miles around.  Imagine the King of England going
+about in his old wig, shovel-hat, and Windsor uniform, hob-nobbing with
+pig-boys, and old women making apple dumplings, and hurrahing with lazy
+louts early in the morning!  That is the great King of England!  How
+proud you must be of such a creature."
+
+"I am proud of him," Jean retorted, "and you should not misrepresent
+him.  The people love him for his pure and simple manner of living.  He
+goes among them that he might know how they live, for he wants to help
+them all he can.  They call him 'Farmer George,' so I have heard my
+father say, and I am sure that is an honour for any King."
+
+"Queer honour, I should say, Miss.  And he won great honour in his
+fight with America, didn't he?  He was going to teach the colonies a
+lesson, and whip them into line.  I'd like to have seen his old red
+face when the news of the defeat of his forces reached him.  He's
+getting his punishment now, and he'll get more before he's through.  He
+ruined me, an honest man.  But he's getting his turn.  I've heard that
+he goes out of his mind at times, and that his sons are turning out
+bad.  Yes, yes, he's finding out now what it is to suffer.  Oh, he'll
+learn, and I'm glad."
+
+To these bitter words Jean made no reply.  She realised that the less
+she said the better it would be.  To oppose this man would only inflame
+his anger.  She knew that his excitement increased his suffering, for
+at times during his tirades he had placed his hand to his injured side
+and gasped for breath.  As she gazed into the fire she knew that the
+man was watching her, although she did not look in his direction.  For
+a few minutes a deep silence pervaded the room, and when the man again
+spoke it was in a much milder tone.
+
+"You must have had a hard time of it," he said.  "I can well imagine
+how greatly worried your father must be."
+
+"I fear he is about heart-broken," Jean replied.  "He has been failing
+of late, and I am afraid this blow will go hard with him.  I was his
+only comfort."
+
+"It was a great trial for him to leave his old home, I suppose."
+
+"In a way it was.  But he was very brave through it all.  He did what
+he could to encourage others, and many were helped by his cheerful
+manner.  He told them that it was a great privilege to suffer in a
+noble cause, and that it was an honour to be loyal pioneers in a
+strange land."
+
+No sooner had Jean uttered these words than she wished them unsaid.
+But the man appeared not to have heard them.
+
+"Tell me about your old home," he requested.  "Also about the war, and
+your coming to this country.  It will help to pass the time."
+
+Jean was only too glad to do this, so quietly and simply she told about
+her old happy home in Connecticut, her mother's death, the war, and all
+that it meant to them, of their arrival at Portland Point, the voyage
+up the river, and the settlement in the wilderness.  Of Dane Norwood
+she did not speak, for it was not her nature to reveal to a stranger
+the deep things of the heart.  Neither did she mention the rangers and
+their march with the men of the settlement against the rebels.  A
+natural caution restrained her from speaking of this to one who so
+hated the Loyalists and King George.
+
+When she had finished she waited for the man to make some remarks.
+When, however, he did not speak, she rose, went into the other room,
+and busied herself in preparing dinner.  It was a simple repast, but it
+satisfied the invalid, and he showed his pleasure by a faint smile, the
+first that the girl had seen upon his face.
+
+"It is good of you to stay here and wait upon me," he said, "especially
+after what I said about the Loyalists and King George.  I owe my life
+to you, Miss, and I am not ashamed to acknowledge it."
+
+"It was Sam who saved you, Mr. Timon," Jean smilingly replied.
+
+"Ah, yes, in actually shooting the moose.  But for you, though, Sam
+would not have been on hand at the right minute.  It was you who
+suggested going to the mast-cutters on behalf of those Loyalists."
+
+"The real credit, then, should be given to the ones who plotted to
+carry me away from home.  But for them I would not be here now."
+
+"And my body would be lying out there in the snow, gored, torn and
+trampled.  Wonderful, indeed, is the chain of events."
+
+"It is wonderful," Jean agreed.  "I have been thinking so much about it
+ever since Sam rescued me that night from Seth Lupin.  I was in
+absolute despair, but just when help was needed most it seemed as if
+God reached out His hand and saved me.  The words of that beautiful
+hymn, 'The Lord's My Shepherd,' have been often in my mind.  I sang it
+one night to Sam and Kitty, and they were greatly pleased."
+
+"Will you sing it to me?" the man asked.  "It has been many years since
+I have heard any singing, except rough camp songs."
+
+Although surprised at this request, as well as the sudden change in the
+man's manner, Jean did as she was requested.  In a clear, sweet voice
+she sang the first verse,
+  The Lord's my shepherd, I'll not want,
+  He makes me down to lie
+  In pastures green; He leadeth me
+  The quiet waters by.
+
+She was about to begin the next verse when a step was heard outside,
+and then a heavy knock sounded upon the door.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+UNMASKED
+
+As Jean rose and opened the door a man at once entered, who stared at
+her in amazement.  He was of medium size, clad in a short fur jacket,
+belted at the waist, heavy cap, rough homespun trousers, stuck into
+coarse socks, and moccasins on his feet.  His face was covered with a
+ragged, bushy beard, flecked with frost, while particles of ice clung
+to his moustache.  His small piercing eyes attracted Jean most of all,
+causing her to retreat a step or two.  This the visitor noted, and
+laughed.
+
+"I won't hurt ye, Miss," he said.  "But, Lord! where have you dropped
+from?  I didn't know there was a wench like you on this side of hell."
+
+"Hold your tongue, Dave, and come over here," the man on the couch
+ordered.
+
+The visitor at once obeyed, and crossed the room.  He looked upon the
+invalid with surprise.
+
+"Hello! what's wrong with you?" he asked.
+
+"Oh, I met with an accident.  But what are you doing here, Dave?  What
+do you want?"
+
+Dave, however, made no reply, but turned and stared hard at Jean who
+was now standing near the table.
+
+"Did you hear what I said, Dave?  What do you want?"
+
+"Guess there's only one thing I want now, chief.  Where did ye git her?
+My! she's a beauty."
+
+At these words the injured man's eyes flashed with anger.  He lifted
+himself to a sitting position, and seized Dave by the arm.
+
+"She's my daughter," he lied, "and if you harm her I'll kill you.  See?"
+
+The visitor cowered and shrank back at this fierce threat.
+
+"I didn't mean to harm her," he muttered.  "But I didn't know ye had a
+daughter like that.  Where have ye kept her all this time?"
+
+"That's none of your business, Dave.  Tell me what you want, and then
+get out.  But, wait, I know you're thirsty.  Bring in some rum,
+daughter," he ordered, looking over at Jean.
+
+The latter was only too glad to get out of the room, and away from the
+man who in such a short time had filled her heart with fear.  Her hands
+trembled as she picked up a mug and filled it with liquor.  She then
+glanced toward the muskets in the opposite corner, and wondered if they
+were loaded.  She felt more lonely now than ever, and wished for Sam
+and Kitty.  She feared that stranger, and longed to close and bolt the
+door until he was out of the house.  At present, however, there was
+nothing else for her to do but to be as brave as possible.  No trace of
+fear did she show as she went into the other room, and paused just
+inside the door.  The two men were talking very earnestly, and the
+invalid seemed to be quite excited.
+
+"You must not let them come here," he was saying.  "Keep them away for
+a day or two, at least."
+
+"I can't," the other replied.  "They are on their way now, and should
+be here sometime to-night."
+
+At this Jean stepped forward and held out the noggin of rum.  Dave
+eagerly seized the mug, and drained it to the last drop.
+
+"My, that's great!" he declared, smacking his lips.  "Fill it again,
+won't you?"
+
+"No more now, Dave," his chief told him.  "You may have another,
+though, before you leave.  And you must leave soon and stop those men.
+They must wait until I am better."
+
+"But I can't stop them, chief.  They won't listen to me.  They're out
+for a big time, an' they're goin' to have it.  An' besides, there's
+that gang comin' from the Washademoak, an' they expect to meet them."
+
+"Oh, Lord!  I know it," the injured man groaned.  "But that doesn't
+make any difference.  I want you to stop that first gang from coming
+here.  Tell them that I am very sick and can't see them now."
+
+"Don't stop them, chief," Dave pleaded.  "This is about the last chance
+they'll have.  The rangers are on the way, so I hear, so we must get
+ahead of them.  Davidson, the devil, has got wind of this."
+
+"How did he hear?"
+
+"How did he hear?" Dave repeated with a laugh.  "How did he hear about
+that meeting on the Wed-nee-bak, an' round up that bunch at the lake?
+I guess you know as well as anybody."
+
+"Never mind about that now, Dave.  All I want you to do is to stop
+those men from coming here to-night.  Tell them to leave me out this
+time, and to march straight overland until they meet the men coming
+eastward.  I can't talk any more now, as my side hurts me very much.
+Daughter, give this man some more rum."
+
+Jean started at this order, and quickly left the room.  She was greatly
+excited, for she realised that serious trouble of some kind was on
+foot.  She believed that the rebels were about to attack that helpless
+band of Loyalists on the A-jem-sek as others had planned to do to the
+ones at Loyal.  What she had gathered from Dave's words led her to
+believe that the latter attempt had failed.  This was the first news
+she had received, and it greatly relieved her mind.  But what about the
+others, those suffering men, women and children but a short distance
+away?
+
+She was thankful when Dave at last left the house, and she was once
+more alone with the invalid.  The latter was very still, staring
+straight before him.  Jean crossed the room and stood by his side.
+
+"I want to know the truth," she began.  "Is an attack to be made upon
+those Loyalists?"
+
+"What do you mean?" the man asked in surprise.
+
+"Just what I said.  The rebels planned to wipe out the Loyalists down
+river, and it looks to me as if they are about to try the same upon the
+ones on the A-jem-sek."
+
+"Nonsense, girl," was the impatient reply.  "It is foolish to think of
+such a thing."
+
+"Well, what is the meaning, then, of this gathering of men from various
+parts who are so anxious to do something before the rangers arrive?
+They surely intend some mischief."
+
+"Just a little fun, Miss, that's all.  The boys like a lark
+occasionally.  It keeps them in good spirits."
+
+"Are they all like Dave?"
+
+"Why, don't you like him?"
+
+"No, I do not.  He has evil eyes."
+
+"Dave is not as bad as you think.  He is a weak creature, with little
+brains, and no sense at all.  But the rest are not a bad lot, though
+rather rough at times, especially when they are drinking.  But let us
+forget all about them for the present.  Read some to me.  Let it be
+Timon again.  I feel in a mood for him to-day.  If you knew Latin, I
+would have you read about Old Aeneas.  I like Virgil's full sounding
+sentences, 'Arma virumque cano.'  There's nothing like them."
+
+"Yes, there is," Jean quietly replied, as she rose to her feet, crossed
+the room, and took down a book from a small shelf on the wall.  This
+she opened as soon as she had taken her seat before the fire, and
+turned over several pages.
+
+"Here is something better than Virgil," she said, "and I am going to
+read from it now.  It will do both of us much good."
+
+"Is that the Bible, Miss?"
+
+"It is, and from all appearances you have not read much from it of
+late.  It is very dusty."
+
+"That's true, and I don't want to hear it now.  I don't like it."
+
+"Neither do we like medicine, Mr. Timon.  But when we are sick we take
+it whether we like it or not.  It is for our good."
+
+"So you think I am sick?"
+
+"There is something wrong with you, I am sure, more serious than your
+injured side.  This is the only thing, I believe, that will help you."
+
+"But I won't listen."
+
+"You don't have to.  I am going to read it, though.  You liked the
+verse of the hymn I sang, didn't you?"
+
+"Oh, that was different.  It was your voice I liked, but not the
+sentimental mush of words."
+
+"Well, then, you can listen to my voice now if you want to.  But I
+guess you will listen to the words, too, unless you are different from
+what I think you are."
+
+"What makes you say that?"
+
+"Do you really want to know?"
+
+"Certainly."
+
+Jean gazed into the fire for a few minutes, while the man watched her
+curiously.
+
+"Go on," he ordered.  "Out with it."
+
+"I believe you are trying to be what you are not," the girl bluntly
+charged.  "At first I thought you were a brute, and I was afraid of
+you.  But since I have learned what an educated man you are, and
+watched you after your outburst about the King and the Loyalists, I
+have come to the conclusion that you are fighting against your best
+convictions."
+
+"Why, girl, you surprise me!" the man gasped.
+
+"Perhaps so, Mr. Timon.  But can you truthfully say that I am not
+right?  You cannot, and I know that you have nothing in common with
+such a creature as that Dave who was here.  It isn't natural for a man
+like you to be in league with a gang of rebels.  There, now, I have
+told you what I think, so you can say what you like.  I am going to
+read the Master's words, for I believe you need them."
+
+Although outwardly calm, Jean's heart was beating fast.  She expected
+to hear the man deny what she had said, or say something in his own
+defence.  When, however, he remained silent, she glanced at him, and
+then turned her eyes upon the open page.
+
+
+"Ye have heard that it was said, Thou shalt love thy neighbour and hate
+thine enemy.  But I say unto you, Love your enemies, bless them that
+curse you, do good to them that hate you and pray for them that
+despitefully use you, and persecute you."
+
+
+"Stop, stop!" the man cried.  "I can't stand those words.  They are not
+meant for me.  I can't pray for my enemies.  Do you think I can pray
+for King George?"
+
+"That is for you to decide, Mr. Timon.  I am sure that I can pray for
+those who carried me away from home.  Don't you think that they need
+it?"
+
+Jean was about to close the book, when her eyes rested upon some words
+on the front page.  As she looked, her face turned pale, and she gave a
+slight gasp of astonishment.
+
+"What is the matter?" the man asked.
+
+But the girl did not hear him.  Her eyes were fixed upon the words
+
+  "To darling Dane,
+    With Mother's best love.
+      May God bless and keep you."
+
+Her heart almost stopped beating as she stared at the writing,
+especially the word "Dane."  What did it mean?  she asked herself.  It
+must be her own Dane; there could not be two.  Was this his book?  Was
+this his home?  Then a sudden thought flashed into her mind, and
+something which had greatly worried and puzzled her passed like the
+mist before the morning sun.  It must be so, and she understood now why
+Dane had not told her.
+
+Rising swiftly to her feet, she approached the couch.
+
+"Are you Dane Norwood's father?" she asked in a voice that trembled
+with emotion and excitement.
+
+With a gurgling cry, the man sat bolt upright, and glared at the girl.
+
+"Why do you ask me that?" he demanded.  "How dare you mention that name
+in this house?  What do you know about him?"
+
+"I know him to be one of the best men I have ever met.  Next to my
+father I love him more than any one in the world."
+
+"You do!"  It was all the man could say, so great was his astonishment.
+He dropped back upon the pillow, breathing heavily, and clutching hard
+at his side.
+
+"Yes, I know him," Jean continued, "and I think I understand now why he
+never told me about you.  And he had good reason, too."
+
+"And he never told you what kind of a being I am?" the man asked in a
+hoarse whisper.
+
+"He said nothing about you at all."
+
+"Are you sure, Miss?  Didn't he tell you how I forced him to leave
+home, and told him never to come here again?"
+
+"He said nothing to me about it, Mr. Timon.  He never mentioned your
+name, and when I asked him about his father, he always changed the
+subject."
+
+"My God!  Did he!"  The man's hands clutched hard at the blanket, and
+his eyes turned upon the girl's face expressed something of the agony
+of his soul.  "And he never betrayed me," he murmured as if to himself.
+"Did he tell you about his mother?"
+
+"Oh, yes, he often spoke to me about her, and told me what a noble
+woman she was.  He said that he owed everything to her."
+
+"He did, eh?  Well, I guess it's true.  She influenced him more than I
+did, and that was why he left after her death."
+
+"Why was that?"
+
+"He followed her in loyalty to King George.  Later he joined the King's
+rangers, and became Davidson's chief courier, 'The King's Arrow,' as he
+is called.  That was more than I could stand."
+
+"And so you had a fight?"
+
+"No, not a fight, Miss.  I was hot, I acknowledge, but Dane never said
+a word.  I can't forget, though, the look in his eyes as he left me,
+and I have not seen him since."
+
+"But you have heard about him, I suppose?"
+
+"Oh, yes, reports of his doings reach me from time to time; that is
+all."  The man sighed, and shifted a little to an easier position.
+
+"Would you like to see him?" Jean asked.  "I am sure that he would be
+only too glad to come to you."
+
+"Do you think so, Miss?  But why should he come after what I said to
+him?"
+
+"Because he is so noble and true.  You little know what he is to me.
+Look," and she raised her hand to the arrow at her throat, "he gave me
+this.  It is a token of our love.  He made it with his own hands from a
+coin given to him by his mother.  It was the means of saving me from
+the slashers.  Kitty saw it first, and it told her about me."
+
+"Your story is really wonderful, girl, and I am thankful that you have
+been saved.  It means more to me than you imagine."
+
+"In what way?"
+
+"Don't you know?  Because you were saved, you and those Indians were on
+hand to deliver me from that moose."
+
+"So that is the reason, then, why you are so kind to me, and allowed
+those supplies to go to those needy Loyalists."
+
+"No it is not," was the curt reply.  "My life is of little value to any
+one.  It's because you are James Sterling's daughter; that's why.  I
+would do anything for his sake.  He was a good friend of mine, and so
+was his wife."
+
+"I am thankful that you knew them.  Was it for long, Mr. Norwood?"
+
+"Why do you call me that?"
+
+"Isn't that your name?"
+
+"Heavens!  No.  I am Thomas Norman, your father's old friend."
+
+At this confession Jean uttered a cry of amazement, and stared at the
+man before her.  She was almost too confused to think, so overwhelming
+was her emotion.  She felt that she must be dreaming, so wonderful did
+it all appear.
+
+"Yes," the man continued, "it is better for you to know all, and it
+relieves my mind.  Dane took the first part of his right name, and
+merely changed the second.  Now you understand all."
+
+Jean did understand, and it gave her cause for much thought.  She sat
+down and gazed silently into the fire.  How glad her father would be to
+know that his friend was alive.  And yet he would be greatly distressed
+when he learned that he was a rebel.  Could they ever be friends again?
+she wondered.  This modern Timon, with such hatred in his heart to the
+King and the Loyalists, was not the man her father had known in the
+days of old.  Loyalty with the latter was a vital thing, and how could
+he endure a man so bitterly opposed to the King?
+
+The invalid surmised her thoughts as he watched her.  She presented a
+charming picture, ensconced in the deep chair, and he could well
+understand how Dane must love her.  He had always longed for a
+daughter, and of the many girls he had ever known, the one now before
+him appealed to him most of all.  She was the only white woman who had
+entered his house since his wife's death, and he had been strongly
+drawn to her from the first time of meeting.  Living so much among
+rough, rebellious men, he had acquired many of their ways.  But in the
+presence of this sweet, gentle girl these had vanished like ice before
+the bright sun, and the real nobleness of his nature re-asserted
+itself.  He was tired of the life he had been living for years.  He
+longed for companions after his own heart, and a home such as he had
+known in the past.  And what a home the girl before him would make!
+And reconciled to his only son, what a heaven on earth it would be!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+BEHIND THE BOLTED DOOR
+
+When Thomas Norman fled with his wife and child from the restraining
+bonds of civilisation and became the leader of a band of lawless rovers
+of the wild, he little realised how far-reaching would be the effect of
+his rash and hasty action.  In the spirit of revenge he had sown the
+wind, but he had forgotten the whirlwind that one day he would be
+called upon to reap.  For a time he had rejoiced in flaming the embers
+of rebellion against the King, thinking thus to get more than even for
+his imaginary injury.  The war had filled him with delight, and he did
+everything in his power to arouse the people, both whites and Indians,
+against King George.  For a while he was certain of success, especially
+when assistance came from the rebelling states in the form of presents
+for the Indians and a personal letter from General Washington,
+accompanied by belts of wampum.  For a time he made remarkable
+progress, and so stirred the Indians that at last they started on the
+warpath against the English.  Ninety canoes filled with warriors headed
+down river to ravage the country around Fort Howe.  But they were met
+by James Simonds, the trader at Portland Point, and a conference was
+held along the river.  Before giving an answer, the head chief, Pierre
+Tomah, said that he must consult the Divine being.  So throwing himself
+upon his face in the sand, he lay motionless for the space of nearly an
+hour.  Then rising, he informed the other chiefs that he had been
+advised by the Great Spirit to keep peace with King George's men.
+After that a treaty was signed at Fort Howe.  General Washington's
+presents were delivered up, the Indians drank the health of the King,
+they were feasted and presented with numerous gifts.  All this was a
+great blow to Thomas Norman, although he continued to inflame the few
+Indians who still remained rebellious as well as the renegade white men.
+
+His wife, a gentle and refined woman, never agreed with him in his
+disloyalty to the King.  At first she pleaded and reasoned, but at last
+gave up in despair, and devoted herself to her simple household
+affairs, and the training of her one child, the only comfort of her
+solitary life.  When at length she left him and he laid her body to
+rest at the foot of a big pine tree, he was a heart-broken man.  He
+understood when it was too late what she had meant to him.  Then when
+Dane, influenced by his mother's teaching, left him to become one of
+the King's rangers, his cup of sorrow was filled to overflowing.  For
+months after he lived a lonely life within his silent house, dreaded by
+the slashers and Indians alike.  The latter shunned his solitary abode,
+and always spoke of him on rare occasions as the chief with the
+"twisted head."
+
+When, however, the English forces were defeated, and the war brought to
+a close, Norman's hopes again revived.  He became active once more,
+feeling certain that the Indians and others would now side with the
+conquerors and wrest England's grip from the valley of the St. John
+River.  The King's mast-cutters had been a source of continual worry to
+him.  Why should those great pines be used for the royal navy? he
+asked.  They belonged to the natives and other occupants of the land,
+and should be reserved for future needs.  The marking of the choicest
+trees with the broad arrow filled his heart with bitterness, and his
+words so aroused the rebel brood around him that they decided to drive
+the mast-cutters out of the country, and put a stop to the business.
+The arrival of thousands of Loyalists also stirred him deeply, and he
+spread the report, which was readily taken up, that the newcomers would
+settle on all the good land, slaughter the game, and force the rightful
+owners to leave.
+
+The failure of the attempt upon the Loyalists during the fall, and the
+carrying of Flazeet and Rauchad to Fort Howe had only embittered the
+rebels who had not taken part in the affair.  They roused to action,
+and determined to wreak revenge upon the mast-cutters between the St.
+John and the A-jem-sek.  They had arranged their plans with much
+secrecy, but they learned at the last minute that in some mysterious
+manner word had reached the rangers, who were hastening to the
+assistance of the King's men.  There was, accordingly, no time to lose.
+They must strike at once, and then vanish into the depths of the forest.
+
+Thomas Norman was well aware of this proposed attack upon the
+mast-cutters.  Although he did not oppose it, he took little interest
+in the matter.  In fact, he had very little ambition for anything.  He
+was feeling somewhat weary during the fall, and the silence of his
+house was more depressing than ever.  During the lonely days, and still
+more lonely nights, he thought much about the past.  He knew that he
+had made a failure of life, and that he had nothing to live for now.
+At times he would endeavor to fan the coals of rebellion by reading
+"King Lear," "Timon of Athens," and the story of Old Aeneas.  But the
+effect was never lasting, and when the artificial stimulation subsided
+he was more depressed than ever.
+
+Such was his mood the day he rushed forth from the unbearable
+loneliness of his house and encountered the moose.  The accident, and
+the meeting with the girl had aroused him for a while, and his old-time
+spirit of rebellion flared up in his passionate outburst against the
+King and the Loyalists.  But it was only temporary, and when he learned
+that the girl was James Sterling's daughter, he was forced to
+capitulate.  He made a few spasmodic efforts after that, but the
+gentleness of the girl, together with the fact that she knew and loved
+Dane, swept everything else away.
+
+His great concern now was about the rebels.  They could march against
+the mast-cutters if they wished, but he did not want them to see Jean.
+He knew what they were like, and when their coarse brutal natures
+became inflamed through liquor, there was no telling what they might
+do.  For this reason he had urged Dave to turn them aside, and induce
+them to march straight overland.  Of the success of this plan he had
+little hope, as the slashers knew of the rum he kept on hand, and for
+that they would come, if for nothing else.
+
+So that night as he lay there watching Jean as she sat before the fire,
+he listened intently, expecting every minute to hear the voices and
+steps of the undesired rebels.  Bitterly now he regretted his action in
+the past, and almost cursed himself for his blind folly.  Several times
+he was on the point of warning Jean of her danger.  But how could he
+tell her, and what good would it do?  There was no place where she
+could go for protection, and he was helpless to aid her.  His only
+comfort lay in the hope that he could influence the men by making them
+think that she was his daughter.  This, he knew, would be but a poor
+excuse, and it was hardly likely that they would believe him.  They
+were well aware that he had no daughter, and would look upon the girl's
+presence in the house in one light only.  A groan escaped his lips as
+he thought of this.
+
+"Are you suffering much?" Jean asked, going to his side.  "Is there
+anything I can do for you?"
+
+"Not for me, I'm afraid," was the reply.  "There is something, though,
+that you can do.  I may have visitors to-night, and no doubt they will
+be hungry.  Do you think you could carry those provisions into this
+room?  I don't want the men to disturb you.  I hope those sacks will
+not be too heavy."
+
+"I think I can do it," Jean replied.  "Where shall I put them?"
+
+"As near the door there as possible.  And the rum; don't forget that, I
+was going to ask you to pour it out in the snow for fear that the men
+might drink too much.  But that might not be wise.  They know I have
+it, and if they do not get it they might become ugly."
+
+It took Jean some time to carry and drag in the supplies and stack them
+in a corner near the door.  She understood fairly well the meaning of
+this, and it filled her heart with a nameless fear.  This was increased
+when she had with difficulty brought in the rum, and stood panting
+after the exertion.
+
+"There is a strong bolt on the door of your room," Norman explained.
+"It might be well to keep it fastened when the men are here, for one
+can never tell what might happen."
+
+"You think there will be danger, then?" Jean asked, as she sat down in
+the big chair.
+
+"There is always danger more or less with those men around.  When I was
+well I could keep them within bounds.  But now I am helpless.  And,
+besides, you are here, and that makes a difference."
+
+"I must keep out of sight, then."
+
+"It might be just as well.  I am afraid that Dave has told the men
+about you, so they will be anxious to see my--my daughter."
+
+Jean asked no further questions, but her face was very pale and her
+heart beat fast.  She felt more helpless than she had been when with
+her Indian captors upon the river.  What could she do to defend
+herself?  She thought of the guns in the other room, and wondered if
+they were loaded.  She might use them, but what could one woman do
+against a band of lawless men?  Anyway, she was determined to do almost
+anything to defend herself, if necessary.
+
+Slowly the evening wore away, and anxiously Jean listened to every
+sound.  The man on the cot slept, and at times muttered words which the
+girl could not understand.  She felt inexpressibly lonely, and she
+often glanced toward the small window as if expecting to see faces
+peering in upon her.  She did not dare to sleep lest the slashers
+should come and catch her off guard.  How she longed for Sam and Kitty.
+What a comfort they would be.
+
+At length she rose to her feet, crossed the room, opened the door and
+looked out.  It was not a dark night, but the moon, now almost at the
+full, was invisible.  A keen wind was driving over the land and it
+sounded among the trees the same as it did before the storm she enjoyed
+so much in the lodge by the lake.  How weird appeared the great trees,
+and she imagined she could see menacing forms watching her from their
+sombre depths.  She knew where lay the trail by which the slashers
+would come, and she kept her eyes fixed in that direction.  At the back
+of the house another trail began, which led to the St. John River, so
+Sam had told her, and passed the very place where the mast-cutters were
+at work.  This to the lonely girl seemed the trail of hope, while the
+other was the trail of doom.
+
+She was about to close the door, for the wind was piercing, when
+casting a final glance toward the forest, she caught sight of dim forms
+moving swiftly and silently toward the house.  That they were the
+dreaded slashers she had not the slightest doubt.  Quickly she shut the
+door, and hastened over to the cot.  Norman opened his eyes and looked
+at her in a dazed manner.
+
+"They are coming!" she cried.  "I have seen them!"
+
+"Where are they?" the man asked, rising to a sitting position.
+
+"Just out there," and she motioned to the right.
+
+"Hurry up, then, and go into the other room.  Bolt the door, and put
+out the light."
+
+Jean needed no further bidding.  In another minute she had the door
+securely fastened, and the candle blown out.  She then took up her
+position in a dark corner, where with fast-beating heart she waited to
+hear what might take place in the adjoining room.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+THROUGH THE NIGHT AND THE STORM
+
+In a few minutes the slashers arrived.  Jean could hear them quite
+distinctly, and her heart sank within her as she listened to their
+laughter and rough talk.  They were in a merry mood, she could plainly
+tell, and although she could not understand all they said, she was well
+aware that they were asking for her and the rum.  From this she knew
+that Dave had told them of her presence in the house, and she wondered
+whether they would try to force their way into her room.  She glanced
+in the direction of the muskets, and although she could not see them,
+the thought that they were there gave her some comfort.
+
+Standing where she was it was impossible to hear plainly, so stepping
+to the door, she put her ear down close to a crack through which the
+light was streaming.  She listened intently to all that was taking
+place, although at first it was difficult to make out any sense from
+the babel of voices.  Occasionally she could hear Norman's voice urging
+the men to be quiet or to leave the house.  That the visitors had found
+the rum was quite evident, for she could hear them dipping the mug into
+the liquor, followed by expressions of satisfaction.
+
+"Dat's good rum, chief," she heard one say.  "Where you get it, eh?"
+
+"Where it all comes from, of course," Norman sternly replied.  "You
+must not drink too much of it."
+
+"Oh, it'll take more'n dat to knock me out."
+
+"Don't be too sure of that.  The mast-cutters are no babies, and you'll
+need to be in good condition when you meet them."
+
+"I don't care for no damn mast-cutters.  Rum's my best friend when I
+fight dem."
+
+"Hear, hear!" another shouted.  "Good fer you, Jerry!  We're with you
+on that.  Rum puts hell into us, an' makes us fight like the devil."
+
+"But the mast-cutters can fight, too," Norman reminded.  "They are well
+armed, remember."
+
+"'Spose they are, what of it?  They won't have time to use their guns.
+They'll all be asleep when we arrive."
+
+"But what about the rangers?"
+
+"They'll never touch us.  We'll have the job done, an' the camp wiped
+out before they get there.  We're no fools."
+
+"They rounded up Flazeet and his men last fall, though.  How did they
+hear about that attack?"
+
+"How did they hear?  Flazeet talked too much; that was the trouble.
+But we're different.  We'll not get caught."
+
+"But Davidson has his men everywhere.  Perhaps he has already warned
+the mast-cutters, so they may be waiting for you."
+
+"Well, let them wait.  We'll have that bunch with us from the
+Washademoak, an' you know what devils they are to fight."
+
+"When do you expect to meet them?"
+
+"To-morrow sometime.  Then at night we'll drop in to see our friends,
+the mast-cutters, an' settle up an old score once an' fer all."
+
+What was said further Jean could not distinguish, for several men just
+then lifted up their voices in a rough song, showing that the rum was
+already taking effect.  But what she had heard caused her great
+uneasiness.  She understood now the object of these men.  They were to
+march against the mast-cutters, sweep down upon them in the dead of
+night, and murder them all.  She shuddered as she thought of this.
+Something must be done to warn the mast-cutters of their danger.  They
+were the King's men, and it would not do to allow them to be slain
+without a chance of defending themselves.  Why should she not go and
+give the warning?  This idea at first seemed foolish.  How could she
+find the way?  Would she dare to traverse the forest alone?  But the
+more she thought of it, the more she felt that she was the one who
+should undertake the task.  If she did not do something she could never
+forgive herself.  And what would her father say if he knew that she had
+hesitated in the path of duty?  It was a hard battle she fought as she
+crouched there in the dark corner.  She pictured to herself the gloomy
+forest, the uncertainty of the way, and the struggle necessary before
+she could reach the mast-cutters.  Cautiously she crept to the little
+window and peered out.  How dismal and forbidding seemed the forest.
+She could see the tree-tops waving and the snow swirling before the
+wind.  The prospect of going forth alone on such a night was far from
+cheerful.
+
+She was about to leave the window when a bearded face was suddenly
+pressed against the glass.  With a gasp of fear she staggered back, and
+fled to the darkness of her corner.  And there she crouched, waiting
+with wide-staring eyes for what would happen next.
+
+The voices in the adjoining room were becoming louder and more
+boisterous.  What she presently heard caused her to straighten suddenly
+up, and a chill to sweep through her body.  The men were calling for
+her, and demanding the chief to bring her to them.
+
+"We want the girl," she heard one man say.
+
+"You won't get her," Norman replied.  "She is my daughter, and you must
+not touch her."
+
+"Your daughter, be damned!  You ain't got no daughter.  You can't git
+that off on us.  She's in the other room, an' we want her quick."
+
+What Norman said in reply Jean could not understand, for the noise the
+men were making.  But she did hear some one trying the door, and
+cursing because he could not get it open.  She knew now that the
+critical moment had arrived.  There was no time to lose.  She must
+leave the place and nee to the shelter of the forest.  That was her
+only hope.
+
+By the dim light of the dying fire she donned the coat, cap and mitts
+that Kitty had made for her.  Then seizing her snow-shoes, she
+cautiously opened the back door.  As she did so she could hear the
+other door creaking beneath the weight of several bodies pressing
+against it from the opposite side.  That it would soon give way she
+felt certain, so she must make her escape while there was time.
+Stepping out into the night, she looked fearfully around.  Seeing no
+one, she sped along the trail, and in another minute was within the
+sheltering arms of the great forest.  Here she paused and looked back.
+Nothing could she see but the house standing black and drear in the
+midst of the little clearing.
+
+It took her but a few minutes to arrange her snowshoes on her feet, and
+she had just straightened herself up from her stooping position when a
+crash and a medley of shouts fell upon her ears.  She knew the meaning
+of these sounds, and her heart beat wildly.  The door had been burst
+open, and the men were in the room searching for her.  Presently she
+saw several come out of the house and look around.  Waiting to see no
+more, she sped along the trail which stretched out before her.  Never
+had she travelled with such speed, her great fear urging her forward.
+Would the slashers follow her? she asked herself.  At times she stopped
+and listened with the strained attention of a hunted animal.  But
+nothing could she hear, so encouraged she pressed onward.
+
+At first she did not find the walking difficult, owing partly to her
+excitement and the freedom she felt in being away from the house of
+dread.  She had no trouble in following the trail, for sufficient light
+sifted down through the trees to show the beaten track.  She wondered
+who had travelled that way as she had not heard Norman refer to any one
+coming from the great river.  She had no idea as to the time of night,
+although she hoped that it might be late for then she could look
+forward more hopefully to the dawn.  That the trail would lead her to
+the mast-cutters she had not the slightest doubt, so this gave her
+considerable comfort.
+
+She had been travelling about an hour when the snow began to fall.
+Among the trees it did not at first impede her progress, but she could
+tell by the roaring overhead that a heavy storm was abroad.  When
+crossing a wild meadow or a small inland lake she experienced some of
+the force of the wind, and the snow almost blinded her.  She was always
+glad when the trail led once more into the shelter of the woods.
+
+At length, however, a sudden weariness came upon her.  The walking grew
+heavy, and she was finding much difficulty in following the trail.
+Occasionally she stepped aside and sank into the deep snow, out of
+which she struggled with great effort.  Each time it was harder to
+extricate herself, and her feet would slip provokingly off the
+snow-shoes.  And all the time the storm increased in fury, reminding
+her of that other storm when she was at the little lake.  But it had a
+different meaning to her now.  As it tore through the branches overhead
+it sounded like the voice of destruction rather than grand martial
+music.  The swaying and creaking trees seemed like an army of monsters
+about to fall upon her.  The helplessness of her situation overwhelmed
+her.  What could she do against the fury of the elements?  Why had she
+ventured forth alone and unaided?  It was foolish to think that she
+could reach the mast-cutters.  But then she knew that the forces of
+nature were more merciful than those wretched slashers she had left
+behind.  Better to fall in the midst of the great forest, and let the
+snow enshroud her body, than to allow brutes in the forms of men to lay
+their vile hands upon her.  But she would win.  She must not give up.
+She would go on.
+
+Step by step she slowly pushed her way through the forest and the
+night.  She longed for morning, for the blessed light of day to dispel
+the gloomy shades around her.  But it was a long time coming, and she
+was so weary.  Often now she paused to rest, each time longer than the
+last.  At length she felt that she could go no farther.  She could not
+find the trail from which she had wandered, and the snow was deep.  She
+floundered about for a few minutes, and then with a cry of despair she
+looked wildly around.  What was she to do?  She knew that she was lost,
+yes, lost in the mighty woods where no aid could reach her.  She
+thought of the mast-cutters.  She must reach them, and warn them of
+their danger.  What would her father and Dane think if she failed in
+her duty?  But would they ever know of the efforts she had made?  Would
+her body ever be found?  No, no, it must not be.  She would not give
+up.  She must not die there.  The mast-cutters must be warned.
+
+Under the inspiration of this resolve she again started forward.  She
+pressed bravely on her way, wearily dragging her snow-shoes which now
+were so heavy.  For a few minutes she moved onward.  But her strength
+was soon spent, and a great weakness swept upon her.  She staggered
+from side to side, and fought hard to stand upright.  She grew
+bewildered, and the trees seemed to be whirling around her.  The
+roaring of the storm overhead sounded like the voice of a demon mocking
+at her despair.  She could endure it no longer; she felt that she was
+going out of her mind.
+
+"Daddy, daddy!  Dane, Dane!" she called, but only the wind replied with
+a wild shriek to her passionate appeal for help.
+
+Against a great tree she leaned her tired body for support.  But it was
+of little assistance in her distress.  It could not reach out
+sheltering arms, neither could it whisper words of comfort and hope.
+Gradually her body weakened, drooped, and then like a tired child she
+sank upon the snow at the foot of the lordly pine.  The wind continued
+its roaring in the trees, and the snow sifting down through their
+branches whitened the still, huddled form below.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+WITHIN THE LONE CABIN
+
+The delay which kept Dane Norwood at Fort Howe as chief witness against
+the two rebel leaders was hard for him to endure.  He longed to be away
+in his search for the missing girl.  At times he was like a caged lion
+just from the jungle, and threatened bodily harm to a number of
+soldiers of the garrison.  When at last free, he and Pete lost no time
+in heading up the river, straight for the little settlement below Oak
+Point.  Here he was joyfully received by the Loyalists, and the scraps
+of news he was enabled to impart were eagerly received and discussed
+for days.  He told them of the trial and conviction of Flazeet and
+Rauchad, and that their punishment would undoubtedly be very severe.
+He related the hardships of the Loyalists who had come to Portland
+Point with the fall fleet.  Some had gone up river, but others, chiefly
+disbanded soldiers, were having a serious time.  They had pitched their
+tents in a most exposed place, thatched them with spruce boughs, and
+banked them with snow.  But the suffering was so terrible that numbers
+had already died.  This was sad news to the settlers, and they
+considered themselves fortunate in their comfortable abodes, with
+sufficient food and fuel to last them through the hard winter.
+
+Colonel Sterling had aged greatly since Dane last saw him.  He was much
+stooped, and his hair and beard whiter than ever.  His eyes expressed
+the agony of his soul.  They, more than anything else, revealed to Dane
+what he had undergone since the loss of his daughter.  He uttered no
+complaint, and when the young man entered his house he had asked no
+questions.  He knew all too well that Dane's search had been in vain.
+He said little that evening, but listened with bowed head as the
+courier related his experiences during the past few weeks.  But Old
+Mammy was not so reticent, and asked Dane no end of questions, and
+begged him to bring back her lost darling.
+
+"De Lo'd will not let dem Injuns keep my lil'l lamb," she declared.
+"Yo' kin find her, Mistah Dane, an' bring her back to me.  I pray fo'
+her ebbery night an' all tro de day.  I know yo' will come agin, an'
+bring my los' lamb wif yo'."
+
+The next day Dane and Pete left the settlement and headed up river.
+They started early and travelled hard.  They were well aware that a
+storm was not far off, so Dane wished to be well up the Washademoak
+before the tempest burst.  He knew of the band of Indians far inland,
+and there he hoped to find Jean.  It was the most likely place where
+she would be taken, so he reasoned.  But if he could not find her
+there, he would no doubt learn something of her whereabouts.
+
+He parted with Pete at the entrance to this stream early that
+afternoon, as he wished to send the Indian to Oromocto with a message
+to Davidson.  As for himself he could not take the time to go as every
+hour was precious.  With feverish haste he pressed on alone, planning
+to travel all night, if possible.  It was a dreary and desolate region
+through which he moved, with not a sign of life anywhere.  His
+snow-shoes bent and creaked beneath his great strides, tossing the snow
+aside like spray from a ship's bow.  The weight of his musket, and the
+pack of food upon his back impeded him not in the slightest degree.  He
+was a giant of the trail, sturdy of body, sound in wind, and possessed
+of remarkable endurance.  He had to be all these to be chief of the
+royal rangers in the service of William Davidson.  He knew what it was
+to travel day and night, bearing some message of importance, so the
+journey ahead was nothing out of the ordinary.  But he had a greater
+mission now than ever before, and this inspired him to more strenuous
+efforts.  The vision of a fair face was constantly with him, and the
+thought that Jean needed his help drove him forward like the wind.
+
+The short afternoon was waning as he rounded a bend in the stream.  To
+the left was a small cove, and it was here that one of the trails
+overland to the Great Lake and the river beyond began.  Dane knew of
+the log cabin tucked away among the trees which served as a
+resting-place to weary travellers.  He had often stopped there, but he
+had no intention of doing so now when every minute was so precious.
+Keeping straight on his way, he had almost reached the point on the
+upper side of the cove, when he came across a well-beaten trail leading
+to the cabin.  He examined it carefully and with considerable interest.
+He knew at once that a large body of men had recently passed that way,
+and he wondered who they could be.
+
+Dane's suspicions at once became aroused, for who else but the slashers
+would be travelling in a body from the Washademoak?  He did not relish
+the idea of stopping to investigate, but he knew that this was his duty
+as a King's ranger.  With a slight exclamation of annoyance, he went
+ashore and plunged into the forest in order to come close to the cabin
+under cover of the trees.  It would not do to follow in on the beaten
+trail lest the slashers should be near.  He must not be seen by his
+old-time enemies, so caution was necessary.
+
+It took him but a short time to come in sight of the cabin, and when a
+few rods away he paused and listened.  But not a sound could he hear,
+so thus emboldened, he stepped up close to the door.  The snow around
+the building had been beaten down by numerous moccasined feet, and
+looking to the right, he saw where the visitors had left the place by
+the overland route.
+
+And as he stood there a groan from within the cabin fell upon his ears,
+followed by a weak, wailing cry for help.  Quickly he pushed open the
+door and entered.  At first he could see nothing, but as his eyes
+became accustomed to the darkness, he detected a form huddled upon the
+floor, almost at his feet.
+
+"What's wrong?" he asked.
+
+"I'm dying!" was the reply.  "Fer God's sake, help me!"
+
+"Who are you, anyway? and what has happened?"
+
+"I'm Bill Botreau, an' the slashers have fixed me.  Tom's dead.  That's
+him jist over there."
+
+Drawing a small candle from his pocket, Dane stepped over to the
+fire-place, and lighted it at one of the live coals which still
+remained.  He was thus enabled to see more clearly, and the sight which
+met his eyes gave him a severe shock.  Everything in the room was
+smashed to pieces, table, benches, and bunks.  It was evident that a
+great fight had taken place, and the victors had departed leaving their
+two victims upon the floor.
+
+Dane paid no heed to the dead man in a corner of the room, but turned
+his attention to the wounded one near the door.  He could not see his
+face, and as he looked he gave a sudden start, for lying before him was
+one of the three men who had attacked him at Portland Point.
+
+"Where are you hurt?" he asked.
+
+"Here," and the man placed his hand to his left side.  "One of them
+devils jabbed me with his knife.  Oh!"  His hand dropped, and his face
+became distorted with pain.
+
+Dane felt certain that the injured man could live but a short time, so
+he must gain all the information possible.  He stooped and held the
+candle low.
+
+"Do you know me?" he asked.
+
+The prostrate man stared hard at his face for a few seconds, but
+manifested no sign of recognition.
+
+"I guess you don't," Dane continued.  "But I know you as one of the men
+who attacked me last May at Portland Point.  I am Dane Norwood, the
+King's ranger."
+
+"Good Lord!" Botreau gasped.  "Do it quick, then, fer God's sake."
+
+"Do what?"
+
+"Finish what them devils nearly did.  I deserve it."
+
+"I'm not a brute even if you are," Dane declared.  "I want to help you,
+not kill you."
+
+"But I'm beyond help, an' will soon be like Tom there."
+
+"How did it happen?"
+
+"Too much rum an' a fight.  We've not been on good terms with the gang
+since Seth Lupin's death.  They blamed us fer their troubles."
+
+"What!  Is Seth dead?  Who killed him?"  This was important news to
+Dane.
+
+"Yes, Seth's dead, but who killed him I don't know.  It was awful!"
+
+"Where?  When?"
+
+"Up stream, just outside the lodge where the Indians had left the
+Colonel's daughter."
+
+He paused, but Dane laid a heavy hand upon his shoulder.
+
+"Go on," he ordered, in a voice filled with intense excitement.  "Where
+is the girl?  Is she safe?"
+
+"Blamed if I know.  We got them Injuns to carry her off fer Seth.  Then
+that night jist as he was about to enjoy her company something
+happened.  Me an' my pardners were waitin' fer him to come back, but he
+never came.  At last gittin' anxious, we went to see what was the
+matter, an' there we found Seth layin' on the ground dead.  I tell you
+it was awful.  I ain't been any good since."
+
+"What became of the girl?" Dane questioned.
+
+"I don't know.  She was gone when we got to the lodge.  It must have
+been the devil that killed Seth an' carried off the girl."
+
+"Nonsense," Dane impatiently chided.  "Don't be such a fool as to
+believe that."
+
+"But if you'd seen the marks upon Seth's throat, you'd say it was the
+work of the devil, an' no human bein'.  An' there are others who think
+the same, too."
+
+"What happened after that?"
+
+"The gang came, an' they chased Injun Sam.  But they made a mess of
+that job, an' got scared 'most to death."
+
+"What did they chase Sam for?"
+
+"Oh, some thought that he was the one who killed Seth an' carried off
+the girl.  He had been seen hangin' around, an' so he was suspected.
+But it wasn't Sam, I tell ye.  It was the devil, an' they found that
+out to their sorrow."
+
+"In what way?"
+
+"They were campin' one night in the woods when in a twinklin' they were
+all knocked senseless.  When they came to, their guns, grub, an'
+everything else was gone.  Now, if the Injuns had done it, they
+wouldn't have left one of the gang alive.  They were 'most scared to
+death, so they are certain now that it was the devil."
+
+"So you haven't heard anything more about the Colonel's daughter?" Dane
+queried.
+
+"Nuthin'."
+
+All this was valuable news to Dane, and it filled him with a great
+hope.  He was not superstitious, so the idea of the devil did not
+affect him in the least.  It was Sam, no doubt, who had rescued Jean,
+and was taking good care of her.  His heart now was lighter than it had
+been since her capture.  But where was Sam?  He must find him as soon
+as possible.  He knew where he generally camped, so he determined to go
+there at once.
+
+In his excitement he had forgotten, however, about the slashers who had
+recently left the cabin.  But his mind reverted to them as he looked at
+the helpless, suffering creature before him.
+
+"Where are the slashers going?" he asked.
+
+"Against the mast-cutters," was the reply.  "They have been plannin'
+this fer some time, an' are expectin' to meet the men from the north
+to-morrow.  I hope to God they'll git the surprise of their lives.
+They're devils, that's what they are, an' I hope the mast-cutters'll
+kill every damn one of them.  Look what they've done to me an' Tom."
+
+"When are they planning to attack the mast-cutters?"
+
+"Sometime to-morrow night.  They're plannin' to murder every one of
+them.  An' they'll do it fer sure, the devils, unless the mast-cutters
+are warned."
+
+This Dane realised was only too true, and the blood surged madly
+through his veins.  He must reach the camp first and warn the men of
+their danger.  And he would lead them against the slashers, for nothing
+would give him greater satisfaction than to surprise and confound those
+skulking rebels.  His heart turned toward Jean, and he longed to go in
+search of her.  But now, as when standing near that line drawn in the
+sand, duty came first.  He felt that Jean was safe, but the lives of
+the King's men were at stake, so there must be no hesitation on his
+part.  But what was he to do with the injured man?  That he was in a
+critical condition, he was well aware, but how bad he did not know.  It
+was getting dark now, and he could not delay much longer.
+
+"When did the slashers leave here?" he asked.
+
+"When?" Botreau repeated in a dazed manner.  "I don't know when.  But
+it seems an age."
+
+"Then, I must get ahead of them, and warn the mast-cutters."
+
+But the stricken man gave a pitiful cry, and reaching out, caught Dane
+feebly by the hand.
+
+"Don't leave me," he pleaded.  "I'm dyin', an' I'm afraid to die alone.
+Oh, it's terrible here, an' I'm gettin' so weak.  I wonder what makes
+this room so dark.  An' it's cold, too.  Fix the fire, won't ye, an'
+lay me near it."
+
+Dane stooped and held the candle close to the man's face.  He knew that
+he was dying, bleeding to death, for the floor was wet with blood.
+There was nothing that he could do, and of no use would it be to attend
+to the fire.  No earthly heat could now warm the body of the wretched
+man before him.  All he could do was to watch and wait while the life
+slowly ebbed away.
+
+For a few minutes silence reigned in the room, broken only by the dying
+man's laboured breathing.  At length he slightly lifted his head and
+looked wildly around.
+
+"Keep back!" he cried.  "Don't touch me!  I didn't steal the girl!  I
+didn't, I say!"
+
+"Hush, hush," Dane soothed, kneeling by his side and taking his hand in
+his.  "I won't let anything touch you."
+
+But nothing could comfort the unhappy man.  He fought his imaginary
+foe, and pleaded to be saved.
+
+"It's the devil that did it, I tell ye," he wailed.  "Look, there's the
+marks of his fingers upon Seth.  Don't let him get me, for God's sake,
+don't!"
+
+Never before had Dane been in such an awkward predicament.  It was hard
+to listen to the raving man when he could do nothing to help him.  And
+all the time it was getting later, and he should be on his way to warn
+the King's men.  He rose to his feet, stepped to the door, and looked
+out.  It was blowing hard, and he knew that the storm was not far off.
+He must get away before it burst.
+
+A peculiar sound from the man on the floor caused him to hasten to his
+side.  In an instant he saw that all was over, and that the earthly
+career of Bill Botreau was ended.
+
+There was little now that Dane could do.  He did not fancy the idea of
+leaving the bodies lying there uncovered, so going outside he cut and
+carried in a large armful of spruce boughs.  These he spread carefully
+over the bodies.
+
+"It is more than your own gang would do," he mused.  "You were
+contemptible men, I know, but not as bad, perhaps, as those villains
+who left you here.  They must be checked and paid back in double coin
+for all their devilish work, and I want to be on hand when payment is
+being made."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+SHELTERING ARMS
+
+Having closed the cabin door, Dane stepped into his snow-shoes, slung
+his pack over his shoulders, and started forth after the slashers.  He
+carried his gun in his hand that he might be ready for any emergency.
+It was not hard to follow the trail, and the travelling much easier
+than when out upon the river.  Although he moved rapidly forward, he
+was keenly alert to every sight and sound.  How far the rebels would go
+without camping he had no idea.  He knew that at times they travelled
+all night and slept by day.  If they intended to do so now it would be
+necessary for him to exert every effort in order to overtake them.  He
+was well aware that as a rule they did not travel fast, being too
+indolent and lazy, so in this lay his only hope of outstripping the
+villains.
+
+His course lay through the heart of a large forest, straight overland,
+and north of where the Loyalists were encamped on the A-jem-sek.  Up
+hill and down he sped, pausing not for an instant, with powerful
+swinging strides that would have tested even Pete's great endurance.
+That he had been travelling since early morning, with the exception of
+his brief stay at the cabin, seemed to make no difference to him.
+Davidson had made no mistake in choosing such a man as his chief ranger.
+
+Hour after hour he sped onward through the silent, sombre forest.  The
+wind increased in violence, and the trees swayed and creaked as the
+tempest tore through their branches.  The storm was not far off, and
+might burst at any minute.
+
+Reaching at length the summit of a hill, he paused to eat some of the
+cold meat and a piece of the bread Old Mammy had given him that
+morning.  He was about to continue his journey when the report of a gun
+rang through the forest.  The sound issued from valley below, reminding
+him that the slashers must be quite near.  Cautiously now he moved down
+the hill, peering keenly ahead, not knowing what to expect next.  In a
+few minutes a glimmer of light filtered among the trees, showing that
+the rebels were camped by a little brook which ran through the valley.
+As he slowly advanced, the light became brighter, until presently a
+blazing camp-fire burst upon his eyes.  Around this the slashers were
+ringed, jabbering and quarrelling in an excited manner.  What they were
+saying Dane could not tell, but as he crept nearer, moving from tree to
+tree, he saw a human body lying in the snow a short distance from the
+fire.  That it was one of the slashers he felt certain, and the
+explanation of the shot he had heard.  He was not surprised at this,
+for he knew a great deal about the brutal and inhuman nature of these
+creatures.  They disgusted him, and he was more determined than ever to
+round them up and put an end to their lawless career.  There before him
+was almost the last of the gang which for years had proven such a
+menace to the country, and interfered with the King's mast-cutters.
+That this was a final desperate effort on their part he was sure.  He
+was very glad to be on hand to confound them in their undertaking.
+
+Leaving the slashers to their own devices, he doubled back upon the
+trail for a short distance, plunged off into the deep snow, encircled
+the camp, and at length came upon the trail farther ahead.  He
+travelled slower now, as there was no special hurry.  He believed that
+the slashers would remain in the valley for some time, and perhaps wait
+for dawn before continuing their march.
+
+After awhile he came to the valley where stood the cabin from which he
+had fled several years before.  He knew every foot of the place, for
+here he had often come with his mother.  This was her favorite walk,
+and he recalled how fond she was of watching him as he played among the
+trees and by the little brook.  He understood now something of what it
+must have meant to such a woman to live for years in the wilderness,
+cut off from all social life of which she had been so fond, and meeting
+no one of her own sex except the few Indian women who occasionally
+visited the house.
+
+A strong feeling of resentment rose up in Dane's heart against his
+father who had submitted so noble a woman to such a living death.  It
+had not been his intention to go near the house from which he had been
+driven.  But now a great longing came upon him to descend the valley
+and view the building at close quarters.  Was his father sitting alone
+there? he wondered, and did he ever think with any degree of fondness
+of his outcast son?
+
+Drawn by an overmastering impulse he moved rapidly down the valley.
+Before reaching the clearing where the cabin stood, he turned aside,
+ascended the right bank, and stopped at length beneath a great pine.
+Here was a wooden cross, and as Dane stood and looked upon it his eyes
+grew misty with tears.  He remembered, as if it were but yesterday, the
+morning he and his father had borne hither the frail body of the one
+who had been everything to him.  She had requested that this should be
+her last resting-place where the storms of winter could not reach the
+spot, and where the wind would make music in the trees overhead.  The
+day was very bright when they laid her there, and the birds were
+singing and twittering about them.  But for him there was no sunshine,
+for his heart was almost breaking with grief.  He knew that his father
+felt badly, too, for his voice faltered as he began to read the Burial
+Service.  The grave was covered with snow now, and he wondered if his
+father ever visited the place.  But had the ground been bare, he would
+have known.  The well-worn path leading from the house to the grave
+would have told its own tale.  The big pine knew, and if endowed with
+the power of human speech it would have told how every day during the
+summer a lonely man came to that spot and covered the grave with fresh
+wild flowers, sometimes remaining for hours, often with tears coursing
+down his cheeks.  Had the young man known of this he would not have
+felt so bitter toward the one who had treated him so harshly.
+
+Leaving at length the spot which was so sacred to him, Dane came to the
+edge of the clearing.  Here he stopped and looked intently at the cabin
+before him.  A light shone through the little window, and he heard
+sounds of voices within.  Then he started and hurried swiftly forward,
+for loud, coarse oaths fell upon his ears.  What he had feared was
+actually happening.  The rebels from the north were there awaiting the
+coming of the others from the Washademoak.  His father, then, had not
+changed.  Would he lead the slashers against the mast-cutters? he
+wondered.  The latter must be warned of their danger, but how could he
+go out with them and fight against his own father?  The thought brought
+the perspiration in beads to his forehead.  What would his mother say
+and think were she alive?
+
+At first he was tempted to go to the house and peer upon the group
+within.  He banished this idea, however, as he did not wish to see his
+father in the midst of the miserable slashers.  He accordingly swung
+around to the back of the house and entered upon the trail leading to
+the river beyond.  He paused but once to look back and to listen to the
+sounds issuing from the cabin.  Then, with a troubled mind, he
+continued on his way.
+
+He had not proceeded far when the storm swept upon him.  This affected
+him but little now, for he was thinking of his father and the days when
+his mother was alive.  Old memories came back to him, aroused by the
+familiar scenes he had just left behind.  His was a nature in which
+sentiment played a large part.  This was somewhat due to his early
+training when his mother had thrilled him with stories of England's
+greatness, and the glory of the cross-marked flag.  She had also taught
+him to respect womanhood, and she never wearied of talking to him about
+the beautiful and noble women she had known and loved in her early
+days.  She also sang sweet, homely songs of love and gallant deeds.
+All these had influenced him, and made an abiding impression upon his
+life.  It was little wonder, then, that his thoughts were sad as he
+turned his back upon the rebel-infested cabin which for so many years
+had been his happy home, and around which such fond associations
+lingered.
+
+Whenever Dane thought of his mother, Jean Sterling always came into his
+mind.  This was but natural, as they were the only two women he had
+ever loved.  One could never come back to him, but the other was
+somewhere in the country, and he must find her.  He longed for Pete
+that he might send him in search of Sam.  He thought much about what
+the dying slasher had told him, and he was firmly convinced that the
+girl was with the loyal Indian.
+
+The travelling was becoming heavier now, and the storm increasing in
+violence.  But still he pressed on, up hill and down, over wind-swept
+lakes, and bleak stretches of wild meadows.  But for the importance of
+his mission he would have sought the shelter of a friendly clump of
+bushes, and camped for the night.  He had often done so in the past,
+for he could sleep as comfortably curled up in a nest of fir boughs
+with the snow weaving its mystic web over him as on a soft bed.  But
+not to-night could he afford to tarry.  Too much was at stake, so he
+must hasten on, no matter how fierce the storm or how hard the trail.
+
+His attention was at length arrested by recently-made marks in the
+snow.  He was woodsman enough to understand that some one was
+travelling that way, evidently under considerable difficulty.  Several
+times he stopped to examine where the wayfarer had floundered about in
+the snow in desperate efforts to regain the trail.  He wondered who it
+could be, so he hurried forward hoping to overtake the struggling man,
+for the thought of a woman never once entered his mind.
+
+He had gone but half a mile when he came to a place where the traveller
+had left the trail and gone off to the right.  He stood debating with
+himself whether to follow or not, when the sound of a human voice
+mingled with the roaring of the wind.  What was said he could not
+distinguish, although he was certain that it was a call for help.
+Hesitating no longer, he surged rapidly forward, keeping careful watch
+upon the crooked tracks.  Someone was in need, he was certain, who had
+become bewildered, lost the trail, and in despair had uttered a wild
+cry for help.  Such cases were not uncommon, especially in winter,
+where men had perished, and the great forest had never revealed the
+secrets.
+
+In a few minutes his keen eyes caught sight of something huddled at the
+foot of a lordly tree.  That it was a human form he was sure, and as he
+stepped forward a great cry of surprise leaped from his lips.  Like one
+almost bereft of his senses he sprang toward the girl, caught her in
+his arms, and looked into her white face.
+
+"Jean!  Jean!" he passionately cried.  "Don't you know me, your own
+Dane?  Open your eyes, and speak to me!"
+
+Slowly, as if coming out of a troubled dream, the girl opened her eyes,
+and stared into her lover's face.
+
+"Don't look at me that way," he pleaded.  "Don't you know me?  It is
+Dane."
+
+Then he kissed her again, and again, beseeching her, and calling upon
+her to speak.
+
+Gradually the light of understanding dawned in Jean's eyes.  At first
+she imagined it was but a happy dream from which she would shortly
+awaken.  But as those strong arms held her firm, and that loved face
+remained close to hers, she knew that in very truth it was her own
+Dane.  Her lips parted in a glad smile, and reaching out her arms, she
+impulsively twined them about his neck.
+
+"Dane!  Dane!" she murmured.  "How did you find me?  Thank God, you
+came in time."
+
+Like a tired child she rested in his sheltering arms, and gave herself
+up completely to his protecting care.  The wind continued to roar, and
+the great trees rocked and swayed.  But the reunited lovers paid no
+heed to the raging of the elements.  They were together again, and
+nothing else mattered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+THE ROUND-UP
+
+Owing to the severity of the storm all the mast-cutters of Big Lake
+camp suspended work, and sought refuge within their log cabins.  The
+latter were poor affairs, inhabited as a rule by two or three men.
+One, however, contained twelve cutters, and here, while the tempest
+raged outside, they were cosy and contented.  Some sat before the
+bright open fire, smoking and talking.  Others played cards, while a
+few spent their time in mending their clothes.
+
+They were a sturdy, rollicking band of men, tucked away in the depths
+of the forest.  In the summer they did a little farming along the St.
+John River and its tributaries.  But the inducement of good wages lured
+them to the camps during the long winter months.  They enjoyed the
+life, too, tinged as it was with the spice of adventure, for they never
+knew when the slashers would cause trouble.  They were well supplied
+with fire-arms and ammunition, which had been sent up river the
+previous summer by Major Studholme.  A scrap with the rebels would have
+given them much satisfaction, for they were anxious to wipe out
+numerous old scores with their base and elusive enemy.  The probability
+of an attack formed the main topic of conversation during the winter
+evenings, and many were the battles fought and won.  They also
+discussed the mast-business, how many masts, spars, bowsprits and other
+timber would be taken out during the winter and floated down the river
+in the spring.  They knew how many pieces had been stored in the
+mast-pond at Portland Point the previous year, and the number of
+vessels which had arrived to carry the sticks to England.  They could
+also tell the dimensions of the largest masts ever cut, ranging from
+ninety to one hundred and twenty-five feet in length, and from thirty
+to forty inches in diameter, and valued at five hundred dollars and
+upwards apiece.  There seemed to be no limit to the knowledge these men
+possessed of the masting-business, and they vied with one another in
+telling what they knew.
+
+The arrival of the Loyalists furnished them with a new subject of
+conversation.  But it was the abduction of Colonel Sterling's daughter
+which stirred them most intensely.  Many of them had daughters of their
+own, and they sympathised with the bereaved colonel.  That the slashers
+were responsible for the cowardly deed, they had not the slightest
+doubt, and they often wondered what had become of the girl.
+
+The short afternoon was wearing away, with the storm showing no sign of
+abatement.  The snow piled up around the cabin, and so blocked up the
+little windows that the men sitting at the table were compelled to
+light several dip-candles in order to see the cards.  Only the two men
+who attended the oxen in the near-by stable ventured outside, and their
+report of the storm made their comrades glad that they could remain
+indoors on such a day.
+
+The fire had just been replenished, and the flames were roaring merrily
+up the big chimney, when the door was thrown unceremoniously open, and
+Dane Norwood staggered into the room, bearing in his arms the limp form
+of Jean Sterling.  Amazed beyond words, the men sprang to their feet,
+and quickly relieved the courier of his burden just as he reeled and
+sank in a helpless heap upon the rough floor.
+
+"It's Dane Norwood!" one of the men gasped, bending over the prostrate
+form.  "What in the name of heaven has happened?"
+
+Before any one could reply Jean was on her feet, and started to cross
+the room.  But she tottered through weakness, and was forced to place
+her hands upon the table for support.
+
+"I am Colonel Sterling's daughter," she explained to the staring
+mast-cutters, "and Dane Norwood saved my life.  Help him, quick."
+
+At these words several men hurried forward, lifted Dane from the floor,
+and laid him gently in one of the bunks arranged along the walls.  They
+then bathed his face with water, and in a short time they had the
+satisfaction of seeing him open his eyes and look around.  In another
+minute Jean was kneeling by his side, with the men standing silently
+near.  Dane smiled as he saw the girl, and reached out his hand which
+she at once clasped in hers.
+
+"What a baby I am," he said.  "I didn't expect to go under this way.
+There must be something wrong with me."
+
+"Don't say that," Jean remonstrated.  "No other man could have done
+what you did.  It was wonderful."
+
+"I was afraid the slashers might overtake us," Dane replied.  "Have you
+told the men about them?"
+
+"Oh, no, I forgot all about them."
+
+As briefly as possible she explained how the rebels were on their way,
+and planning to attack the mast-cutters that very night.  Dane also
+related his experience at the little cabin on the shore of the
+Washademoak, and how he had overtaken and outstripped the slashers.  He
+told, too, how Jean had started in the dead of night to give the
+warning, but becoming bewildered by the storm had wandered from the
+trail, and he had by chance found her and brought her into camp.
+
+The mast-cutters were now thoroughly aroused.  Word was at once sent to
+the various cabins, and all were ordered to prepare to march against
+the enemy.  Muskets were brought forth and examined with the greatest
+care, and swords were unearthed from most unlikely places.
+Powder-horns were filled, and a supply of bullets doled out to each
+man.  Snow-shoes were attended to, and complete arrangements made for
+an early departure.
+
+In less than an hour's time fifty men were lined up, the final
+instructions issued, and the order to march given.  They laughed as
+they breasted the wind which swept across the little clearing, and they
+looked like a bunch of school boys as they plunged through the snow to
+the shelter of the trees beyond.
+
+As Jean stood and watched them through a tiny spot in the little window
+which the banked-up snow had not covered, her heart thrilled with
+pride.  They were but humble men, she knew, yet glad and ready to
+maintain their Sovereign's cause in the heart of the great northern
+wilds.  She thought of what Norman had said about King George, and a
+smile flitted across her face.  But what did his words amount to before
+the stern reality of such staunch champions as these obscure
+mast-cutters?  Men might curse and rave, but how futile they were
+against the spirit of loyalty implanted in the hearts of determined,
+rugged men.
+
+In the meantime, the cook, the one man of the mast-cutting gang who was
+left behind because of his age, had prepared food and tea for the new
+arrivals.  Dane and Jean were hungry, and thoroughly enjoyed the rough,
+though well-cooked meat and bread.  "Old Dennis," as he was called,
+waited upon the visitors with considerable pleasure.  His eyes twinkled
+with merriment as he noted the happiness of the young couple.
+
+"This is the fust time a female woman has ever been in this shanty," he
+told them.  "I never expected to see the day when I'd be feedin' one
+with me own hands, an' sich a handsome lass, at that.  A storm ginrally
+brings something I've noticed.  It was allus raining or snowin', or
+blowin' when a baby came to our house, an' I had to go to the
+neighbours fer help."
+
+"How many children have you?" Jean asked with a smile.
+
+"How many, Miss?  Why, I 'most fergit.  Now, let me see; there's
+Bennie, an' Susie, an' Tommy, an' the twins, an' Pete, an' Dennis, an'
+the baby.  Oh, I fergot Martha, Sam, an' another pair of twins."
+
+"It is no wonder you find it hard to remember how many you have," Jean
+replied.  "It must take a great deal to feed and clothe such a large
+family."
+
+"Indeed it does, Miss, an' that's why I'm cookin' here.  I'm not as
+young as I used to be, so can't stand heavy work.  But, then, I
+wouldn't like to lose one of me little ones.  It 'ud about break the
+hearts of me an' me wife.  When we heard about you bein' carried off in
+the dead of night, we cried, that's what we did, an' went an' counted
+all of our little lambs asleep in their beds."
+
+"So you heard of me, did you?"
+
+"I should say we did, Miss.  Everybody knew about it.  My, I'm glad to
+see ye safe an' sound.  I do hope them slashers'll git what's comin' to
+'em.  I'd like to be after 'em this very minute."
+
+"And so would I," Dane agreed.  "It doesn't seem right for me to be
+lying here when I should be out with the mast-cutters."
+
+"Don't ye worry about that, young man.  You've done yer share all right
+in givin' us the warnin'.  An', besides, look what ye've done fer this
+girl.  I guess if it hadn't been fer you she'd be layin' out there in
+the woods now.  Don't ye worry.  What ye both need is a good sleep, so
+I'm goin' to ask you, Miss, to take my bunk over yon in the corner.  I
+guess ye'll find everythin' in good shape, fer my wife's a most
+pertic'ler woman an' has trained me right."
+
+Jean was only too glad to accept the offer.  She was weary to the point
+of exhaustion, and her head ached.  As she laid herself down upon the
+bunk, and Old Dennis tenderly covered her with two grey blankets, the
+softest bed in which she had ever slept never felt so good.  She knew
+how weary Dane must be, for he had merely pressed her hand as she left
+his side.  She thought of that terrible journey through the forest, and
+the fight Dane had made to reach the camp.  At first he had helped her
+along the trail, but when she could go no farther he had carried her
+like a child in his strong arms.  She understood something of what that
+meant, and she had pleaded with him to leave her and save himself.  But
+he had laughed at her, saying that she was not nearly as heavy as his
+pack and musket which he had thrown aside.  But he could not deceive
+her, for she knew by his hard breathing, and the way he at times
+staggered from side to side how great was the strain upon his almost
+giant strength.  She thought of all this as she lay there.  But the bed
+was comfortable, the roar of the wind among the trees most lulling, and
+ere long she was fast asleep.
+
+And while the two tired ones slept Old Dennis kept faithful watch.  He
+sat before the fire smoking his black stub of a pipe, and listening
+intently for the return of the mast-cutters.  He had no doubt about the
+defeat of the slashers, and a smile overspread his furrowed face as he
+thought of the surprise in store for them.
+
+During the night the storm beat itself out, the wind fell, and a great
+peace rested upon the snow-enshrouded forest.  As the dawn of a new day
+stole gently over the land the mast-cutters returned, bringing with
+them the rebel prisoners.  The noise of their arrival awoke Dane, who
+sprang from his bunk greatly refreshed after his sound sleep.  Then
+from the leader of the mast-cutters he learned the story of the
+round-up of the slashers.  They were taken in a narrow valley, and
+after several had fallen, the rest surrendered.
+
+"They were fools to try to shoot." the man said.  "But if they had kept
+it up any longer, we wouldn't have left one alive.  It was mighty cold
+waiting there in that valley hour after hour for the devils to arrive,
+and my men were in no mood for any nonsense.  But I guess this night's
+work'll settle the rebels, all right."
+
+"What are you going to do with them?" Dane asked.
+
+"Put them to work, of course," the leader replied, as he sat down to
+the breakfast Old Dennis had prepared, and helped himself to a piece of
+meat.
+
+"Do they know how to work?"
+
+"If they don't they'll learn before I'm through with them."
+
+"Where are they now?"
+
+"Oh, scattered around among the cabins getting something to eat.
+They're the most dejected gang I ever saw."
+
+Jean heard all this, for she was wide awake, lying quietly in the bunk.
+She preferred to remain there for a while, as she felt embarrassed with
+so many men in the room.  But when they had eaten their breakfast and
+had gone outside, she got up and stood before Dane and Dennis.
+
+"I'm mighty glad to see ye lookin' so well," the latter accosted.
+"That sleep has brought back the colour into yer purty cheeks.  Now,
+when ye've had something to eat, ye'll be as chipper as a bird."
+
+Breakfast at last over, Jean and Dane sat and talked for a while before
+the bright fire.
+
+"How soon can we leave this place?" the girl asked.
+
+"When the mast-cutters, who are going with us, are ready," Dane
+replied.  "I have spoken to the leader about those Loyalists on the
+A-jem-sek, and he is going to send a supply of food to them."
+
+"Oh, I am so glad," and Jean's eyes showed her pleasure.  "Those poor
+people have been so much in my mind.  I hope that Sam and Kitty were
+able to help them.  But now that the mast-cutters are to take supplies
+there is no need to worry any more.  I am anxious about your father.
+We should go to him as soon as possible."
+
+"Do you think that he wants to see me, Jean?"
+
+"I am sure he does.  I told you what he said about you, and I really
+believe he is longing for you."
+
+"He must have changed, then, since the last time I saw him."
+
+"He certainly has.  I never saw such a change in any one in such a
+short time.  I was afraid of him when I first met him, but when I got
+to know him better, and found out about him, he seemed to me almost
+like a father."
+
+"It was you who worked the miracle, Jean.  I owe it all to you.  No one
+could withstand your charms, not even my father."
+
+The girl blushed, and dropped her eyes.  She was happy, and the future
+looked bright.  With Dane once again with her, she had no more fear.
+
+For some time they sat there, and were only aroused by a confused noise
+outside.  Rising, and going to the door, they beheld a strange sight.
+The slashers were all lined up in front of the house, surrounded by
+armed mast-cutters.  Ben Bolster, the boss, was giving orders to the
+rebels.  He was telling them that they must go to work, and make up for
+some of the trouble they had caused.  Those who objected were to step
+forward.  At this the three ringleaders advanced, and flatly refused to
+lift a hand.
+
+"Very well, then, me hearties," Bolster said, "it's either work or the
+tree-tops.  Which do you choose?"
+
+As no response came from the sullen men, Bolster motioned to several of
+his men, who at once sprang toward a young birch tree standing nearby.
+Up this they climbed like cats, and soon their combined weight bent the
+tree to the ground.  A rope was then produced, one end of which was
+fastened to the top of the tree, and the other about the body of one of
+the ringleaders, just below the arms.  He struggled, fought and cursed,
+but all in vain.  When his hands had been tied behind his back, the
+tree was released and he was hoisted on high, kicking and yelling in
+the most violent manner.  The same was about to be done to his two
+sullen companions.  But they had witnessed enough, so they begged to be
+allowed to go to work.
+
+"All right, then," Bolster agreed.  "But you know what's in store if
+you don't behave yourselves.  The first time you'll go up like that
+fool there with ropes around your waists, but the second time it'll be
+around your necks.  See?  And let this be a warning to you all," he
+said, turning to the cowed slashers.
+
+In the meantime the unfortunate man hanging from the tree was becoming
+tired, and the rope was pressing hard around his body.  At length he
+pleaded to be taken down.  Bolster, however, let him remain there a
+while longer, but when his cries for mercy became heart-rending, word
+was given, and a man with an axe began to chop down the tree.  This
+increased the cries of the man above.
+
+"Ye'll kill me!" he yelled.  "Don't, don't cut the tree!  Fer God's
+sake, stop!"
+
+The mast-cutters merely shouted with delight at his fears, and hurled
+all manner of jibes.
+
+"Got yer wings all ready to fly?" one asked.  "Didn't expect ye'd need
+them so soon, did ye?"
+
+"Yer havin' great fun with the mast-cutters, ain't ye?" another
+bantered.  "Ye was goin' t' give them the surprise of their lives."
+
+In a few minutes the tree was ready for its fall.  It slowly swayed,
+and then with a rush bore the yelling man downward.  He landed, as had
+been planned, in a great bank of snow, from which he was speedily
+rescued, spluttering and puffing like a steam engine.  But he had been
+taught a lesson, the effect of which was not lost upon the other rebels.
+
+Jean had watched this with intense excitement.  At first she was sure
+that the man hanging from the tree would be killed.  But when she saw
+him emerge from the snow unharmed, she breathed a sigh of relief, and
+even smiled.  She knew that in reality he had come off better than he
+deserved, as did all of his companions.
+
+"How long will the slashers be kept here?" she asked, turning to Dane
+who was standing by her side.
+
+"Until the rangers come to take them away," was the reply.  "But come
+into the house.  You will get cold here."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+PEACE AT EVENING TIME
+
+In his lonely house in the wilderness Thomas Norman was undergoing
+great agony of mind and body.  The presence of the first band of
+slashers had been hard for him to endure, and when they were joined
+later by the rebels from the Washademoak, his distress was intense.
+But he knew that he had brought this trouble upon himself.  He had sown
+the seeds of dissension which had sprung up into wild and ungovernable
+thistles.  How he despised the slashers as they crowded about him,
+drinking his rum, eating his food, and polluting the air with their
+reeking bodies and coarse language.  This excitement increased the
+distress in his side until he felt that he would go crazy with the
+pain.  Of this the rebels thought nothing.  They were beyond human
+sympathy, so the condition of their chief affected them as little as if
+he had been a dog.
+
+The critical moment arrived when the rebels had broken down the door
+leading into the adjoining room and the girl they were seeking was not
+there.  For a few minutes Norman's life hung in the balance.  The angry
+men charged him with hiding the girl and keeping her from them.  It was
+only with the greatest difficulty that he was able to subdue their
+wrath.  He told them that he was as much surprised as they were, and he
+had no idea what had become of the girl.  Although the men threatened
+and cursed, they did not lay hands upon their chief, but contented
+themselves by informing him that when they came back he must have the
+girl there.
+
+With a great sigh of relief Norman sank down upon his pillow as the
+slashers left the house for their march against the mast-cutters.  It
+was storming hard, and this suited their purpose.  They believed that
+the King's men would be all housed and sound asleep, with the idea of
+an attack on such a stormy night far from their thoughts.  They would
+also be ahead of the rangers, and their deed would be accomplished
+before Davidson's men could arrive.
+
+When the slashers were gone, Norman's mind returned to the missing
+girl.  He was greatly concerned, feeling certain that she had fled to
+the forest for protection from the rebels.  He expected her to return
+when the men had left, but as the hours moved slowly by and she did not
+appear, he feared the worst.  He imagined that she had become
+bewildered by the storm, had lost her way, and perished.  He groaned
+aloud as he thought of this, for he was very fond of the girl.  He
+reproached himself over and over again for his past blindness and
+mistakes.  He knew that he had brought his punishment upon his own
+head, and that he deserved it.
+
+As he lay there alone, with the storm beating against the cabin, he
+thought of his patient, noble wife, and innocent outcast son.  Them he
+had lost, and when the gentle and beautiful Jean Sterling had come to
+brighten his life, she, too, had been taken from him, and he was once
+more left alone.  He had plenty of time now to think of all this, and
+he wondered if the One he had forsaken for so long was thus hounding
+him that He might bring him back to His feet.  The story of the
+Prodigal Son came into his mind, and he knew that the Master's parable
+was being re-enacted in his own life there in the midst of the northern
+forest.
+
+"I am the prodigal son," he murmured.  "I have wandered far from my
+Father, and have been feeding upon the husks.  But I will arise and go
+to my Father, and will say unto Him, 'Father, I have sinned against
+heaven and before Thee, and am no more worthy to be called Thy son.'"
+
+Slowly he repeated these words, but they brought little comfort and
+hope to his weary, agitated heart and mind.  In his distress he sought
+refuge in prayer, and uttered the simple words he learned as a child.
+But even they could not bring the rest he sought, nor the peace of
+former years.  So far had he wandered, and so long had he neglected the
+golden means of grace, that the sweet communion of his soul with the
+great soul of the Father could not be restored as if by magic in a few
+minutes.  This he now knew, so with a moan of despair he turned his
+haggard face to the wall.
+
+The return of Sam and Kitty when the storm had spent itself, brought
+him no hope.  They were alone, and Jean was not with them.  The Indians
+were greatly distressed at the girl's absence, and shook their heads
+when Norman asked if they could find her.
+
+"Babby lost," Sam replied.  "Beeg snow.  Injun no find babby."
+
+Kitty was inconsolable, and while Sam rebuilt the fire which had gone
+out, she sat upon the floor, her head covered with an old shawl, and
+rocked herself to and fro in an agony of grief.  Her sorrow was intense
+and real, for the girl had become to her like her own child.  Sam, too,
+was deeply affected, and made no attempt to reprove his wife.  He
+wandered from room to room, examining every detail of the havoc wrought
+by the slashers.  He prepared a little food, and took it to the sick
+man.  But Norman would not touch it, pushing it aside with a faint
+murmur of thanks.
+
+Slowly the weary day wore out, succeeded by a more weary night to the
+sufferer upon the couch.  He was weakening fast, and this the Indians
+knew.  They could do nothing but keep the fires going, place hot cloths
+from time to time to the sufferer's side, and offer him a little food.
+
+Morning dawned cold and cheerless.  Norman had slept but little, and
+the pain in his side was more severe than ever.  Often he turned his
+eyes toward the door, as if expecting some one.
+
+"Is Dane coming?" he would ask, and when the Indians shook their heads,
+the light of hope would fade.  But ere long he would rouse up again.
+"Is Dane coming?" he would repeat.  "I wonder what's keeping him.  He
+should be here by now."
+
+The Indians sat upon the floor before the fire, awed and attentive.
+They seldom spoke, and when they did, their voices were low.  They knew
+that the white man was sinking rapidly, and that the end was not far
+away.
+
+About the middle of the afternoon, while an intense silence reigned in
+the cabin, a sound of voices was heard outside.  Then the door was
+thrust suddenly open, and Jean entered, her hood covered with snow, and
+her cheeks aglow with health and animation.  Following her was Dane,
+who hesitated a little as he stepped inside the room.  He was uncertain
+what kind of a reception he would receive.
+
+With a cry of joy Kitty sprang to her feet, rushed forward, and threw
+her arms around the girl.
+
+"Babby safe!  Babby safe!" she murmured.
+
+"Yes, Kitty, I am safe," Jean assured her, looking fondly upon the
+faithful Indian.
+
+Then before anything more could be said, Norman partly lifted himself
+from the couch, and stared hard at the visitors.
+
+"Come here, quick," he ordered in a hoarse, eager voice.  "Is it true,
+or am I only dreaming?"
+
+Jean and Dane at once crossed the room, and knelt by the couch.
+Impulsively the son caught his father's left hand in his and raised it
+to his lips.
+
+"It is no dream, father," he said.  "I have come back, and Jean is with
+me.  Do you forgive me?"
+
+Still somewhat uncertain, Norman lifted his right hand and touched his
+son's face.  Then he turned his eyes wonderingly toward the girl.
+
+"Yes, yes," he said, "it is no dream.  You are both here.  Thank God,
+you have come at last!"
+
+"And you forgive me?" Dane again asked.
+
+"Yes, yes.  My heart forgave you long ago.  Oh, if you had only come
+sooner!  But it's too late now, too late!"
+
+"No, no, it's not too late.  Jean and I will look after you."
+
+"Little can you do for me now, my son.  But give me your hand, Jean, my
+dear."
+
+As the girl obeyed, he took her right hand in his and placed it in
+Dane's.  Then his fingers closed firmly upon them as he held them for a
+few seconds.
+
+"Be good to each other," he said.  "Love each other, and may God bless
+you both."
+
+Tears were streaming down Jean's cheeks now, and Dane's eyes were
+misty.  They wished to speak, but words would not come.  Several
+mast-cutters entered the room who stared in wonder at the scene before
+them.  Sam motioned them to be silent, and pointed to the door leading
+into the adjoining room.  They understood his meaning, and slipped
+silently away.
+
+In a few minutes Norman again aroused himself, and tried to raise his
+head from the pillow.  He was too weak, however, and sank back with a
+moan.
+
+"What is it, father?" Dane asked.  "Can I do anything for you?"
+
+"Yes, yes, over there in that box in the corner.  You will find it at
+the bottom."
+
+"What is it?"
+
+"The flag.  Bring it here, quick."
+
+Dane did as he was bidden, and when he had lifted the cover of the box,
+and searched to the bottom, he found a small English flag.  This he at
+once carried to his father's side.
+
+"Ah, that's it," Norman exclaimed, reaching out his hand and touching
+it.  "I haven't seen it for years.  Yes, it's the same old flag which I
+so often cursed.  May God forgive me."
+
+Eagerly he seized it and pressed it to his lips.
+
+"Good old flag, brave old flag!" he murmured.  "It's the greatest flag
+on earth.  Oh, why did I forsake it!"
+
+Then with trembling hands he held it out before him, and gazed upon it
+for a few minutes in apparent wonder.
+
+"How many crosses are there upon it?" he asked.
+
+"Why, three, of course," Dane replied.
+
+"Yes, I know there used to be three, but I see only one now, and it's
+very red.  What has become of the others?"
+
+Dane glanced at Jean, but her eyes full of interest and sympathy were
+fixed upon the dying man's face.
+
+"Do you see only one cross?" she asked.
+
+"Yes, only one now, and it's red.  Strange, very strange, isn't it?"
+
+Presently his face brightened, and his eyes glowed with a new light.
+
+"It's not the cross on the flag I see," he cried; "it's the cross of
+Christ, and it's marked with His blood.  Look, don't you see it?" he
+eagerly asked.  "There it is; I see it plain.  And what are those
+words?  How clear they shine, 'The blood of Jesus Christ cleanseth us
+from all sin.'  Ah, that's it; I understand it all now.  The blood of
+Christ!  The blood of Christ!"
+
+He closed his eyes and remained very still.  Jean found it hard to
+control her emotion, so she crossed over to where Sam and Kitty were
+sitting upon the floor.
+
+"Poor babby, poor babby," the Indian woman said, seizing the girl's
+hand.  "Chief much seek, eh?"
+
+"Yes, very sick," Jean replied, as she, too, seated herself upon the
+floor.  "You were good to him, and I am so glad."
+
+"Kitty no do much.  Kitty all sam' babby."
+
+"But you did what you could, Kitty.  No one can do anything for him
+now."
+
+Scarcely had she ceased when the Indian woman lifted her hand, and
+pointed to the couch.  Jean at once arose and went to Dane's side.
+
+"What is it?" she asked.
+
+"He wants you to sing 'Jesus, Lover of my Soul.'  I could just catch
+the words.  It used to be a favourite hymn of his."
+
+Jean was in no mood for singing, but she did the best she could.  As
+her sweet voice filled the room, Norman opened his eyes, and a smile
+overspread his face.
+
+"It's your mother, Dane; don't you hear her singing?  And look, can't
+you see her?  She's standing right there, just as she looked on her
+wedding-day."
+
+He reached out, and his arms closed in a fond embrace, and for him his
+loved one was really there.
+
+"Priscilla!  Priscilla!" he whispered, and with that vision before him,
+his spirit left the weary body.
+
+The next day the rangers arrived, with William Davidson in charge.
+Pete was with them, and his delight was unbounded at seeing Jean.  That
+afternoon Thomas Norman's body was laid by the side of his wife at the
+foot of the big pine.  The ranger leader read the beautiful words of
+the Burial Service, after which his men filled in the grave.  A rough
+wooden cross was erected over the spot, and there Jean and Dane stood
+after the others had gone back to the house.  Their eyes were misty,
+and for a few minutes neither spoke.
+
+"That is all we can do," Dane at length remarked with a sigh.  "Oh, if
+he had only seen his mistake years ago, what a difference it would have
+made.  It is wonderful how death has wiped out all bitterness toward
+him from my heart.  I only think of him now as the loving father I once
+knew."
+
+"This will always be a sacred spot to us," Jean replied.  "I should
+like to come here in the summer when the birds are singing, and lay
+sweet flowers upon these graves."
+
+"We shall indeed come, darling," and Dane's arm stole tenderly about
+the girl as he spoke.  "We shall come next summer to this place which
+means so much to us."
+
+The sun of the short winter day was dipping below the tops of the great
+trees, and the distant hills were aglow as Jean and Dane left the grove
+and walked slowly back to the house.  Although sorrowing for the one
+they had just laid to rest, yet they knew that it was well.  This
+common grief drew them nearer than ever to each other, making their
+love all the more beautiful and wonderful.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII
+
+AFTER MANY DAYS
+
+Christmas was drawing near and the people of Loyal were looking forward
+to the season of cheer and goodwill.  Their preparations were meagre,
+and they did not expect to celebrate as in the past.  But they had
+provided what they could for their little ones, and the women had their
+cooking all done.  The _Polly_, on her last trip, had brought extra
+supplies from Portland Point, so there was sufficient food for all.
+The various houses were decorated with fragrant evergreens, and before
+blazing fires during the long evenings parents told their children of
+the happy Christmas seasons before the war.
+
+In one home only there was no cheer, for Colonel Sterling was in no
+mood for any gaiety.  He paid little heed to the preparations that were
+being made in the settlement, and listened in an absent-minded manner
+to Old Mammy's chatter.  Even the little Indian baby, of which he was
+very fond, could not arouse him out of the apathy into which he had
+sunk.  He would sit for hours gazing dreamily into the fire, and would
+only bestir himself when any of the neighbours called for a friendly
+chat.  But of late such visitors were few, for after the first
+greeting, the Colonel always lapsed into silence.  He would suddenly
+arouse when the callers were ready to depart, and tell them to come
+again.
+
+All this was a great worry to Old Mammy.  She found the house very
+lonely, and more often than ever dropped in upon her neighbours during
+the day.
+
+"I'm sure troubled 'bout de Cun'l," she confided to Mrs. Watson one
+afternoon.  "He jes sets an' sets an' says nuffin'.  I know he's
+t'inkin' 'bout Missie Jean, but he nebber speaks 'bout her now.  His
+po' ol' heart is jes broke, an' no wonder."
+
+The tears flowed down Mammy's cheeks, telling plainly of her own grief.
+She wiped them away with a corner of her apron, and swayed her stout
+body to and fro.
+
+"An' dis is Christmas time, too," she continued.  "How Missie Jean did
+lub Christmas.  I kin see de dear lamb now, wif her eyes shinin', an'
+her cheeks jes like two rosy apples.  But to hear her happy laff was de
+bes' of all.  An' she was so good to the chilluns.  Why, de house was
+allus full of dem on Christmas day, an' Missie Jean, was jes like a
+chile herse'f, de dear lamb."
+
+"I know she was," Mrs. Watson replied.  "The very night she was stolen
+away I showed her the presents we made for Danny.  She was so much
+interested in the toy boat, horse and cart John made.  She was very
+bright and happy that night.  Poor dear, she little knew what was in
+store for her."
+
+It was the week after the great storm that the Colonel was sitting as
+usual one night before the fire.  Mammy had put the baby to bed, and
+was busying herself about the room.  The silent man was thinking of his
+lost daughter.  He had given up all hope now of ever seeing her again.
+The last spark had fled with Dane's arrival.  He had been encouraged by
+the thought that the courier would bring some word of his loved one.
+But the first glance at the young man's face had told him the worst.
+There was no hope.  Jean was either dead, or worse than dead.  What he
+had endured since the night she had been stolen away he alone knew.  He
+tried to be brave and to face life with the same courage as in the
+past.  But he found this to be almost impossible.  He was getting old,
+his loved ones had all been taken away, and he had nothing to live for.
+This feeling of depression increased as Christmas drew near.  He ate
+but little, and he found it difficult to sleep.  He would rise long
+before daylight, and every morning Mammy found him huddled before the
+fire.  He was as kind and gentle as of old, but he was not the Colonel
+Sterling who had played such an important part in the war.
+
+Old Mammy had just replenished the fire, and the flames were licking
+merrily around a big hardwood stick, when a noise sounded outside.
+Then the door was thrust suddenly open, and as the Colonel turned his
+head, Jean rushed across the room, threw her arms about his neck, and
+almost smothered him with rapturous kisses.  With a great cry of joy
+and amazement the Colonel clutched the clinging girl, and staggered to
+his feet.  He was trembling violently, and his excitement was intense.
+He looked into her face, touched her hair, and laid his right hand upon
+her head, imagining it was all a dream.  But when Jean laughed at him,
+drew off her hood, and stood erect before him, his last doubt was
+removed.  He reached out and passionately drew her to him, and silently
+held her to his breast.  Then he sank down upon his chair, completely
+overcome by his emotion.
+
+There was great excitement now in the room.  Old Mammy had been
+impatiently waiting to embrace her "li'l lamb," and she would scarcely
+release her for a minute.  She stroked the girl's hair, and held her
+hands, crying and laughing as if bereft of her senses, and murmuring
+words of endearment.
+
+The neighbours soon heard the good news, and crowded into the house.
+Jean laughingly declared that she had never been kissed so much before,
+and that she was almost bewildered by the attention she received.  But
+when she explained how much Sam and Kitty had done for her, interest
+was at once directed to the faithful Indians who had been curiously
+watching all that was taking place.  Pete was there, too, and it was a
+wonderful night for those three dusky wanderers of the trails.  They
+were given plenty to eat and drink, and received the approving smiles
+of all.
+
+The Colonel kept his eyes fixed upon his returned daughter as she moved
+about, talking and laughing in the gayest manner.  The weary look had
+gone from his face, and his eyes glowed with a new light.  His heart
+was overflowing with thankfulness, and as the neighbours were about to
+depart, he rose to his feet, and requested them to remain for a few
+minutes.
+
+"This has been a wonderful night to me," he said.  "The lost one has
+been restored, and my heart is so filled with gratitude that I am going
+to ask you all to sing the Doxology.  Jean, dear, you know the words,
+so suppose you start it."
+
+The girl did as she was directed, and at once all lifted up their
+voices in the old familiar words of "Praise God from whom all blessings
+flow." It was no mere lip-service offered up there that night, but
+sincere gratitude from humble thankful hearts.
+
+The Colonel, Jean, and Dane sat late before the fire that night.  It
+was a marvellous story the girl related of her rescue from her captors
+by Sam and Kitty.  But when she spoke of Thomas Norman, her father was
+deeply moved.  He leaned forward so as not to miss a single word.
+
+"Poor Tom!  Poor Tom," he said.  "What a pity that such a life was
+wasted.  If I could only have seen him before he was taken away.  How
+wonderful, though, that my daughter should have been by his side when
+he died.  That is some comfort, at any rate."
+
+"But you have his son with you now," Jean replied.
+
+"His son!  What do you mean?"
+
+"Just what I said.  Dane is the only son of your old friend."
+
+Jean never forgot the expression of astonishment upon her father's face
+at these words.  He looked from one to the other to be sure that he was
+not being deceived.
+
+"It is true, daddy," Jean smilingly told him.  "Dane is really Thomas
+Norman's son, so his name is not 'Norwood' at all.  Won't you believe
+me?"
+
+"Yes, I believe you, dear, but I am greatly confused over what I have
+just heard.  Why didn't you tell me this sooner?  Did you know of this
+before you were stolen away?"
+
+"Why, no.  I only learned of it after I met Mr. Norman.  But on our way
+down river Dane and I planned that we would keep this surprise until
+the last."
+
+"I see, I see," the Colonel mused.  "It is good of you.  But, dear me,
+how wonderful everything has happened!  Why didn't you tell me about
+your father?" he asked, turning to the courier.  "You remember our
+conversation out in the hills the day you saved me from the moose.  Why
+didn't you tell me then about your father?"
+
+"For the same reason why I would not tell Major Studholme at Fort Howe
+when he asked me," Dane replied.
+
+"And what was that?"
+
+"I would not betray my father."
+
+"Even though he was a rebel?"
+
+"He was my father, remember, and I never forgot that, even though he
+drove me away from home.  And more than that, for my mother's sake I
+could not betray him."
+
+Dane ceased, and gazed thoughtfully into the fire.  The Colonel was
+deeply stirred.  Impulsively he reached out and seized Dane by the hand.
+
+"Young man," he began, "I honour you more than words can express.  You
+did what was right, and I should have done the same.  I was a fool for
+doubting you, as I did that day in the hills.  As the son of my old
+friends, Thomas Norman and his noble wife, I now take you to my heart
+and home, and have no hesitation in giving to you her who is dearer to
+me than life."
+
+He then took Jean's hand and placed it where his own had been, and
+clasped them together.
+
+"May God bless you both," he said, "and may you be true to each other."
+
+"We shall," Dane fervently declared, "while the grass grows, the sun
+shines, and the water flows."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII
+
+SEEDS OF EMPIRE
+
+Supper was ready and waiting in a cosy room in a well-built house
+situated in one of the most beautiful spots on the St. John River.  The
+table had been laid with care, and the light from the bright open
+fire-place cast its soft flickering glow upon the spotless linen and
+well-arranged dishes.  A colored woman, a worthy successor to Old
+Mammy, entered and lighted the tapers in the seven-branched
+candle-stick which had once adorned Thomas Norman's lonely cabin.  A
+smile illumined her face as she looked into an adjoining room where a
+woman was seated before another fire, surrounded by three children.
+
+If was Christmas Eve, and Jean Norman was resting after the work of the
+day.  In fact, she had been exceptionally busy for several days, so it
+was pleasant to sit in the big, comfortable chair awaiting Dane's
+arrival from the city.
+
+Jean had changed but little since that night, seventeen years before,
+when she had come back to her father, as if from the grave.  The years
+had dealt lightly with her, and except for the passing of her father
+and Old Mammy, her life had been very happy.  Two boys and a girl had
+come to gladden the home, and as these gathered about her on this
+Christmas Eve, her eyes shone with pride.  James, the eldest, aged
+twelve, had his father's manly bearing.  Ruth, almost nine, resembled
+herself, while Tommy, just six, was a combination of both.  As Jean
+watched them, she thought of that other Christmas when she had returned
+to her father.  She glanced at his picture over the mantel, and as old
+memories rushed upon her, tears dimmed her eyes.  She hastily wiped
+them away, but not before Ruth had detected her emotion.
+
+"You mustn't cry on Christmas Eve, Mummy," she said, as she came and
+put her arms about her mother's neck.
+
+"I wasn't really crying, dear," Jean replied with a smile.  "I was just
+thinking; that was all."
+
+"About grandad, and the time you were stolen away?" James asked.
+"Won't you tell us about it?"
+
+"But I have told you that so often, you must be tired of hearing it."
+
+"We're never tired of it, Mummy," Ruth said.  "Please tell us while
+we're waiting for daddy."
+
+With Tommy on her lap, James sitting at her feet, and Ruth seated on a
+small stool by her side, Jean again related the story of the little
+settlement in the wilderness, the coming of the rangers, how she was
+carried off at night, and her rescue by Sam and Kitty.  She told the
+story well, and when she had ended there was silence for a few minutes.
+The three little ones were lost in deep thought, for everything they
+had heard was very real to them.
+
+"And did you marry daddy?" Tommy unexpectedly asked, at which the
+others laughed merrily.
+
+"No, dear, not for several years.  I guess we were too poor to marry.
+Anyway, we waited until your daddy and my daddy built this nice house
+and cleared some of the land."
+
+"Are we rich now, Mummy?" Ruth questioned.
+
+"Not rich, dear, but comfortable.  We have a good home, and one of the
+best farms along the river.  We are rich, though, in happiness and in
+our children.  Your grandfather was always so proud of you.  Ruth, you
+were but a baby when he died.  He was very fond of you, and named you
+after my mother.  It was a sad day for me when he was taken away."
+
+Again Jean glanced at the picture, and thought of what her father had
+meant to her.
+
+"When did Old Mammy die?" Ruth asked.
+
+"Not long after your grandfather.  She was sick but a short time, and
+grieved very much over my father's death.  She longed to go back to her
+old home in Connecticut, but that could not be.  She died murmuring the
+words of her favourite psalm, 'The Lord is my Shepherd, I shall not
+want.'  She was a good, true woman, and a mother to me.  It is very
+hard to lose our loved ones."
+
+"But we have the Indians, Pete, Sam, and Kitty," James reminded.  "They
+are coming to-morrow, and I am so glad.  Sam is going to make me a bow
+and a whole lot of arrows."
+
+"And Kitty promised me a pair of snow-shoes," Ruth said.
+
+"But Pete's going to bring me the best of all," Tommy chimed.
+
+"What's that, dear?" his mother asked.
+
+"Spruce gum.  He said he would, anyway."
+
+James and Ruth laughed so heartily that Tommy became embarrassed, and
+hid his flushed face against his mother.
+
+"There, there, dear," Jean soothed.  "It is all right, James and Ruth
+will want some gum, too.  I am sure they will be very glad to see you,
+and will have presents for all.  We must make this a very pleasant
+Christmas for them.  They are getting old, so we cannot expect to have
+them with us much longer.  Their house is all ready, and Martha is
+preparing a great dinner for them.  We shall all go over to visit them."
+
+"Did daddy build that house for them?" Ruth asked.
+
+"Yes, you know he did.  It was his own idea.  He was so grateful to Sam
+and Kitty for what they did for me, that he had the house built just
+for them and Pete.  It is their home, and they can come there at any
+time, and stay just as long as they please.  They shall never want so
+long as we have anything to share with them.  Sam and Kitty saved my
+life, and I can never forget how good they were to me."
+
+Ruth reached up and reverently touched the little arrow fastened to a
+chain about her mother's neck.
+
+"And was it really that which told them who you were?" she asked in an
+awed voice.
+
+"Yes, it was this arrow your father gave me so long ago.  I have worn
+it ever since.  We call it 'The King's Arrow,' because of your father's
+name when he was in the royal service.  It has meant a great deal to us
+both, for it was truly a Love-Charm."
+
+And while they sat there and talked, Dane appeared in the doorway, and
+stood unnoticed for a few seconds watching the pleasant scene before
+the fire.  His face bore the expression of great happiness.  He had
+made a good trip to the city, and had returned laden with many things
+for Christmas Day.  Some of these he had hidden safely away until the
+children were all in bed.  His eyes shone with joy as they rested upon
+his loved ones; his wife, fair and comely, and his children full of
+health and innocent charm.  In another minute he was in their midst,
+and radiant faces and shouts of delight told their own tale of
+happiness unalloyed.
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE KING'S ARROW***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 16698-8.txt or 16698-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/6/6/9/16698
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+